You are on page 1of 377

AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC &

AutoPILOT PRO
Updated February 23, 2010
Table of Contents
Using AutoCONFIG............................................................................ 7
System Menu........................................................................................................ 8
Connection......................................................................................................... 9
Change Access Level ......................................................................................... 14
Flash RTU & Exit ............................................................................................... 15
Files Menu .......................................................................................................... 16
Upload Configuration from RTU ........................................................................... 17
Download Configuration from RTU ....................................................................... 18
Generate PCCHIT (MBS##) File .......................................................................... 19
View PCCHIT (MBS##) File ................................................................................ 21
View Report ..................................................................................................... 23
Export File ....................................................................................................... 24
Tools Menu......................................................................................................... 28
Calibrate.......................................................................................................... 29
Set Date/Time .................................................................................................. 30
Cold Restart ..................................................................................................... 31
Warm Restart ................................................................................................... 32
Calculator ........................................................................................................ 33
Upload System Log File...................................................................................... 34
Simple I/O Connection ....................................................................................... 35
Measurement Config Wizard ............................................................................... 36
Options Menu ..................................................................................................... 37
Toolbar, Navigation Bar, or Status Bar ................................................................. 38
Debug Log ....................................................................................................... 39
Monochrome .................................................................................................... 40
Table's Info ...................................................................................................... 41
Language......................................................................................................... 42
Program Mode .................................................................................................. 43
Colors Menu ....................................................................................................... 44
Help Menu .......................................................................................................... 45
Using the Navigation Bar ...................................................................................... 46
The Toolbar ........................................................................................................ 47
Saving & Refreshing Data ..................................................................................... 48
Copying Data ...................................................................................................... 49
Generating Meter Run Reports............................................................................... 52
For a DP Flow Run............................................................................................. 53
For an AGA 7 Flow Run ...................................................................................... 54
For a Liquid Flow Run ........................................................................................ 55
Viewing Reports .................................................................................................. 56
AutoCONFIG Wizards...................................................................... 57
The Measurement Config Wizard............................................................................ 57
The I/O Config Wizard.......................................................................................... 72

Thermo Fisher Scientific ii


Table of Contents

The Calibration Wizard ......................................................................................... 75


Physical Data Points ....................................................................... 86
Floating Point Value (Table #1) ............................................................................. 87
General Configuration for Floating Point Value Table .............................................. 88
Value Limits for Floating Point Value Table ............................................................ 89
Alarms Limit for Floating Point Value Table ........................................................... 90
Discrete Value (Table #2)..................................................................................... 92
Byte Value (Table #3).......................................................................................... 93
16-Bit Word Value (Table #4) ............................................................................... 94
Text (Table #15)................................................................................................. 95
Physical Analog Input (#16) ................................................................................. 96
General Configuration of Physical Analog Input Table ............................................. 97
Value Limits for Physical Analog Input .................................................................. 98
Alarm Limits for Physical Analog Input ................................................................. 99
Miscellaneous Data for Physical Analog Input .......................................................101
Calibration Data for Physical Analog Input ...........................................................102
As Found / As Left Data for Physical Analog Input .................................................103
Raw Value Limits for Physical Analog Input ..........................................................104
Physical Smart Xducer (Table#17) ........................................................................105
Using a Smart Transducer with AutoEXEC ............................................................105
Using a Smart Transducer with AutoPILOT PRO ....................................................107
General Configuration for Physical Smart Transducer Input Table ............................108
Value Limits for Physical Smart Transducer Input..................................................109
Alarm Limits for Physical Smart Transducer Input .................................................110
Miscellaneous Data for Physical Smart Transducer Input ........................................112
Calibration Data for Physical Smart Transducer Input ............................................113
As Found / As Left Data for Physical Smart Transducer Input..................................114
Raw Value Limits for Physical Smart Transducer Input...........................................115
Physical Honeywell DE Input (Table #18)...............................................................116
General Configuration for Physical Honeywell DE Input Table..................................117
Value Limits for Physical Honeywell DE Input .......................................................118
Alarm Limits for Physical Honeywell DE Input .......................................................119
Miscellaneous Data for Physical Honeywell DE Input ..............................................121
Calibration Data for Physical Honeywell DE Input ..................................................122
As Found / As Left Data for Physical Honeywell DE Input .......................................123
Raw Value Limits for Physical Honeywell DE Input.................................................124
Discrete Input Configuration (Table #19) ...............................................................125
Accumulator Configuration (Table #20) .................................................................127
Physical Analog Output (Table #21) ......................................................................129
General Configuration for Physical Analog Output Table .........................................130
Value Limits for Physical Analog Output...............................................................131
Alarm Limits for Physical Analog Output ..............................................................132
Miscellaneous Data for Physical Analog Output .....................................................134

Thermo Fisher Scientific iii


Table of Contents

Discrete Output Configuration (Table #22).............................................................135


Calculations .................................................................................. 137
Calculation Thread Allocation (Table #32) ..............................................................138
PID (Table #33) .................................................................................................139
Sample PID Graphs ..........................................................................................142
Proportional Output (Table #34)...........................................................................147
High / Low Selection (Table #35) .........................................................................149
Alarm Status (Table #36) ....................................................................................150
Point Type Conversion (Table #37) .......................................................................151
Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)...................................................................152
Static Data for Differential Pressure Flow Calculation Table ....................................153
Instantaneous Data for Differential Pressure Flow Calculations................................156
Setting Engineering Units for Differential Pressure Flow Calculations........................160
Min/Max Data for Differential Pressure Flow Calculations........................................161
Location Factor for Differential Pressure Flow Calculations......................................162
History ...........................................................................................................163
Well Stream Factor for Differential Pressure Flow Calculations ................................165
Water Vapor Factor for Differential Pressure Flow Calculations ................................166
AGA 7 Flow (Table #39) ......................................................................................167
Static Data for AGA 7 Flow Calculation Table ........................................................168
Instantaneous Data for AGA 7 Flow Calculations ...................................................171
Setting Engineering Units for AGA 7 Flow Calculations ...........................................173
Min/Max Data for AGA 7 Flow Calculations ...........................................................174
History ...........................................................................................................175
K-Factor Setup for AGA 7 Flow Calculations .........................................................177
Location Factor for AGA 7 Flow Calculations .........................................................178
Well Stream for AGA 7 Flow Calculations .............................................................179
Water Vapor Factor for AGA 7 Flow Calculations ...................................................180
AGA 10 Speed of Sound (Table #40).....................................................................181
General Configuration for AGA 10 Calculation .......................................................182
Setting Engineering Units for AGA 10 Calculations.................................................183
Speed of Sound Data for AGA 10 Calculations ......................................................184
Meter Station (Table #41) ...................................................................................185
Meter Run Switching (Table #42) .........................................................................186
Overview for Run Switching Calculation ...............................................................187
General Configuration for Run Switching Calculation..............................................188
Run Configuration for Run Switching Calculation ...................................................190
Historical Averages (Table #43) ...........................................................................192
General Setup for Historical Averages .................................................................193
Historical Average Configuration.........................................................................195
Viewing Historical Average Data .........................................................................196
Floating Point Scaling (Table #44) ........................................................................197
16-Bit Word Scaling (Table #45) ..........................................................................198
Discrete Logical OR (Table #46) ...........................................................................199

Thermo Fisher Scientific iv


Table of Contents

Discrete Logical AND (Table #47) .........................................................................200


Floating Point Summing (Table #48) .....................................................................201
PLC Program (Table #49) ....................................................................................202
Floating Point Copy (Table #50) ...........................................................................203
Liquid Flow (Table #51) ......................................................................................204
General Configuration for Liquid Flow Calculation ..................................................205
Orifice Parameters for Liquid Flow Calculation Table ..............................................208
Monthly Volume Report for Liquid Flow Calculations ..............................................210
Setting Engineering Units and DI/DO for Liquid Flow Calculations............................211
Flow/Volume Data for Liquid Flow Calculations .....................................................213
History ...........................................................................................................215
Last Periodic Data for Liquid Flow Calculations......................................................217
Linear Factor Setup for Liquid Flow Calculations....................................................218
Batch Info for Liquid Flow Calculations ................................................................219
Last Batch Data for Liquid Flow Calculations.........................................................221
Proving (Table #53) ...........................................................................................223
General Configuration for Prover Calculation Table ................................................224
I/O Status for Prover Calculation ........................................................................227
Results for Prover Calculations ...........................................................................228
Single/Trial Prover Data ....................................................................................230
Density Calculation (Table #56) ...........................................................................231
Station Control (Table #57) .................................................................................232
Multiplexer (Table #59).......................................................................................233
Sampler Accumulator (Table #60) ........................................................................234
Scheduled Copy Table (Table #61) .......................................................................235
Nomination Control (Table #62) ...........................................................................237
Remote Control Valve (Table #63) ........................................................................239
Radio Scheduling Table (Table #64)......................................................................240
Plunger Lift (Table #65) ......................................................................................242
Original Method ...............................................................................................243
Load Factor Method ..........................................................................................253
Timer Method ..................................................................................................263
No Pit Method..................................................................................................271
Timer No Pit Method .........................................................................................280
Manual Method ................................................................................................288
Intermittent Method .........................................................................................296
Gas Lift Method ...............................................................................................301
Instantaneous Data for Flow Control Plunger........................................................307
Flow Rate History Data for Flow Control Plunger ...................................................309
Off Time History Data for Flow Control Plunger .....................................................310
Tubing & Casing Data for Flow Control Plunger .....................................................311
History for Flow Control Plunger .........................................................................312
Plunger Summary ............................................................................................313
Sequencing & Direction (Table #67)......................................................................317
Gas Quality Data (Table #128).............................................................................318

Thermo Fisher Scientific v


Table of Contents

Communications ........................................................................... 319


Setting Up Communication Ports (Table #96) .........................................................320
Local Port Configuration ....................................................................................321
Ethernet Port Configuration ...............................................................................324
Defining Communication Blocks ............................................................................327
Modbus Slave Communication Blocks (Table #97) ................................................327
Modbus Master Communication Blocks (Table #98)...............................................328
Chromatograph (Table #100) ............................................................................330
Tank Gauge Configuration (Table #101) ..............................................................340
Interface & Miscellaneous Items .................................................. 342
Interface ...........................................................................................................342
Miscellaneous ....................................................................................................343
System Status (Table #30) ...............................................................................344
System Control (Table #31) ..............................................................................347
Historical Data Log Allocation (Table #192) .........................................................349
Audit/Alarm Data Log Allocation (Table #193)......................................................350
LCD Scroll List (Table #208) ..............................................................................351
Keypad Lists (Tables #209–#212)......................................................................352
The Password Table (Table #213): Adding Users & Setting Security Access Levels.....354
Differential Pressure Audit/Alarm Base Register Assignments (Table #225) ..............359
Differential Pressure Flow Calculation History Log Assignments (Table #226)............360
AGA 7 Flow Calculation History Log Assignments (Table #227) ...............................361
AGA 7 Audit/Alarm Base Register Assignments (Table #233)..................................362
GQ Audit/Alarm Base Register Assignments (Table #234) ......................................363
Glossary ....................................................................................... 364
Index............................................................................................ 374

Thermo Fisher Scientific vi


Chapter 1

Using AutoCONFIG
You can navigate through AutoCONFIG using the main menus, navigation bar, or the toolbar.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 7


Using AutoCONFIG
System Menu

System Menu

Thermo Fisher Scientific 8


Using AutoCONFIG
System Menu

Connection

The Communication Parameters screen allows you to set up connection information for multiple
locations or units. You can access this screen through the main menu (System > Connection) or the
Connect to Unit icon on the toolbar.

There are three connections options (Comm Port field):

 Off line connection


 Remote connection via TCP/IP
 Local connection via COM1/COM3

Thermo Fisher Scientific 9


Using AutoCONFIG
System Menu

Creating an Off Line Connection

An off line connection allows you to create a configuration without actually connecting to a unit.

Name: Enter a name that describes this connection.


Comm Port: Select Off Line.
Create a New Off Line Config?: Choose whether you want to create a default configuration or
modify an existing configuration. If you select Modify an Existing Configuration, you will be
prompted to locate the configuration file (.cfg).
AutoEXEC/AutoPILOT PRO: Select the appropriate instrument.
Adjust Table 15 Text: Select whether you want to adjust the text table (Table #15). This
adjustment causes the offline configurator to allocate the maximum number of Table #15
entries for all table entries the configuration has.
Enable Calculations: Select whether you want to enable calculations for this connection.
After configuring a new connection, click Save and the connection will be added to the Connection
List. When you are ready to connect, open this screen and double-click the connection in the list. The
connection information will be displayed. Click Connect. Delete connections in the Connection List by
highlighting the connection and clicking Delete.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 10


Using AutoCONFIG
System Menu

Creating a Remote Connection via TCP/IP

Name: Enter a name that will help you identify this connection.
Unit Type: Select AutoEXEC-AutoPILOT PRO.
Address: Enter the physical address of the unit you will connect to.
Comm. Port: Select TCP/IP (WINSOCK).
IP Address: Enter the IP address of the RTU.
Port: Set the port number the unit will use when communicating with the server.
Number of Retries: Set the number of times the software should attempt to connect to the
unit before timing out and declaring failure.
Number of Nulls: Set the number of null bytes to pad the data packet with if there is not
enough data to fill the last packet.
RX Delay: RX Delay is the number of seconds that the instrument should wait to receive a
reply from the RTU before it gives up and attempts another message.
After configuring a new connection, click Save and the connection will be added to the Connection
List. When you are ready to connect, open this screen and double-click the connection in the list. The
connection information will be displayed. Click Connect. Delete connections in the Connection List by
highlighting the connection and clicking Delete.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 11


Using AutoCONFIG
System Menu

Creating a Local Connection

Name: Enter a name that describes and will help you identify this connection.
Unit Type: Select AutoEXEC-AutoPILOT PRO.
Address: This field is not applicable to local connections.
Comm Port: Select the communications port (COM1, COM3).
Baud Rate: Select the baud rate of the communications port. Supported baud rates: 300, 600,
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800, and 115200.
Parity Bit: Select the communications port parity. None is the default.
Stop Bit: Select the communications port stop bits. 1 is the default.
CTS Wait: CTS Wait is the amount of time in milliseconds the program should wait for the CTS
signal to be returned from the software's local communications device after raising a RTS.
RTS Wait: RTS Wait is the amount of time in milliseconds the program should delay raising a RTS
after receiving the last data byte from the RTU.
RTS Rise: RTS Rise is the amount of time in milliseconds the RTS signal should be raised before
the program sends the first data byte to the RTU.
RTS Fall: RTS Fall is the amount of time in milliseconds the program should hold the RTS signal
as high after sending the last data byte to the RTU.
Number of Retries: Set the number of times the software should attempt to connect to the unit
before timing out and declaring failure.
Number of Nulls: Set the number of null bytes to pad the data packet with if there is not enough
data to fill the last packet.
RX Delay: RX Delay is the number of seconds that the instrument should wait to receive a reply
from the RTU before it gives up and attempts another message.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 12


Using AutoCONFIG
System Menu

After configuring a new connection, click Save and the connection will be added to the Connection
List. When you are ready to connect, open this screen and double-click the connection in the list. The
connection information will be displayed. Click Connect. Delete connections in the Connection List by
highlighting the connection and clicking Delete.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 13


Using AutoCONFIG
System Menu

Change Access Level

When you select Change Access Level you will be prompted for a user name and password. Enter a
valid user name and password for the security access level you want. For more on using passwords,
refer to Password Table.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 14


Flash RTU & Exit

Select Flash RTU from the System menu when you are ready to upgrade the RTU firmware. The
upgrade procedure is below.
Select Exit to close AutoCONFIG.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 15


Using AutoCONFIG
Files Menu

Files Menu

Thermo Fisher Scientific 16


Using AutoCONFIG
Files Menu

Upload Configuration from RTU

When you select the Upload Configuration from RTU item (from Files main menu or via the icon on the
toolbar), the software will generate the configuration file (.cfg). When prompted, save the file to the
desired location. It is recommended that you do this whenever you make any changes to the
configuration. Having the current configuration file on a PC enables you to easily reconfigure the RTU
if a cold start is necessary.

Upload Configuration from RTU icon

Thermo Fisher Scientific 17


Using AutoCONFIG
Files Menu

Download Configuration from RTU

If you have uploaded the RTU configuration file (.cfg) to a PC, you can quickly reconfigure the unit by
downloading the file from the PC. When you select the Download Configuration to RTU item (from Files
main menu or the icon on the toolbar), the software prompts you to set the time and date. After you
have done so, locate the correct configuration file to download and select Open.

Download Configuration to RTU icon

Thermo Fisher Scientific 18


Using AutoCONFIG
Files Menu

Generate PCCHIT (MBS##) File

This function allows you to retrieve meter historical data and save in the new AutoEXEC/AutoPILOT
PRO (.hst) file format or save in the PCCHIT (MBS##) file format for the DOS version of AutoCONFIG.
Note: AutoPILOT PRO PCCHIT files are limited in content per the restrictions of the MBS## file
format.
1. Go to Files and select Generate PCCHIT (MBS##). The Generate ACFG Export - Select
Applicable Runs window opens.

2. If you select Upload Meter Historical (.hst) as the File Format, the software will generate
a historical (.hst) formatted file. If you select Generate PCCHIT (MBS##), a PCCHIT
(MBS##) formatted file will be generated or appended to an existing MBS## file.
3. From the Report Type drop-down, select the historical record type required. If your selection
in step 2 was to generate a historical (.hst) file, your options are: Meter Hourly, Meter Daily,
or Meter Monthly. If you selected a PCCHIT (MBS##) file format, you have the same options
plus Meter All (all record types).
4. In the Meter Run(s) box, select each meter run to retrieve historical data from and generate
a file.
5. Enter the Number of Days (calendar days) of historical data to retrieve.
6. The Start Date and End Date range is computed from the previous entry, but you can edit it
directly to change the historical date/hour range required. Click the small Browse button to
select from a calendar window.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 19


Using AutoCONFIG
Files Menu

7. Click OK. The following window will appear. For .hst file formats, locate the file destination
and click Save to begin the historical retrieval process and file generation. For MSB## file
formats, select an existing MBS## file to append the historical data to or create a new
MBS## file. Click Save to begin the process.

8. Upon completion the following window will appear, showing the destination path and file
generated. Click OK to complete the process. If any process or file error is detected, the
destination file will not be generated. In this case, if the file format is PCCHIT and you selected
to append the file to an existing MBS## file, the MBS## file will be restored to its original
contents.

9. You can now view the PCCHIT (MBS##) file.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 20


Using AutoCONFIG
Files Menu

View PCCHIT (MBS##) File

This function allows you to display meter historical data previously saved to a PCCHIT (MBS##) file.
1. Go to Files and select View PCCHIT (MBS##) File. The MBS## Report Display window
opens.

2. Click the Select PCCHIT Files button to browse to and select a previously generated PCCHIT
(MBS##) file. The following window will be displayed, showing all the meter reports appended
to the MBS## file. Each report is identified by meter name when generated, data type (daily,
periodic, monthly), and the date/time the report was generated.

3. Select the meter report you want to view. Click OK.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 21


Using AutoCONFIG
Files Menu

4. The Report Display window shown earlier will be populated with the meter historical data.

To display another meter report appended to the selected MBS## file, click the Select Report
button.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 22


Using AutoCONFIG
Files Menu

View Report

This feature allows you to view reports generated using the Generate Report function. When you
select the View Report item (from Files main menu or the icon toolbar), a dialog opens. Locate the
report file (.hst) you want and open it. The report opens inside AutoCONFIG. See the figure below for
an example of a report and descriptions of several toolbar items. The navigation bar was closed to
allow more room for the report page.

View Report icon

Thermo Fisher Scientific 23


Using AutoCONFIG
Files Menu

Export File

With the Export File function, you can export previously saved historical (.hst) files to other formats.
Follow the steps below.
1. Go to Files > Export File.
2. From the Select Historical File to Export window, select the .hst file you want to export from
the list displayed or locate the file using the Browse button. Highlight applicable file, and click
Ok.

3. The Export Historical File/s window will open showing the specific meter information extracted
from the file and various format options to export the file.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 24


Using AutoCONFIG
Files Menu

4. In the Export Historical File/s window, the Selected Historical File, History Type, Run
Number, Meter Name, Meter Number fields contain data extracted from the file to identify
its source. This data cannot be changed.
5. In the Export File Format field, select which format type to export the file as. Options are:
Flow-Cal Flow Measurement (Version-3), Flow-Cal Flow Measurement (Version-5), Pgas EFM
Text CSV (Version 4.2), Pgas XML (Version 6.1) eXtensible Markup Language, and Text CSV
(Comma Separated Values).

Thermo Fisher Scientific 25


Using AutoCONFIG
Files Menu

6. The Select Format Options vary depending on the format type previously selected and allow
for variations in use of the meter name, meter number, and gas analysis use of C6+:

 FlowCal: Choose how to format the header for the location and station. You can select
None (no header will be used), Meter Name, or Meter Number.
 PGas EFM Text CSV: Choose how to format the analysis ID and whether C6+
summation should be enabled or disabled. For the analysis ID you can select to use
Meter Name, Meter Number, or the C6+ Summation.

 PGas XML: Choose how to format the meter ID. You can select Meter Name or Meter
Number.
 Text CSV: Choose how to format the meter name field and whether to use quotations
in the field format. For the meter name, you can select to use Meter Name or Meter
Number.
7. This data in the Export from Start Date/Export to End Date fields is extracted from the
historical file and reflects the total date/time ranges of the historical records in the file. If a
lesser amount of historical data is needed, then edit these fields specifically or click the small
Browse button to select form a calendar window.
8. Check Use Meter Name in File Name or Use Meter Number in File Name to automatically
use either of these names extracted from the .hst file as the export file name to be generated.
If used, skip to step 10.
9. If you did not make a selection in step 8, enter an Export File Name to be used (this name
MUST conform to the MS Windows file naming requirements as to characters used). The
Export File Name extension will be automatically generated per the type of format selected in
step 6. They are listed below.
 Flow-Cal: .cfx
 PGas CSV: .vol, .evt, .arm, .ana
 PGas XML: .xml
 Text: .txt
10. An option to Append the date or time to the export file name is available. Select one of the
date/time formats to append or select None to append nothing.
11. Check the applicable data to be included in the export file. The number of files generated is
based on these data selections and the export file format selected in step 5.
 Export Volume Data applies to Meter Daily or Periodic Historical records.
 Export Audit Data applies to Meter Audit records.
 Export Alarm Data applies to Meter Alarm records.

 Export Static Header applies to Meter Static Header information.


12. Click the Browse and Select Destination Folder button to select the destination folder for
the export files that will be generated by this process. The Files to be Generated per
Selected Export Format will populate automatically based on the various naming selections
and the format type selected.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 26


Using AutoCONFIG
Files Menu

13. Click the Start Export File button to begin the export file process. At the prompt, select Yes
to continue or No to abort/exit.

14. Upon completion, an advisory message showing exported results will be displayed. If any
process or file error is detected, the exported file will not be generated.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 27


Using AutoCONFIG
Tools Menu

Tools Menu

Thermo Fisher Scientific 28


Using AutoCONFIG
Tools Menu

Calibrate

This selection activates the Calibration wizard, which takes you through the steps to perform input
verification and calibration. Learn more about the Calibration wizard in Chapter 2.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 29


Using AutoCONFIG
Tools Menu

Set Date/Time

There are two ways to set the date and time— Automatic and Manual.
To use the date and time as set in the PC, select Automatic and click Apply.
To set the time and date manually, select Manual. Click the drop down arrow to the right of
the date, and use the calendar to select the date. Enter the times values in the HH:MM:SS
text boxes. Click Apply.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 30


Using AutoCONFIG
Tools Menu

Cold Restart

A cold restart resets the unit to factory defaults. All setup data and historical and audit records are
destroyed. It is recommended that you upload setup configuration before cold starting the unit.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 31


Using AutoCONFIG
Tools Menu

Warm Restart

A warm restart cycles power to the unit. No data is destroyed.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 32


Using AutoCONFIG
Tools Menu

Calculator

This item opens the Microsoft Calculator.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 33


Using AutoCONFIG
Tools Menu

Upload System Log File

This function generates a system log. Save the log as a .txt file when prompted. After you save the
file, the software automatically opens it in Notepad.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 34


Using AutoCONFIG
Tools Menu

Simple I/O Connection

A tool that enables you to quickly link inputs to differential pressure and/or turbine meter runs. Learn
more about the I/O Config wizard in Chapter 2.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 35


Using AutoCONFIG
Tools Menu

Measurement Config Wizard

A tool that helps you configure differential pressure and/or turbine meter runs quickly. Learn more
about the Measurement Config wizard in Chapter 2.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 36


Using AutoCONFIG
Options Menu

Options Menu

Thermo Fisher Scientific 37


Using AutoCONFIG
Options Menu

Toolbar, Navigation Bar, or Status Bar

Toggle these items on and off.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 38


Using AutoCONFIG
Options Menu

Debug Log

For in-house debugging purposes only.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 39


Using AutoCONFIG
Options Menu

Monochrome

Not currently active. Use the Colors menu to create customized color schemes.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 40


Using AutoCONFIG
Options Menu

Table's Info

This selection causes the information to be displayed for the currently open table. For instance, if you
are viewing the Instantaneous Data page for Table #38 (Differential Pressure Flow) and you select
Table's Info, the connection information (field and corresponding connection). An example is shown
below.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 41


Using AutoCONFIG
Options Menu

Language

Users can translate the program or add another language by using the translation utility.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 42


Using AutoCONFIG
Options Menu

Program Mode

Select whether the software opens in Advanced or Standard mode. Advanced mode allows for access
to all the tables and menus available for use in AutoCONFIG for the connected RTU. Standard mode
allows for limited access to tables and menus.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 43


Using AutoCONFIG
Colors Menu

Colors Menu

The Set Program Colors item allows you view the default color schemes for inside/outside viewing
and to create customized color schemes. For the outside scheme, select colors that enhance
viewing outdoors under bright sunlight.

Once you have customized the color schemes, select the color scheme you want to use (Use
Default Inside/Default Outside/Customized Inside/Customized Outside).

Thermo Fisher Scientific 44


Using AutoCONFIG
Help Menu

Help Menu

The Knowledge Base menu item provides access to this help system, and the About item contains
information about the AutoCONFIG software, such as the version number.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 45


Using AutoCONFIG
Using the Navigation Bar

Using the Navigation Bar

Navigation through the various configuration screens and data displays is accomplished through the
navigation bar. The menu headings are discussed in separate chapters.
Note If connected to an AutoPILOT PRO, the Interface menu title is shown but not accessible. This
feature is available with the AutoEXEC only.
Note If the Physical Data Points and Calculations headings are shown but not accessible, click the
Standard Mode icon in the top right corner of the AutoCONFIG screen. It will change to Advanced
Mode, and the menus will become available.

To change the size and placement of the bar:

 Double-click the navigation bar to make it an adjustable window. Click and grab the top,
bottom, and/or sides of the windows to adjust the size.
 Click the docking button to hide the navigation bar. A tab appears on the main screen. Move
your cursor over the tab, and the bar slides out. Click the docking button a second time to lock
the bar into its original position.
 Click and grab the navigation bar's title bar. Drag the window to the desired location and
release the mouse button.

NOTE When you expand a heading, the menu items are preceded by a number. This is the
corresponding table number. For example:

Table 96: Communication port definition table


Table 97: Modbus slave communications block table
Table 98: Modbus Master communications block table
Table 100: Chromatograph communications block table
Table 101: Tank gauge communications block table

Thermo Fisher Scientific 46


Using AutoCONFIG
The Toolbar

The Toolbar

The toolbar contains the following icons: Connect to Unit, Download Configuration to RTU, Upload
Configuration from RTU, View Report, Print Report, Calibrate, Plate Change, Set Unit's Date/Time,
Change Access Level, and Knowledge Base.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 47


Using AutoCONFIG
Saving & Refreshing Data

Saving & Refreshing Data

There are two buttons at the top of the configuration pages. The Refresh button updates the data on
the page. Click the Apply button after you have made changes to send the data to the unit.
For continuous updates, enable the Auto Refresh function, also located at the top of the page.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 48


Using AutoCONFIG
Copying Data

Copying Data

You can copy data into multiple fields using the copy and paste functions. For example, configure
entry #1 of the local LCD scroll list with the hourly flow rate from DP #1.
1. Go to the page containing the field you want to copy. For this example, go to Calculations >
38-Differential Pressure Flow > DP Flow Calc #1 > Instantaneous. If you hover over the
Hourly Flow Rate field, the table and field data will pop up.

2. With the mouse still hovering over the field, right click and select Copy. Note that in some
cases, you can right click on the label for that point or item. See an example below.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 49


Using AutoCONFIG
Copying Data

3. Go to the Display Scroll List page (Miscellaneous > 208-Local LCD Display Scroll List > Entry
#1). Click on the row you want to paste the data. In this case, click on row 1. Right click and
select Paste. The field data will appear in that row.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 50


Using AutoCONFIG
Copying Data

You can also use copy and paste to connect physical inputs and data points. As an example, connect
the current DP value of a run and a physical analog input.
1. Go to Physical Data Points > 16-Physical Analog Input.
2. Right click Analog Input #1, and select Copy.
3. Go to Calculations > 38-Differential Pressure Flow > Instantaneous.
4. Right click Differential Pressure, and select Paste.
5. Hover over the Differential Pressure field, you will see that the point has been connected to
the input.

Note An easier alternative for connecting inputs to the differential pressure or AGA 7 table is to use
the I/O Config wizard in Chapter 2.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 51


Using AutoCONFIG
Generating Meter Run Reports

Generating Meter Run Reports

AutoCONFIG has the capability of generating reports for configured meter runs.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 52


Using AutoCONFIG
Generating Meter Run Reports

For a DP Flow Run

1. Go to Miscellaneous > 226-Differential Pressure Flow Calculation to view default history


log assignments.

2. To change the history log, click on the row you want to change. A drop down arrow appears.
Click it, and scroll through the list. Select the item you want to add. See an example below

3. When you finish editing the history log, click Apply.

4. If you add items to the history log, you will need to change the number of items contained in
each record. Go to Miscellaneous > 192-Historical Data Log Allocation. Change the value
in the Items per Record field. For example, if you added Pipe Diameter to row 12 in step 2,
change this value to 12.

5. Go to Calculations > 38-Differential Pressure Flow. Select the run number (Calc #1, #2,
etc.). Click History > Setting, and set the history parameters (go to History Setup topic
page).

6. Click the Data tab. Select whether you want hourly or periodic data, and then click Retrieve
Data. The software displays the data in three tabs (history, audits, alarms).

7. You can generate a report by click the Generate Report button. This function saves the
report data (.hst file) on the PC so that you can view it or print it at a later time.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 53


Using AutoCONFIG
Generating Meter Run Reports

For an AGA 7 Flow Run

1. Go to Miscellaneous > 227-AGA-7 Flow Calculation History Log to view default history log
assignments.

2. To change the history log, click on the row you want to change. A drop down arrow appears.
Click it, and scroll through the list. Select the item you want to add. See an example below.

3. When you finish editing the history log, click Apply.

4. If you add items to the history log, you will need to change the number of items contained in
each record. Go to Miscellaneous > 192-Historical Data Log Allocation. Change the value
in the Items per Record field. For example, if you added Daily Flow Rate to row 12 in step 2,
change this value to 12.

5. Go to Calculations > 39-AGA-7 Flow. Select the run number (Calc #1, #2, etc.). Click
History > Setting to set the history parameters (go to History Setup topic page).

6. Click the Data tab. Select whether you want hourly or periodic data, and then click Retrieve
Data. The software displays the data in three tabs (history, audits, alarms).

7. You can now generate a report by clicking the Generate Report button. This function saves
the report data (.hst file) on the PC so that you can view it or print it at a later time

Thermo Fisher Scientific 54


Using AutoCONFIG
Generating Meter Run Reports

For a Liquid Flow Run

*AutoEXEC only

1. Go to Miscellaneous > 229-Liquid Flow Calculation History Log to view default history log
assignments.

2. To change the history log, click on the row you want to change. A drop down arrow appears.
Click it, and scroll through the list. Select the item you want to add. See an example below.

3. When you finish editing the history log, click Apply.

4. If you add items to the history log, you will need to change the number of items contained in
each record. Go to Miscellaneous > 192-Historical Data Log Allocation. Change the value
in the Items per Record field. For example, if you added K Factor to row 16 in step 2, change
this value to 16.

5. Go to Calculations > 51-Liquid Flow. Select the run number (Calc #1, #2, etc.). Click History
> Setting, and set the history parameters (go to History Setup topic page).

6. Click the Data tab. Select whether you want hourly or periodic data, and then click Retrieve
Data. The software displays the data in three tabs (history, audits, alarms).

7. You can now generate a report by clicking the Generate Report button. This function saves
the report data (.hst file) on the PC so that you can view it or print it at a later time.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 55


Using AutoCONFIG
Viewing Reports

Viewing Reports

This feature allows you to view reports generated using the Generate Report function described
earlier. When you select the View Report item (from Files main menu or toolbar), a dialog opens.
Locate the report file (.hst) you want and open it. The report opens inside AutoCONFIG. See the figure
below for an example of a report and descriptions of several toolbar items. The navigation bar was
closed to allow more room for the report page.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 56


Chapter 2

AutoCONFIG Wizards

The Measurement Config Wizard

The Measurement Config wizard is a tool that enables you to configure differential pressure and/or
turbine meter runs quickly by condensing the configuration process into a few screens. Access the
wizard by selecting Tools > Measurement Config Wizard. This method allows you to configure
multiple meter runs.
If you only want to configure one meter run, a DP meter run for example, you can expand the 38-
Differential Pressure Flow heading, right click over an entry, and select Config Wizard. This wizard
will take you through the configuration process for one meter run only.
1. Go to Tools > Measurement Config Wizard to activate the wizard. The Communication
Parameters screen opens, which allows you to set up the connection. Refer to “Setting
Communication Parameters”. When ready, click Next.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 57


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Measurement Config Wizard

2. If you selected a local or remote connection above, skip to step 3. If you selected an off line
configuration, the next screen allows you to customize your configuration. Scroll through the
list and edit the number of entries per table as required for your setup. When ready, click
Next.

3. Select the run type and the number of runs to configure. If you selected an off line
configuration you will be able to select the records to use for historical archives. This block is
not available if you selected a local or remote connection. When you are ready to continue,
click Next.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 58


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Measurement Config Wizard

4. Configure the static data for the first meter run. Going with the example above, run #1 is a DP
run that will be referred to on the AutoCONFIG screens as DP Flow Calc #1. When you have
completed this page, click Next.

Note: For this example, the DP runs will be configured first and the AGA 7 run last. If you
selected AGA 7 meter runs only in the previous screen, skip the DP run configuration sections
and go to step 8. Parameters are listed in the general order that they appear on the screen.

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation here.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
ID: The DP flow calculation table ID.
Pipe Thermal Expansion Coefficient: Enter the value that represents the amount the
meter run's pipe expands or contracts in inches per inch per °F (in/in-F).
Orifice Thermal Expansion Coefficient: Enter the value that represents the amount the
meter run's orifice plate expands or contracts in inches per inch per °F (in/in-F).
Isentropic Exponent: The isentropic exponent is equal to the ratio of the specific heat
(cp/cv) of the gas at constant pressure (cp) and constant volume (cv). It is independent of
pressure.
Pipe Diameter: Enter the actual measured inside pipe diameter in inches used by the
equations to calculate flow.
Orifice Diameter: Enter the actual measured orifice diameter in inches used by the
equations to calculate flow.
Atmospheric Pressure: Enter the current atmospheric pressure in psi measured at the
installation site.
Contract Hour: Enter the time of day that the unit will store an archive in the daily
historical log and start a new set of averages and accumulations for a new day. Valid entries
are 0 (midnight) through 23 (11 PM).
Pressure Base: Enter the base pressure that the flow equations use to correct the volumes.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 59


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Measurement Config Wizard

Temperature Base: Enter the base temperature that the flow equations use to correct the
volumes.
Low DP Cutoff: The low DP cutoff (low flow cutoff) is used to force the flow rate to zero
when the differential pressure drops below a set value.
Manual Flow Cutoff: For applications with bidirectional flow, you can change this field to
Force to force flow to zero.
Static Pressure Type: Select a gauge pressure or absolute pressure type.
Calculation Method: Select the AGA 3 method used for orifice flow measurement. Options
are listed below.

 AGA 2530-1992
 AGA 3-1985
 Gost
 V-Cone
 Slotted Orifice
 ISO 5167
 Gost 8.586-2005
Fpv Calculation Method: Select the method used for calculating supercompressibility for this
meter run. Options are listed below.

 NX-19: Gas calculation, 1985


 NX-19 Analysis: Gas calculation with full gas components, 1985
 AGA 8 Short: Gas calculation (no longer used)
 AGA 8 Gross: Gas calculation, 1992
 AGA 8 Detail: Gas calculation with full gas components, 1992
 GERG91 Mod: A supercompressibility calculation (Fpv) method used in the
calculation of the gas flow equation. This option should only be selected
for the GOST gas flow calculation.

 Constant 1.0: Assumes Fpv value as 1


 NX19 mod
GQ Data Definition Block: Select the gas quality data block (Table #128) that the meter run
is using.
Floating Point block
The parameters displayed in this section change depending on the calculation method you
selected.
AGA 2530-1992
AGA2530 Orifice Reference Temperature: Enter the reference temperature of the
orifice plate.
AGA2530 Pipe Reference Temperature: Enter the reference temperature of the pipe.
AGA2530 Tap Location: Select whether the location of the pressure tap relative to the
orifice plate is upstream or downstream.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 60


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Measurement Config Wizard

AGA 3-1985
AGA 3 Tap Location: Select whether the location of the pressure tap relative to the
orifice plate is upstream or downstream.
AGA 3 Tap Configuration: Select whether the tap configuration is a flange or pipe.
Gost
Gost Orifice Edge Radius: Enter the radius of the upstream edge of the orifice plate
hole.
Gost Pipe Wall Roughness: Enter the inside roughness of the pipe.
Gost Orifice Check Interval: Enter the length of time in years that can pass before the
orifice plate will be checked for wear.
V-Cone
V-Cone Calibration Temperature: This is the temperature at which the manufacturer
calibrated the meter when it was made.
V-Cone Flow Coefficient: Enter the coefficient factor applied for calculation.
Slotted Orifice
Slotted Beta: This value is a constant specific to the plate being used and is supplied by
the manufacturer of the meter.
Slotted Gas Viscosity: This value is calculated and supplied by the RTU.
Slotted Meter A–F Constants: These values are constants specific to the plate being
used and are supplied by the manufacturer of the meter.

5. Enable any required flow factors and set the engineering units for DP Flow Calc #1. When you
have completed this page, click Next.
Note: For an AGA 7 meter run, go to step 9.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 61


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Measurement Config Wizard

Location Factor block


The calculations in this section provide two factors: Fwl and Fpwl.
Fwl is the local gravitational correction factor and can be determined using the equation
below.

For additional information on obtaining gl using a curve-fit equation, refer to Appendix 3-


A.6 of Orifice Metering of Natural Gas, Part 3 (Third Ed., 1992).
Enable the calculation (Calculation Enable).
Enter the latitude in degrees and the height (elevation) in feet above sea level so the
software can calculate the factor.
For additional information on this calculation, refer to Appendix 3-A.6 of Orifice Metering of
Natural Gas, Part 3 (Third Ed., 1992).
The Fpwl factor is used to correct for the effect of local gravity on the weights of a
deadweight calibrator. See the Fpwl equation below.

When a deadweight calibrator is used for DP and SP, both must be corrected for local
gravity, and the corrections for them must be enabled separately
Enable the calculations (Fpwl SP Correction Calculation Enable and Fpwl DP Correction
Calculation Enable).
Enter the Fpwl gl and g0 values.
For additional information on this calculation, refer to Appendix 3-A.7 of Orifice Metering of
Natural Gas, Part 3 (Third Ed., 1992).
Well Stream block
A full well stream factor is provided for production applications that require compensation
for well stream conditions. If this calculation is enabled, the factor is directly multiplied by
the calculated gas volume.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 62


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Measurement Config Wizard

Fwv block
The water vapor factor (Fwv) is a direct multiplier into the flow equation that compensates
for any water vapor in the system. The number is a value close to the one derived from
the following equation:
Fwv = 1 - [((lb/MMcf) 21.0181)/1000000].
The Fwv for flowing gas that is considered fully saturated as currently implemented in the
standard Thermo Scientific flow computer software is shown below.

Enable the calculation (Calculation Enable).


Select the water vapor factor method of calculation (Correction Mode). Options are
shown below.
 Manual: Enter the Fwv directly (usually approximately .98). If you select this
option, see Fwv.
 Partial Calculation: Enter the pounds of water per million cubic feet of gas to
enable the RTU to calculate Fwv. If you select this option, see Water
Content.

 Full Calculation: The software assumes full saturation and calculates the
pounds of water per million cubic feet of gas at the measured temperature and
pressure. It then takes that result and calculates the Fwv factor. This option
is not an AGA approved method and should not be used for custody
transfer installations.
Water Content: If you select Partial as the correction mode, enter the water content of
the gas (lb/MMcf) to enable the RTU to calculate Fwv.
Fwv: Enter the Fwv directly (usually approximately .98) here if you select Manual as the
correction mode.
Engineering Units block
Set the engineering units to be used for the calculations. Selections are listed below.
Pipe/Orifice: inches, ft, mm, cm, m.
Atmospheric Pressure: psi, bar, mbar, Pascal, kPa, mPa, kg/cm2, mmHg, "H2O.
Differential Pressure: inH2O, mbar, kPa, kg/cm2, mmHg.
Static Pressure: psi, bar, mbar, Pascal, kPa, mPa, kg/cm2, mmHg, "H2O.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 63


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Measurement Config Wizard

Temperature: °F, °C, °R, K.


Volume: Mcf, cf, MMcf, M3, E3M3.
Flow Rate: Mcf, cf, MMcf, M3, E3M3.
Energy: MMBTU, BTU, MBTU, MJ, GJ.
Energy Rate: MMBTU, MBTU, MJ, GJ.

6. This screen allows you to connect the meter run’s differential pressure, static pressure, and
temperature to physical inputs. Select whether the differential pressure value will be
provided by a physical analog or smart transducer input. Then select the input entry number.
Repeat this for the static pressure and temperature.
When you have completed this page, click Download & Next to continue with the configuration
process. If you click the Download & Exit button, the wizard will download the current run
configuration and close. You will return to the main AutoCONFIG window. When you click
either of these buttons, you will be notified by the software that the calculation will be
configured and running if you continue. Select Yes to continue.

7. If you clicked the Download & Next button, one of two things will happen depending on where
you are in the configuration process. Both are described below.
If we continue with the example of two DP runs and one AGA 7 run, there are two runs
left to configure. The next screen will be the Static Data screen for the second DP run
(DP Flow Calc #2). Return to step 4 to start the configuration process. After configuring
the second DP run (when you reach this point again), the Static Data screen for the last
run (an AGA 7 run) will be displayed. Go to step 8 to start the configuration process.
If you selected only one run or if this is the last run to be configured, the software will
display that configuration is complete. See the figure below. Click the Done button at the
bottom of the page. The wizard will close, and you will return to the main AutoCONFIG
window.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 64


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Measurement Config Wizard

8. This step describes how to configure the static data for an AGA 7 meter run. When you have
completed this screen, click the Next button and continue.

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with
the calculation.
ID: The AGA 7 table ID.
Pipe Diameter: Enter the actual measured inside pipe diameter in inches used by the
equations to calculate flow.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 65


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Measurement Config Wizard

Atmospheric Pressure: Enter the current atmospheric pressure in psi measured at


the installation site.
Low Flow Cutoff Time: Low flow cutoff is used to force the flow rate to zero when
the input pulse frequency drops below a set value.
Low Frequency Cutoff: If the calculated frequency of the pulse input falls below this
value, the meter will be considered to NOT be flowing and the flow rate will be forced
to zero.
Accumulator Pulse Count (Main Pulse Count if Auto-Adjust selected as
calculation method): Connect this field to the physical accumulator input (Table
#20).
Data Valid Alarm Input: A discrete input, typically provided by an ultrasonic device
that indicates whether the primary device is operating properly. If this value is ON
(1), the flow calculation will stop.
Pulse Frequency: Pulse frequency is provided as information only as an indication of
the current pulse rate. This value is not used in the flow calculation.
Contract Hour: Enter the time of day that the unit will store an archive in the daily
historical log and start a new set of averages and accumulations for a new day. Valid
entries are 0 (midnight) through 23 (11 PM).
Flow Rate Filter Time: The flow rate filter time is basically the number of seconds
over which to average the current flow rate. This is used for intermittent or fluctuating
pulse inputs to smooth out the value when used in flow control.
Pressure Base: Enter the base pressure in psi that the flow equations use to correct
the volumes.
Temperature Base: Enter the base temperature in degrees Fahrenheit that the flow
equations use to correct the volumes.
M Correction Factor: Enter the meter correction factor provided by the turbine
meter manufacturer that is applied to the input pulses. This value does not have a
unit, and it is close to 1. During each cycle, the counted pulses are multiplied by this
value to arrive at a volume increment.
Manual Flow Cutoff: For applications with bidirectional flow, you can change this
field to Force to force flow to zero.
Static Pressure Type: Select a gauge pressure or absolute pressure type.
Calculation Method: Select whether this is a turbine meter or auto-adjust turbine
meter run. A turbine meter run uses a flow computer pulse input to measure the flow
based on pulses from a turbine blade. An auto-adjust turbine meter run uses two flow
computer pulse inputs to measure the flow based on pulses from turbine blades. The
pulse ratio between the pulses is used to compensate for mechanical wear.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 66


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Measurement Config Wizard

Fpv Calculation Method: Select the currently used method for calculating
supercompressibility for this meter run. Options are listed below.

 NX-19: Gas calculation, 1985


 NX-19 Analysis: Gas calculation with full gas components, 1985
 AGA 8 Short: Gas calculation (no longer used)
 AGA 8 Gross: Gas calculation, 1992
 AGA 8 Detail: Gas calculation with full gas components, 1992
 GERG91 Mod: A supercompressibility calculation (Fpv) method used in
the calculation of the gas flow equation. This option should only be
selected for the GOST gas flow calculation.

 Constant 1.0: Assumes Fpv value as 1, default


GQ Data Definition Block: Select the gas quality data block associated with this
calculation.
Floating Point block
If you select Auto-Adjust as the calculation method, a Floating Point section opens at
the bottom of the Static page.
Sensor Rotor Accumulator Pulse Count: The totalized count from the sensor rotor
accumulator.
Main Rotor Factor: Indicates the conversion factor (pulses/cf) for the main rotor.
Sensor Rotor Factor: Indicates the conversion factor (pulses/cf) for the sensor rotor.
A Bar Factor: Defined as the average relative adjustment (%) determined at factory
calibration.
Delta A High Alarm Limit: The high alarm limit at which the unit will log an alarm
when the live calculated A Bar Factor deviates from the factory calibration.
Delta A Low Alarm Limit: The low alarm limit at which the unit will log an alarm
when the live calculated A Bar Factor deviates from the factory calibration.
A Delta A High Warning Limit: The high warning limit at which the unit will log an
alarm when the live calculated A Bar Factor deviates from the factory calibration,
indicating that the meter is approaching failure.
A Delta A Low Warning Limit: The low warning limit at which the unit will log an
alarm when the live calculated A Bar Factor deviates from the factory calibration,
indicating that the meter is approaching failure.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 67


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Measurement Config Wizard

9. Enable any required flow factors and set the engineering units for the AGA 7 meter run. When
you have completed this page, click Next and continue to the next section.

K Factor block
The K-Factor curve is defined by an array of 10 structures. Entering the K-Factor
values and their corresponding frequency values enables the RTU to calculate a
frequency of an incoming pulse stream. The calculated frequency is then used to
determine which table entries it falls between. The RTU interpolates between the
two values to obtain a "flowing" K-Factor value. If the calculated frequency
exceeds the maximum frequency contained in the table, the RTU uses the K-Factor
of the previous table entry.
For off-site calculation, a flow time average value is entered into the history table
along with an actual volume so that proper correction of volumes can be performed
by the software.
If you are going to use the K-Factor table, enable the calculation (Variable Factor
Table Enable). Enter the K-Factor engineering units. In the remaining fields, enter
the K-Factor frequencies in Hz and their corresponding values.
Location Factor block
The Fpwl factor is used to correct for the effect of local gravity on the weights of a
deadweight calibrator. The Fpwl equation is shown below:

Thermo Fisher Scientific 68


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Measurement Config Wizard

Enable the Fpwl SP correction calculation, and enter the Fpwl gl and g0 values.
Well Stream block
A full well stream factor is provided for production applications that require
compensation for well stream conditions. If this calculation is enabled, the factor is
directly multiplied by the calculated gas volume.
Fwv Section
The water vapor factor (Fwv) is a direct multiplier into the flow equation that
compensates for any water vapor in the system. The number is a value close to
the one derived from the following equation:
Fwv = 1 - [((lb/MMcf) 21.0181)/1000000].
The Fwv for flowing gas that is considered fully saturated as currently implemented
in the standard Thermo Scientific flow computer software is shown below.

Enable the calculation (Calculation Enable).

Thermo Fisher Scientific 69


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Measurement Config Wizard

Select the water vapor factor method of calculation (Correction Mode). Options
are shown below.

 Manual: Enter the Fwv directly (usually approximately .98). If you


select this option, see Fwv.
 Partial Calculation: Enter the pounds of water per million cubic feet of
gas to enable the RTU to calculate Fwv. If you select this option, see
Water Content.

 Full Calculation: The software assumes full saturation and calculates


the pounds of water per million cubic feet of gas at the measured
temperature and pressure. It then takes that result and calculates the
Fwv factor. This option is not an AGA approved method and
should not be used for custody transfer installations.
Water Content: If you select Partial as the correction mode, enter the water
content of the gas (lb/MMcf) to enable the RTU to calculate Fwv.
Fwv: Enter the Fwv directly (usually approximately .98) here if you select Manual
as the correction mode.
Engineering Units block
Set the engineering units to be used for the calculations. Selections are listed below.
Pipe/Orifice: inches, ft, mm, cm, m.
Atmospheric Pressure: psi, bar, mbar, Pascal, kPa, mPa, kg/cm2, mmHg,
"H2O.
Static Pressure: psi, bar, mbar, Pascal, kPa, mPa, kg/cm2, mmHg, "H2O.
Temperature: °F, °C, °R, K.
Volume: Mcf, cf, MMcf, M3, E3M3.
Flow Rate: Mcf, cf, MMcf, M3, E3M3.
Energy: MMBtu, Btu, MBtu, MJ, GJ.
Energy Rate: MMBtu, MBtu, MJ, GJ.
Corrected Flow Rate: Macf, acf, am3, E3am3.

10. This screen allows you to connect the meter run to physical inputs. Select whether this
configuration is for an AGA 7 turbine run or AGA 7 auto-adjust. The screen will change
slightly if you select auto-adjust. Select whether the static pressure value will be provided by
a physical analog or smart transducer input. Select the input entry number. Repeat this for
temperature. For a turbine run, select the accumulator input entry to connect to the
accumulator pulse. For an auto-adjust run, select the accumulator input entries to connect
to the main pulse and sensor accumulators.
When you have completed this page, click Download & Next to continue with the configuration
process. If you click the Download & Exit button, the wizard will download the current run
configuration and close. You will return to the main AutoCONFIG window. When you click
either of these buttons, you will be notified by the software that the calculation will be
configured and running if you continue. Select Yes to continue.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 70


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Measurement Config Wizard

11. If you clicked the Download & Next button, one of two things will happen depending on where
you are in the configuration process.
If you have more meter runs to configure, the next screen will be the Static Data screen
for the next run.
If we are continuing with the example of two DP runs and one AGA 7 run, then this is the
final run. The software will display that configuration is complete. Click the Done button
at the bottom of the page. The wizard will close, and you will return to the main
AutoCONFIG window.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 71


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The I/O Config Wizard

The I/O Config Wizard

The I/O Config wizard is a tool that enables you to quickly link analog inputs to a differential pressure
(Table #38) or turbine (Table #39) meter run. You can access the wizard by selecting Tools > Simple
IO Connection. This method allows you to link analog or smart transducer inputs to multiple meter
runs.
If you only want to link inputs to one run only, a DP meter run for example, you can expand the 38-
Differential Pressure Flow heading, right click over an entry, and select IO Connection. This wizard
will prompt you to connect the inputs for that meter run only.
The process is explained in the following steps.
1. Go to Tools > Simple IO Connection.
2. At the warning prompt, select OK to start the wizard.
3. On the first screen, select the type and number of runs. Click the Next button.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 72


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The I/O Config Wizard

2. If you selected a differential pressure gas run, select the input type and point number for the
run's temperature, static pressure, and differential pressure. Click the Next button to continue.
Go to step 3 if you only selected a linear gas run or to step 4 if you only selected a linear
liquid run.

3. For a linear gas run, select whether it is a turbine run or auto-adjust run. The screens are
slightly different. For both, select the input type and point number for temperature and static
pressure. For turbine, select an accumulator input for the accumulator pulse. For auto-adjust,
select accumulator inputs for the main pulse and sensor accumulators. When ready, click the
Next button.
If you have already connected inputs to a meter run, they will be shown in the grid on the
right side of the configuration page. In this example, the analog inputs that were connected to
the differential pressure meter run in step 2 are shown. You can adjust the width of the
columns to show the full input and point number. If you need to make a change to the meter
run shown in the grid, double-click on it and see step 5.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 73


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The I/O Config Wizard

4. For a linear liquid run, select the input type and point number for temperature, static
pressure, and density. Select an accumulator inputs for the accumulator pulse counter and the
error accumulator pulse. When ready, click the Next button.

5. At the final screen verify the connections you made. If correct, click the Download button. If
you need to make changes, double-click on the meter run in the grid. An edit screen appears,
allowing you to change the connections to that meter run. When done, click the Update
button. Note that you can edit the meter run connections shown in the grid at any point in the
process by double-clicking it.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 74


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Calibration Wizard

The Calibration Wizard

The unit is capable of two- or three-point calibrations as well as a single point for re-zero. All
calibration changes are logged in the audit trail with the old and new values for each of the calibration
points. The unit also allows for the verification of analog inputs through an As Found / As Left
procedure as outlined in the API Ch 21.1. Separate audit codes are used for As Found versus As Left
audits.
The AutoCONFIG Calibration wizard provides the operational interface to perform calibration and
verification. Access the Calibration wizard from the Tools menu or via the Calibrate icon on the
toolbar. If you want to perform calibration only, you can go to the run page (e.g. DP Flow Calc#1) or
the input page (e.g. Analog Input #1) and click the Calibrate button.
Following detailed instructions on how to use the Calibration wizard for input verification/calibration
and calibration report generation.
1. Go to Tools and select Calibrate or click the Calibrate icon on the toolbar. The welcome
screen appears.

2. Select the run number of the inputs you want to calibrate. This will place the selected run into
a "frozen" state, holding differential pressure, static pressure, and temperature at their current
values while in Verify/Calibration mode. Click Next.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 75


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Calibration Wizard

3. Select the analog point to test/verify or calibrate. Click Next.

4. Select the function to be performed. Typically, the order is to verify As Found to determine if a
calibration is required for the selected input, calibrate the input if required, and verify As Left
to confirm the calibration results. This example assumes going through each stage. Click Next
to begin the verify As Found function.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 76


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Calibration Wizard

5. During the As Found test input stages, each value tested will be appended to the applicable
displayed list to provide a visual feedback of your selections. These are the values that will be
eventually passed to the calibration report when complete. Click Reset to discard all value
entries and start over. The "No (Point Type) Calibration Req. button allows for the case where
no As Left verification is required, and the As Found values will be copied to the As Left
column for later transfer to the calibration report.
An incorrect entry may be deleted from the list by right-clicking on the test value within the As
Found column and selecting Yes to the prompt. This allows you to correct any entries made in
error during the testing cycle.
After completing all necessary As Found test entries for the selected point, click Accept.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 77


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Calibration Wizard

6. The next screen shows that As Found data has been collected. If the As Found tests show that
calibration is required, select Calibrate Run Input for Selected Run and click Next.

7. Select the number of points required for calibration: 1-point for re-zero, 1-point to calibrate
low and high values, or 3-point to calibrate low, mid, and high values. Click Next.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 78


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Calibration Wizard

8. Enter the low, mid, or high values as applicable to the calibration selection you made in the
previous step. Upon completion, click Accept.

9. The next screen shows that As Found and calibration data has been collected. Select Verify
Inputs "As Left" for Selected Run and click Next.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 79


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Calibration Wizard

10. During the As Found test input stages, each value tested will be appended to the applicable
displayed list to provide a visual feedback of your selections. These are the values that will be
eventually passed to the calibration report when complete. Click Reset to discard all value
entries and start over. The "No (Point Type) Calibration Req. button allows for the case where
no As Left verification is required, and the As Found values will be copied to the As Left
column for later transfer to the calibration report.
An incorrect entry may be deleted from the list by right-clicking on the test value within the As
Found column and selecting Yes to the prompt. This allows you to correct any entries made in
error during the testing cycle.
After completing all necessary As Found test entries for the selected point, click Accept.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 80


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Calibration Wizard

11. After completing the As Found, Calibrate, and As Left functions for the selected point, click the
Download (Point Type) Entries button to send the verification and/or calibration data
computed to the RTU. This must be done prior to selecting another analog point. Once
done, the calibration process for the selected analog point is complete. If you click the Back
button, you will return to the point selection screen (step 3) at which you can select the next
point to verify/calibrate.

12. Once you have finished calibrating all the points, click the Exit button to "unfreeze" the run.
The wizard will prompt you to verify that you want to exit calibration/verification mode. Click
Yes.

13. The wizard will display another prompt, asking you to verify you want to generate a calibration
report. Select Yes to continue to the calibration report option. If you select No, all test data
will be lost.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 81


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Calibration Wizard

14. The calibration report feature allows for the capture of As Found and As Left test values to be
appended to a selectable report file. The calibration report is a Microsoft Excel® formatted
spreadsheet. Note that you must have Microsoft Excel installed on your PC to perform this
function. If you do not have Excel installed, a warning message will be displayed indicating
that Excel could not be loaded and the report cannot be generated.
After clicking Yes in the previous step, the following screen is displayed. Two calibration report
templates are supported: ThermoCalibrate-1.xls and ThermoCalibrate-2.xls. Select the one
you want to use. Samples of both templates are provided at the end of this procedure.

From this screen, you can perform the following actions:


Browse: Establish the path to a folder where previous calibration reports have been
stored for the applicable meter. The default setting is the CalibrationReportFiles folder
within the AutoCONFIG root folder (where the AutoConfig.exe program executes).
New: Create a new (empty) report from a template. After browsing to and selecting the
applicable template, you will be prompted to enter the report file name. The file created
will be named "NAME.DATE.xls" (xxxxxxmmddyy.xls, where xxxxxx is the name entered
and mmddyy is today's date). This selection is typically used to create a report for a
newly installed meter. This report will require the editing/input of all the unique meter
information that will be passed to subsequent reports for this meter.
Select: Click this button after selecting a file to generate a calibration report from. The
report will be generated based on a previously created report. The report file name will
be the same, except with today's date. All of the report contents (meter information) will
be copied to the report you are currently creating, except for the fields which will be
populated by the software (test device, AsFound, AsLeft, size, tube ID, date, and time).

Thermo Fisher Scientific 82


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Calibration Wizard

Copy: Click this button to create a report from a previous report but with the option to
rename the file. So instead of the report based on xxxx081209.xls becoming today's
report named xxxx081309.xls (as it would if you had selected the New button), this
report can be renamed to yyyy081309. This is beneficial when you want to generate a
new report file using meter information previously entered and make only minor
modifications to the fields.
Delete: Select the file you want to delete and click this button to delete it.
15. After selecting the desired calibration report file and click the Select button, the software will
prompt you to verify the meter data. If you select No, you will return to the Select Meter
Calibration Report screen. If you select Yes, the software will populate the selected report with
the test values acquired and pass the data to the Excel program. At this time, a backup text
file (.txt) will be created with the same file name and the .txt extension.

16. The generated calibration report will be displayed in Excel, along with the following advisory:

Clicking No will allow you to exit this save operation and move back to the Select Meter
Calibration Report screen to select another report to generate or exit completely. Clicking Yes
will save the calibration report file to the CalibrationReportFiles folder (by default), or you can
browse to another destination. Do not click Yes or No until you are ready to exit the
process.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 83


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Calibration Wizard

Sample Templates

Thermo Fisher Scientific 84


AutoCONFIG Wizards
The Calibration Wizard

Thermo Fisher Scientific 85


Chapter 3

Physical Data Points


The Physical Data Points heading in the navigation bar provides access to holding tables and physical
points that can be configured. Note that Table #18 is available only when using the AutoEXEC.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 86


Physical Data Points
Floating Point Value (Table #1)

Floating Point Value (Table #1)

You can use the entries in Table #1 to hold floating point data that will be used with other functions or
calculations. There are three screens associated with the table:

 General: Enter a description of the input, see the current value, enable alarms, etc.
 Value Limit: Set value limits and view limit data.
 Alarm Limit: Set alarm limits and view alarm limit data.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 87


Physical Data Points
Floating Point Value (Table #1)

General Configuration for Floating Point Value Table

Set the basic floating point data on this page.

Descriptor #1: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the point.
Descriptor #2: Enter a text string that identifies or names the point.
Engineering Unit: Enter the engineering unit used with the point.
Audit/Alarm Register Index: The Modbus register specified here will be the one logged to the
event log if an alarm is generated for this table. This enables the Host to associate the alarm with
something.
Alarm Hysteresis Value: Enter the value that an alarm must clear by to avoid the logging of
excessive alarms.
Current Status: The current status of the point. Possible displays include: Normal, I/O Failed,
Low Alarm, High Alarm, Low Low Alarm, High High Alarm, and Out of Range.
Current Value: The current value of the point.
Data Blocks: Select the event log (Table #193) in which audits or alarms for this table will be
entered. Then select whether audits or alarms (or both) should be logged.
Security Access: Select the access level a user must have to edit these parameters. For more on
access levels, refer to Password Table.
Alarms and Limits block: Select which alarms/limits should be enabled for this point.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 88


Physical Data Points
Floating Point Value (Table #1)

Value Limits for Floating Point Value Table

This page allows you to set value limits and view value limit data.

Low Limit: Enter the low value limit for the point.
Low Limit Extreme Value: The lowest value obtained since the last cold start.
Low Limit Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last reached the low value
limit.
Low Limit Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last exceeded the low value
limit.
High Limit: Enter the high value limit for the point.
High Limit Extreme Value: The highest value obtained since the last cold start.
High Limit Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last reached the high value
limit.
High Limit Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last fell below the high
value limit.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 89


Physical Data Points
Floating Point Value (Table #1)

Alarms Limit for Floating Point Value Table

This page primarily displays alarm data.

Low Limit: Enter the value in engineering units at which an alarm is logged if the input value falls
below this level.
Low Extreme Value: The lowest value during the last low alarm.
Low Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a low alarm condition.
Low Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a low alarm
condition.
Low Low Limit: Enter the value in engineering units for the low low alarm. This value should be
lower than the low limit value.
Low Low Extreme Value: The lowest value during the last low low alarm.
Low Low Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a low low alarm
condition.
Low Low Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a low low
alarm condition.
High Limit: Enter the value in engineering units at which an alarm is logged if the input value
exceeds this level.
High Extreme Value: The highest value during the last high alarm.
High Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a high alarm
condition.
High Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a high alarm
condition.
High High Limit: Enter the value in engineering units for the high high alarm. This value should
be higher than the high limit value.
High High Extreme Value: The highest limit during the last high high alarm.
High High Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a high high
alarm condition.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 90


Physical Data Points
Floating Point Value (Table #1)

High High Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a high
high alarm condition.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 91


Physical Data Points
Discrete Value (Table #2)

Discrete Value (Table #2)

Use Table #2 as a generic discrete value holding table for floating point data.

Descriptor #1: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the point.
Descriptor #2: Enter a text string that identifies or names the point.
On Descriptor: Enter a description that will indicate the ON condition.
Off Descriptor: Enter a description that will indicate the OFF condition.
Audit/Alarm Register Index: The Modbus register specified here will be the one logged to the
event log if an alarm is generated for this table. This enables the Host to associate the alarm with
something.
Alarm Condition State: The current alarm condition state.
Alarms Detection: Enable/disable alarm detection.
Current Status: The current status of the point. Possible displays include: Normal, I/O Failed,
and Alarm Status.
Current Value: The current value of the point.
Last On Date/Time: The date and time of the last ON condition.
Last Off Date/Time: The date and time of the last OFF condition.
Data Blocks: Select the event log (Table #193) in which audits or alarms for this table will be
entered. Then select whether audits or alarms (or both) should be logged.
Security Access: Select the access level a user must have to edit these parameters. For more on
access levels, refer to Password Table.
Alarms and Limits block: Select which alarms/limits should be enabled for this point.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 92


Physical Data Points
Byte Value (Table #3)

Byte Value (Table #3)

Use Table #3 as a generic byte value holding table for floating point data.

Descriptor #1: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the point.
Descriptor #2: Enter a text string that identifies or names the point.
Value Text Offset: This field provides a way to assign a different text string based upon the
current value of the field. If the value text offset is 0, the value will be displayed numerically.
When the value text offset is non-zero, it points to a series of text table entries (Table #15) that
should be used depending upon the current value. For example:

If the value offset is 10:


 Text table entry #10 = "First Text Entry". Used if current value = 0.
 Text table entry #11 = "Second Text Entry". Used if current value = 1.
 Text table entry #12 = "Third Text Entry". Used if current value = 2.
 Text table entry #13 = "Fourth Text Entry". Used if current value = 3.
 Text table entry #14 = "Fifth Text Entry". Used if current value = 4.

Audit/Alarm Register Index: The Modbus register specified here will be the one logged to the
Event log if an alarm is generated for this table. This enables the Host to associate the alarm with
something.
Limits Min/Max Value: Enabling this function will limit the point to the minimum and maximum
values specified.
Current Status: The current status of the point. Possible displays include: Normal, I/O Failed,
and Out of Range (warning).
Current Value: The current value of the point.
Minimum/Maximum Values: Enter the minimum and maximum values for the point.
Data Blocks: Select the event log (Table #193) in which audits or alarms for this table will be
entered. Then select whether audits or alarms (or both) should be logged.

Security Access: Select the access level a user must have to edit these parameters. For more on
access levels, refer to Password Table.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 93


Physical Data Points
16-Bit Word Value (Table #4)

16-Bit Word Value (Table #4)

Use Table #4 as a generic word value holding table for floating point data.

Descriptor #1: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the point.
Descriptor #2: Enter a text string that identifies or names the point.
Audit/Alarm Register Index: The Modbus register specified here will be the one logged to the
Event log if an alarm is generated for this table. This enables the Host to associate the alarm with
something.
Current Status: The current status of the point. The possible displays are Normal and I/O Failed.
Current Value: The current value of the point.
Data Blocks: Select the event log (Table #193) in which audits or alarms for this table will be
entered. Then select whether audits or alarms (or both) should be logged.
Security Access: Select the access level a user must have to edit these parameters. For more on
access levels, refer to Password Table.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 94


Physical Data Points
Text (Table #15)

Text (Table #15)

Each entry in the text table can contain a 16-character ASCII string (null terminated). Click on the row
to change the entry.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 95


Physical Data Points
Physical Analog Input (#16)

Physical Analog Input (#16)

The AutoEXEC analog input board has 16 single-ended analog input channels. Each accepts a 0–5 Vdc
input signal, and a 4–20 mA current input can be converted to voltage input using an external 250-
ohm resistor. The Table #16 entries map directly to the analog input board. For example, the first
input on the first analog input board is associated with the first entry in Table #16; the second analog
input on the first analog input board is associated with the second entry in Table #16, etc.

The AutoPILOT PRO main board provides three analog inputs for single low-power transducers (0–5
Vdc maximum range). Other transducers with voltage output ranges such as 0.8–3.2 V or 1–5 V units
may be used with software scaling provided the 0–5 V limits are not exceeded. These analog inputs
can be used with specified analog transmitters for differential pressure, static pressure, and
temperature. For more details on the physical inputs, refer to the AutoPILOT PRO hardware manual
(1-0500-005).

There are seven pages in the software associated with each analog input entry.

 General: Enter a description of the input, see the current value, enable alarms, etc.
 Value Limit: Set value limits and view limit data.
 Alarm Limit: Set alarm limits and view alarm limit data.
 Miscellaneous: Enter transducer upper and lower ranges, set the input to normal or manual
mode, enable high/low fault monitoring, etc.
 Calibration: View calibration data from the current and previous calibrations.
 As Found/As Left: View verification data from the last seven As Found / As Left procedures.
 Raw Value Limit: Set raw value limits and view raw value data.

Once you have the required Table #16 entries set up, you can copy the entries to other tables.
If you connected the input to a meter run, you can now calibrate it. Click the Calibrate button at the
top of any of the analog input pages to start the Calibration wizard.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 96


Physical Data Points
Physical Analog Input (#16)

General Configuration of Physical Analog Input Table

Descriptor #1: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the point.
Descriptor #2: Enter a text string that identifies or names the point.
Engineering Unit: Enter the engineering unit used with the input signal.
Audit/Alarm Register Index: The Modbus register specified here will be the one logged to the
Event log if an alarm is generated for this table. This enables the Host to associate the alarm with
something.
Alarm Hysteresis Value: Enter the value that an alarm must clear by to avoid the logging of
excessive alarms.
Current Status: The current status of the point. Possible displays include: Manual Override, In
Calibration, I/O Failed, Low Alarm, High Alarm, Low Low Alarm, High High Alarm, Default Value in
Use, and Out of Range.
Current Value: The current value of the point.
Data Blocks: Select the event log (Table #193) in which audits or alarms for this table will be
entered. Then select whether audits or alarms (or both) should be logged.
Security Access: Select the access level a user must have to edit these parameters. For more on
access levels, refer to Password Table.
Alarms/Limits block: Select which alarms/limits should be enabled for this point.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 97


Physical Data Points
Physical Analog Input (#16)

Value Limits for Physical Analog Input

This page allows you to set value limits and view value limit data.

Low Limit: Enter the low value limit for the point.
Low Limit Extreme Value: The lowest value obtained since the last cold start.
Low Limit Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last reached the low value
limit.
Low Limit Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last exceeded the low value
limit.
High Limit: Enter the high value limit for the point.
High Limit Extreme Value: The highest value obtained since the last cold start.
High Limit Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last reached the high value
limit.
High Limit Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last fell below the high
value limit.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 98


Physical Data Points
Physical Analog Input (#16)

Alarm Limits for Physical Analog Input

This page primarily displays alarm data for the input point.

Low Limit: Enter the value in engineering units at which an alarm is logged if the input value falls
below this level.
Low Extreme Value: The lowest value during the last low alarm.
Low Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a low alarm condition.
Low Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a low alarm
condition.
Low Low Limit: Enter the value in engineering units for the low low alarm. This value should be
lower than the low limit value.
Low Low Extreme Value: The lowest value during the last low low alarm.
Low Low Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a low low alarm
condition.
Low Low Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a low low
alarm condition.
High Limit: Enter the value in engineering units at which an alarm is logged if the input value
exceeds this level.
High Extreme Value: The highest value during the last high alarm.
High Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a high alarm
condition.
High Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a high alarm
condition.
High High Limit: Enter the value in engineering units for the high high alarm. This value should
be higher than the high limit value.
High High Extreme Value: The highest limit during the last high high alarm.
High High Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a high high
alarm condition.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 99


Physical Data Points
Physical Analog Input (#16)

High High Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a high
high alarm condition.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 100


Physical Data Points
Physical Analog Input (#16)

Miscellaneous Data for Physical Analog Input

Live Value: The value of the input signal after being converted to engineering units.
Raw Value: The value directly from the input signal (in volts).
Transducer Upper/Lower Ranges: Enter the upper and lower ranges of the transducer.
In Manual/Manual Value: If you manually override the point by selecting Manual Mode, enter
the value in the Manual Value field.
High/Low Fail Monitoring: If you enable high/low fail monitoring, select what the software
should do in the event of a failure. If you set the software to use the default value, enter that
value in the Default Value field.
I/O Board Address: The board address detected by the software during the I/O scan.
I/O Board Point #: The board point number detected by the software during I/O scan.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 101


Physical Data Points
Physical Analog Input (#16)

Calibration Data for Physical Analog Input

This page displays calibration data for the analog input.

In Calibration: The status of the point (in calibration or normal).


Calibration Point #1 EU/Raw Zero Values: The converted and raw zero values from the
calibration.
Calibration Point #2 EU/Raw Mid Values: The converted and raw mid-range values from the
calibration.
Calibration Point #3 EU/Raw Span Values: The converted and raw span values from the
calibration.
Calibration Index Counter: This value will increment when a calibration operation has occurred.
Previous Calibration Point #1 EU/Raw Zero Values: The converted and raw zero values from
the previous calibration.
Previous Calibration Point #2 EU/Raw Mid Values: The converted and raw mid-range values
from the previous calibration.
Previous Calibration Point #3 EU/Raw Span Values: The converted and raw span values
from the previous calibration.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 102


Physical Data Points
Physical Analog Input (#16)

As Found / As Left Data for Physical Analog Input

This page displays verification data from the As Found / As Left procedure.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 103


Physical Data Points
Physical Analog Input (#16)

Raw Value Limits for Physical Analog Input

In the Failed Low/Failed High Raw Limit fields, enter voltages that indicate input failure. If the raw
input voltage exceeds or falls below these values, alarms will be set (if enabled). The remaining fields
display failure data.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 104


Physical Data Points
Physical Smart Xducer (Table#17)

Physical Smart Xducer (Table#17)

Using a Smart Transducer with AutoEXEC

The AutoEXEC is capable of communicating with the Thermo Scientific AutoMITTER/AutoMITTER PRO
and other smart transducers that use Modbus protocol. Each of the following steps must be completed
for the AutoEXEC to receive data from an AutoMITTER/AutoMITTER PRO.

1. Mount the AutoMITTER Safety Interface board (SIB) enclosure. Make the following connections:

a. Between AutoEXEC communication expansion board and the AutoMITTER/AutoMITTER PRO


(or other smart transducer).

b. Between AutoEXEC and AutoMITTER/AutoMITTER PRO. You can find these instructions in
the AutoEXEC user guide (P/N 1-0443-048). For CSA systems, reference Appendix C. For ATEX
systems, reference Appendix D. In addition, reference the AutoMITTER PRO user guide (P/N 1-
0497-033). (You can download these guides from the help system).

2. Go to Communications > 96-Communication Ports and set up a port to reference a Modbus


Master communications block.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 105


Physical Data Points
Physical Smart Xducer (Table#17)

3. Go to Communications > 98-Modbus Master. Configure communications, being sure to enable


AutoMITTER Mode. Copy the Table #17 entries into the Point Name column of the registers. Note
that the Table #17 entries map directly to the transducer inputs (DP, SP, temperature). For
example, entries 1 through 3 in Table #17 correspond to the DP, SP, and temperature received
from the first AutoMITTER/AutoMITTER PRO in the chain. Entries 4 through 6 correspond to the
DP, SP, and temperature received from the second AutoMITTER/AutoMITTER PRO in the chain.

4. Go to Physical Data Points > Physical Smart Xducer to access the seven pages associated with
the smart transducer input.

 General: Enter a description of the input, see the current value, enable alarms, etc.

 Value Limit: Set value limits and view limit data.

 Alarm Limit: Set alarm limits and view alarm limit data.

 Miscellaneous: Enter transducer upper and lower ranges, set the input to normal or
manual mode, enable high/low fault monitoring, etc.

 Calibration: View calibration data from the current and previous calibrations.

 As Found/As Left: View verification data from the last seven As Found / As Left
procedures.

 Raw Value Limit: Set raw value limits and view raw value data.

Once you have the required Table #17 entries set up, you can copy the entries to other tables.
If you connected the input to a meter run, you can now calibrate it. Click the Calibrate button at the
top of any of the analog input pages to start the Calibration wizard.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 106


Physical Data Points
Physical Smart Xducer (Table#17)

Using a Smart Transducer with AutoPILOT PRO

The AutoPILOT PRO is capable of communicating with a Thermo Scientific AutoMITTER PRO via the
AutoMITTER Safety Interface board (SIB). The SIB supports up to four AutoMITTER PRO units. Each of
the following steps must be completed for the AutoPILOT PRO to receive data from an AutoMITTER
PRO.

1. Install the SIB into the AutoPILOT PRO and make the appropriate connections. You can find these
instructions in Chapter 6 the AutoPILOT PRO user manual (P/N 1-0500-005). Be sure to reference
the CSA or ATEX section as appropriate for your system.

2. Go to Communications > 96-Communication Ports and set up a port to reference a Modbus


Master communications block.

3. Go to Communications > 98-Modbus Master. Configure communications. If using an


AutoMITTER PRO, enable AutoMITTER Mode. The AutoPILOT PRO will automatically search for the
AutoMITTER PRO on the dedicated AutoMITTER port and map the transducer points into Table
#17. If you are using another smart transducer such as a Rosemount 3095 through an expansion
port, you will need to manually copy the Table #17 entries into the Point Name column of the
registers. Note that the Table #17 entries map directly to the transducer inputs (DP, SP,
temperature). For example, entries 1 through 3 in Table #17 correspond to the DP, SP, and
temperature received from the first AutoMITTER PRO in the chain. Entries 4 through 6 correspond
to the DP, SP, and temperature received from the second AutoMITTER PRO in the chain.

4. Go to Physical Data Points > Physical Smart Xducer to access the seven pages associated with
the smart transducer input.

 General: Enter a description of the input, see the current value, enable alarms, etc.

 Value Limit: Set value limits and view limit data.

 Alarm Limit: Set alarm limits and view alarm limit data.

 Miscellaneous: Enter transducer upper and lower ranges, set the input to normal or
manual mode, enable high/low fault monitoring, etc.

 Calibration: View calibration data from the current and previous calibrations.

 As Found/As Left: View verification data from the last seven As Found / As Left
procedures.

 Raw Value Limit: Set raw value limits and view raw value data.

Once you have the required Table #17 entries set up, you can copy the entries to other tables.
If you connected the input to a meter run, you can now calibrate it. Click the Calibrate button at the
top of any of the analog input pages to start the Calibration wizard.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 107


Physical Data Points
Physical Smart Xducer (Table#17)

General Configuration for Physical Smart Transducer Input Table

Descriptor #1: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the point.
Descriptor #2: Enter a text string that identifies or names the point.
Engineering Unit: Enter the engineering unit used with the input signal.
Audit/Alarm Register Index: The Modbus register specified here will be the one logged to the
Event log if an alarm is generated for this table. This enables the Host to associate the alarm with
something.
Alarm Hysteresis Value: Enter the value that an alarm must clear by to avoid the logging of
excessive alarms.
Current Status: The current status of the point. Possible displays include: Manual Override, In
Calibration, I/O Failed, Low Alarm, High Alarm, Low Low Alarm, High High Alarm, Default Value in
Use, and Out of Range.
Current Value: The current value of the point.
Data Blocks: Select the event log (Table #193) in which audits or alarms for this table will be
entered. Then select whether audits or alarms (or both) should be logged.
Security Access: Select the access level a user must have to edit these parameters. For more on
access levels, refer to Password Table.
Alarms/Limits block: Select which alarms/limits should be enabled for this point.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 108


Physical Data Points
Physical Smart Xducer (Table#17)

Value Limits for Physical Smart Transducer Input

This page allows you to set value limits and view value limit data.

Low Limit: Enter the low value limit for the point.
Low Limit Extreme Value: The lowest value obtained since the last cold start.
Low Limit Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last reached the low value
limit.
Low Limit Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last exceeded the low value
limit.
High Limit: Enter the high value limit for the point.
High Limit Extreme Value: The highest value obtained since the last cold start.
High Limit Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last reached the high value
limit.
High Limit Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last fell below the high
value limit.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 109


Physical Data Points
Physical Smart Xducer (Table#17)

Alarm Limits for Physical Smart Transducer Input

This page primarily displays alarm data for the input point.

Low Limit: Enter the value in engineering units at which an alarm is logged if the input value falls
below this level.
Low Extreme Value: The lowest value during the last low alarm.
Low Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a low alarm condition.
Low Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a low alarm
condition.
Low Low Limit: Enter the value in engineering units for the low low alarm. This value should be
lower than the low limit value.
Low Low Extreme Value: The lowest value during the last low low alarm.
Low Low Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a low low alarm
condition.
Low Low Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a low low
alarm condition.
High Limit: Enter the value in engineering units at which an alarm is logged if the input value
exceeds this level.
High Extreme Value: The highest value during the last high alarm.
High Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a high alarm
condition.
High Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a high alarm
condition.
High High Limit: Enter the value in engineering units for the high high alarm. This value should
be higher than the high limit value.
High High Extreme Value: The highest limit during the last high high alarm.
High High Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a high high
alarm condition.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 110


Physical Data Points
Physical Smart Xducer (Table#17)

High High Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a high
high alarm condition.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 111


Physical Data Points
Physical Smart Xducer (Table#17)

Miscellaneous Data for Physical Smart Transducer Input

Live Value: The value of the input signal after being converted to engineering units.
Raw Value: The value directly from the input signal (in volts).
Transducer Upper/Lower Ranges: Enter the upper and lower ranges of the transducer.
In Manual/Manual Value: If you manually override the point by selecting Manual Mode, enter
the value in the Manual Value field.
High/Low Fail Monitoring: If you enable high/low fail monitoring, select what the software
should do in the event of a failure. If you set the software to use the default value, enter that
value in the Default Value field.
I/O Board Address: The board address detected by the software during the I/O scan.
I/O Board Point #: The board point number detected by the software during I/O scan.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 112


Physical Data Points
Physical Smart Xducer (Table#17)

Calibration Data for Physical Smart Transducer Input

This page displays calibration data for the input.

In Calibration: The status of the point (in calibration or normal).


Calibration Point #1 EU/Raw Zero Values: The converted and raw zero values from the
calibration.
Calibration Point #2 EU/Raw Mid Values: The converted and raw mid-range values from the
calibration.
Calibration Point #3 EU/Raw Span Values: The converted and raw span values from the
calibration.
Calibration Index Counter: This value will increment when a calibration operation has occurred.
Previous Calibration Point #1 EU/Raw Zero Values: The converted and raw zero values from
the previous calibration.
Previous Calibration Point #2 EU/Raw Mid Values: The converted and raw mid-range values
from the previous calibration.
Previous Calibration Point #3 EU/Raw Span Values: The converted and raw span values
from the previous calibration.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 113


Physical Data Points
Physical Smart Xducer (Table#17)

As Found / As Left Data for Physical Smart Transducer Input

This page displays verification data from the As Found / As Left procedure.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 114


Physical Data Points
Physical Smart Xducer (Table#17)

Raw Value Limits for Physical Smart Transducer Input

In the Failed Low/Failed High Raw Limit fields, enter voltages that indicate input failure. If the raw
input voltage exceeds or falls below these values, alarms will be set (if enabled). The remaining fields
display failure data.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 115


Physical Data Points
Physical Honeywell DE Input (Table #18)

Physical Honeywell DE Input (Table #18)

*AutoEXEC only
Each DE communication board supports eight Honeywell transducers using DE protocol. After installing
the board, use AutoCONFIG to perform an I/O scan (Miscellaneous > System Control > I/O Rescan >
Restart). AutoCONFIG will detect the new board.
The Table #18 entries map directly to the DE comm board. For example, the first input on the first DE
comm board is associated with the first entry in Table #18; the second input on the first DE comm
board is associated with the second entry in Table #18, etc.

There are seven pages in the software associated with each Table #18 entry.

 General: Enter a description of the input, see the current value, enable alarms, etc.

 Value Limit: Set value limits and view limit data.

 Alarm Limit: Set alarm limits and view alarm limit data.

 Miscellaneous: Enter transducer upper and lower ranges, set the input to normal or manual
mode, enable high/low fault monitoring, etc.

 Calibration: View calibration data from the current and previous calibrations.

 As Found/As Left: View verification data from the last seven As Found / As Left procedures.

 Raw Value Limit: Set raw value limits and view raw value data.

Once you have the required Table #18 entries set up, you can copy the entries to other tables.
If you connected the input to a meter run, you can now calibrate it. Click the Calibrate button at the
top of any of the Honeywell DE input pages to start the Calibration wizard.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 116


Physical Data Points
Physical Honeywell DE Input (Table #18)

General Configuration for Physical Honeywell DE Input Table

Descriptor #1: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the point.
Descriptor #2: Enter a text string that identifies or names the point.
Engineering Unit: Enter the engineering unit used with the input signal.
Audit/Alarm Register Index: The Modbus register specified here will be the one logged to the
Event log if an alarm is generated for this table. This enables the Host to associate the alarm with
something.
Alarm Hysteresis Value: Enter the value that an alarm must clear by to avoid the logging of
excessive alarms.
Current Status: The current status of the point. Possible displays include: Manual Override, In
Calibration, I/O Failed, Low Alarm, High Alarm, Low Low Alarm, High High Alarm, Default Value in
Use, and Out of Range.
Current Value: The current value of the point.
Data Blocks: Select the event log (Table #193) in which audits or alarms for this table will be
entered. Then select whether audits or alarms (or both) should be logged.
Security Access: Select the access level a user must have to edit these parameters. For more on
access levels, refer to Password Table.
Alarms/Limits block: Select which alarms/limits should be enabled for this point.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 117


Physical Data Points
Physical Honeywell DE Input (Table #18)

Value Limits for Physical Honeywell DE Input

This page allows you to set value limits and view value limit data.

Low Limit: Enter the low value limit for the point.
Low Limit Extreme Value: The lowest value obtained since the last cold start.
Low Limit Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last reached the low value
limit.
Low Limit Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last exceeded the low value
limit.
High Limit: Enter the high value limit for the point.
High Limit Extreme Value: The highest value obtained since the last cold start.
High Limit Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last reached the high value
limit.
High Limit Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last fell below the high
value limit.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 118


Physical Data Points
Physical Honeywell DE Input (Table #18)

Alarm Limits for Physical Honeywell DE Input

This page primarily displays alarm data for the input point.

Low Limit: Enter the value in engineering units at which an alarm is logged if the input value falls
below this level.
Low Extreme Value: The lowest value during the last low alarm.
Low Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a low alarm condition.
Low Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a low alarm
condition.
Low Low Limit: Enter the value in engineering units for the low low alarm. This value should be
lower than the low limit value.
Low Low Extreme Value: The lowest value during the last low low alarm.
Low Low Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a low low alarm
condition.
Low Low Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a low low
alarm condition.
High Limit: Enter the value in engineering units at which an alarm is logged if the input value
exceeds this level.
High Extreme Value: The highest value during the last high alarm.
High Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a high alarm
condition.
High Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a high alarm
condition.
High High Limit: Enter the value in engineering units for the high high alarm. This value should
be higher than the high limit value.
High High Extreme Value: The highest limit during the last high high alarm.
High High Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a high high
alarm condition.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 119


Physical Data Points
Physical Honeywell DE Input (Table #18)

High High Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a high
high alarm condition.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 120


Physical Data Points
Physical Honeywell DE Input (Table #18)

Miscellaneous Data for Physical Honeywell DE Input

Live Value: The value of the input signal after being converted to engineering units.
Raw Value: The value directly from the input signal (in volts).
Transducer Upper/Lower Ranges: Enter the upper and lower ranges of the transducer.
In Manual/Manual Value: If you manually override the point by selecting Manual Mode, enter
the value in the Manual Value field.
High/Low Fail Monitoring: If you enable high/low fail monitoring, select what the software
should do in the event of a failure. If you set the software to use the default value, enter that
value in the Default Value field.
I/O Board Address: The board address detected by the software during the I/O scan.
I/O Board Point #: The board point number detected by the software during I/O scan.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 121


Physical Data Points
Physical Honeywell DE Input (Table #18)

Calibration Data for Physical Honeywell DE Input

This page displays calibration data for the input.


In Calibration: The status of the point (in calibration or normal).
Calibration Point #1 EU/Raw Zero Values: The converted and raw zero values from the
calibration.
Calibration Point #2 EU/Raw Mid Values: The converted and raw mid-range values from the
calibration.
Calibration Point #3 EU/Raw Span Values: The converted and raw span values from the
calibration.
Calibration Index Counter: This value will increment when a calibration operation has occurred.
Previous Calibration Point #1 EU/Raw Zero Values: The converted and raw zero values from
the previous calibration.
Previous Calibration Point #2 EU/Raw Mid Values: The converted and raw mid-range values
from the previous calibration.
Previous Calibration Point #3 EU/Raw Span Values: The converted and raw span values
from the previous calibration.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 122


Physical Data Points
Physical Honeywell DE Input (Table #18)

As Found / As Left Data for Physical Honeywell DE Input

This page displays verification data from the As Found / As Left procedure.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 123


Physical Data Points
Physical Honeywell DE Input (Table #18)

Raw Value Limits for Physical Honeywell DE Input

In the Failed Low/Failed High Raw Limit fields, enter voltages that indicate input failure. If the raw
input voltage exceeds or falls below these values, alarms will be set (if enabled). The remaining fields
display failure data.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 124


Physical Data Points
Discrete Input Configuration (Table #19)

Discrete Input Configuration (Table #19)

The AutoEXEC digital input board has 16 digital input points. Each accepts an input in the form of a
dry contact closure, and 12 Vdc wetting voltage is provided onboard. Inputs can range from 0–5 to 0–
12 V.

The AutoPILOT PRO main board provides two local discrete inputs at TB6 for customer input devices
that are DC-resistive by nature (reed relays, uncommitted transistor outputs, etc.).

Use Table #19 to configure a discrete input.

Descriptor #1: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the point.
Descriptor #2: Enter a text string that identifies or names the point.
On Descriptor: Enter a description that will indicate the ON condition.
Off Descriptor: Enter a description that will indicate the OFF condition.
Audit/Alarm Register Index: The Modbus register specified here will be the one logged to the
Event log if an alarm is generated for this table. This enables the Host to associate the alarm with
something.
Alarm Detection: Enable/disable alarm detection.
I/O Board Address: The board address detected by the software during the I/O scan.
I/O Board Point #: The board point number detected by the software during I/O scan.
Current Status: The current status of the point. Possible displays include: Manual Override, I/O
Failed, and alarm status.
Current Value: The current value of the point.
Last On Date/Time: The date and time of the last ON condition.
Last Off Date/Time: The date and time of the last OFF condition.
Live Value: The current value being read from the actual discrete input.
Invert Input: This field allows you to cause the software to flip the state of the actual input
before storing it in the database.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 125


Physical Data Points
Discrete Input Configuration (Table #19)

In Manual/Manual Value: If you manually override the point by selecting Manual Mode, enter
the value in the Manual Value field.
Data Blocks: Select the event log (Table #193) in which audits or alarms for this table will be
entered. Then select whether audits or alarms (or both) should be logged.

Security Access: Select the access level a user must have to edit these parameters. For more on
access levels, refer to Password Table.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 126


Physical Data Points
Accumulator Configuration (Table #20)

Accumulator Configuration (Table #20)

The AutoEXEC pulse input board provides termination of four pulse (accumulator) field input signals,
and the liquid flow board provides termination for six field input signals, allowing for accumulator,
density, and proving functions. Both boards may receive the following pulse input signals: turbine
meters, positive-displacement transmitters, slot sensors, and contact closures.
The AutoPILOT PRO main board can accept two pulse inputs from customer input devices (reed
switches, slot sensors, magnetic pickup, uncommitted transistor outputs, etc.).
Use Table #20 to configure a pulse input.

Descriptor #1: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the point.
Descriptor #2: Enter a text string that identifies or names the point.
Engineering Unit: Enter the engineering unit used with the input signal.
Audit/Alarm Register Index: The Modbus register specified here will be the one logged to the
Event log if an alarm is generated for this table. This enables the Host to associate the alarm with
something.
Current Status: The current status of the point. Possible displays include: Normal, Manual
Override, and I/O Failed.
Current Value: The current value of the point.
Current Frequency: The frequency being used (may be from a live input or a manually entered
value).
Live Frequency: The calculated frequency from the physical input device.
In Manual/Manual Value: If you manually override the point by selecting Manual Mode, enter
the value in the Manual Value field.
I/O Board Address: The board address detected by the software during the I/O scan.
I/O Board Point #: The board point number detected by the software during I/O scan.
Data Blocks: Select the event log (Table #193) in which audits or alarms for this table will be
entered. Then select whether audits or alarms (or both) should be logged.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 127


Physical Data Points
Accumulator Configuration (Table #20)

Security Access: Select the access level a user must have to edit these parameters. For more on
access levels, refer to Password Table.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 128


Physical Data Points
Physical Analog Output (Table #21)

Physical Analog Output (Table #21)

Each analog output from the AutoEXEC represents 0–100% of a representative output. The value of
the analog output signal may be set manually, by local entry or download from the master computer,
or automatically by the output of the 3 Mode Controller.

The 2-D/A MEB for the AutoPILOT PRO provides two 4–20 mA output currents under software control.
The 2-D/A MEB may also be assembled with the D/A power board mounted at J5 to provide a 24 V
maximum output (used to drive total loop resistance from 250 to 750 ohms).

There are four tabs associated with the physical analog output:

 General: Enter a description of the output, see the current value, enable alarms, etc.

 Value Limit: Set value limits and view limit data.

 Alarm Limit: Set alarm limits and view alarm limit data.

 Miscellaneous: Enter transducer upper and lower ranges, set the input to normal or manual
mode, enable high/low fault monitoring, etc.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 129


Physical Data Points
Physical Analog Output (Table #21)

General Configuration for Physical Analog Output Table

Descriptor #1: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the point.
Descriptor #2: Enter a text string that identifies or names the point.
Engineering Unit: Enter the engineering unit used with the input signal.
Audit/Alarm Register Index: The Modbus register specified here will be the one logged to the
Event log if an alarm is generated for this table. This enables the Host to associate the alarm with
something.
Alarm Hysteresis Value: Enter the value that an alarm must clear by to avoid the logging of
excessive alarms.
Current Status: The current status of the point. Possible displays include: Manual Override, In
Calibration, I/O Failed, Low Alarm, High Alarm, Low Low Alarm, High High Alarm, Default Value in
Use, and Out of Range.
Current Value: The current value of the point.
Data Blocks: Select the event log (Table #193) in which audits or alarms for this table will be
entered. Then select whether audits or alarms (or both) should be logged.
Security Access: Select the access level a user must have to edit these parameters. For more on
access levels, refer to Password Table.
Alarms/Limits block: Select which alarms/limits should be enabled for this point.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 130


Physical Data Points
Physical Analog Output (Table #21)

Value Limits for Physical Analog Output

This page allows you to set value limits and view value limit data.

Low Limit: Enter the low value limit for the point.
Low Limit Extreme Value: The lowest value obtained since the last cold start.
Low Limit Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last reached the low value
limit.
Low Limit Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last exceeded the low value
limit.
High Limit: Enter the high value limit for the point.
High Limit Extreme Value: The highest value obtained since the last cold start.
High Limit Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last reached the high value
limit.
High Limit Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last fell below the high
value limit.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 131


Physical Data Points
Physical Analog Output (Table #21)

Alarm Limits for Physical Analog Output

This page primarily displays alarm data for the output point.

Low Limit: Enter the value in engineering units at which an alarm is logged if the input value falls
below this level.
Low Extreme Value: The lowest value during the last low alarm.
Low Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a low alarm condition.
Low Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a low alarm
condition.
Low Low Limit: Enter the value in engineering units for the low low alarm. This value should be
lower than the low limit value.
Low Low Extreme Value: The lowest value during the last low low alarm.
Low Low Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a low low alarm
condition.
Low Low Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a low low
alarm condition.
High Limit: Enter the value in engineering units at which an alarm is logged if the input value
exceeds this level.
High Extreme Value: The highest value during the last high alarm.
High Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a high alarm
condition.
High Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a high alarm
condition.
High High Limit: Enter the value in engineering units for the high high alarm. This value should
be higher than the high limit value.
High High Extreme Value: The highest limit during the last high high alarm.
High High Last into Date/Time: The date and time that the point last went into a high high
alarm condition.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 132


Physical Data Points
Physical Analog Output (Table #21)

High High Last Out of Date/Time: The date and time that the point last came out of a high
high alarm condition.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 133


Physical Data Points
Physical Analog Output (Table #21)

Miscellaneous Data for Physical Analog Output

In Manual/Manual Value: If you manually override the point by selecting Manual Mode in the
In Manual field, enter the value in the Manual Value field.
EU Calibration @ 1 Volt/4 mA: Enter the value in engineering units (psi, degrees, etc.) that
represents a 1-volt (or 4 mA) output.
EU Calibration @ 5 Volt/20 mA: Enter the value in engineering units (psi, degrees, etc.) that
represents a 5-volt (or 20 mA) output.
I/O Board Address: The board address detected by the software during the I/O scan.
I/O Board Point #: The board point number detected by the software during I/O scan.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 134


Physical Data Points
Discrete Output Configuration (Table #22)

Discrete Output Configuration (Table #22)

The AutoEXEC discrete output board provides 16 relay outputs that are sealed and magnetically
latching. Relay control can be either latched or momentary.

For the AutoPILOT PRO, two local discrete outputs are provided on the main board at TB5 to drive
customer low-power output devices that are DC-resistive by nature (relays, solenoids, etc.). The
discrete outputs also provide a +12 V power source at TB5 pins 1 and 3 (VDO) to drive the customer's
device. Each channel can provide 150 mA maximum.

Use Table #22 to configure a discrete output.

Descriptor #1: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the point.
Descriptor #2: Enter a text string that identifies or names the point.
On Descriptor: Enter a description that will indicate the ON condition.
Off Descriptor: Enter a description that will indicate the OFF condition.
Audit/Alarm Register Index: The Modbus register specified here will be the one logged to the
Event log if an alarm is generated for this table. This enables the Host to associate the alarm with
something.
Alarm Detection: Enable/disable alarm detection.
Alarm Condition State: The current alarm condition state.
I/O Board Address: The board address detected by the software during the I/O scan.
I/O Board Point #: The board point number detected by the software during I/O scan.

Command Was Issued: This field indicates to the I/O drivers that scan the inputs and write the
outputs that a value has been written to the discrete output current status and also that the value
needs to be an output to the relay. The purpose of this is to prevent the I/O scanning function
from continuously issuing an "off" or "on" to the relay, preserving its operating life. If the current
state is on, but the Command Was Issued field is false, the I/O scanning function does nothing. If
the field is true, the I/O scanning function outputs the value to the relay and clears the Command
Was Issued field.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 135


Physical Data Points
Discrete Output Configuration (Table #22)

Current Status: The current status of the point. Possible displays include: Manual Override, I/O
Failed, and alarm status.
Current Value: The current value of the point.
Last On Date/Time: The date and time of the last ON condition.
Last Off Date/Time: The date and time of the last OFF condition.
Pulse Duration: Pulse length should be set to ensure that the device being operated has
adequate time to actuate fully. A pulse duration of 0.0 causes the output to latch in the new state
until manually changed again.
Invert Output: This field allows you to cause the software to flip the state of the discrete output
before writing it to the physical output.
In Manual/Manual Value: If you manually override the point by selecting Manual Mode, enter
the value in the Manual Value field.
Data Blocks: Set the Event log (Table #193) in which audits or alarms for this table will be
entered.

Security Access: Select the access level a user must have to edit these parameters. For more on
access levels, refer to Password Table.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 136


Chapter 4

Calculations
You can use AutoCONFIG to configure calculations performed by the instrument. The
Calculations heading in the navigation bar provides access to the calculations that can be
performed by the unit.
Note: Tables 51, 53, 56, and 129 are available for AutoEXEC only. For AutoPILOT PRO, Table
65 may be available.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 137


Calculations
Calculation Thread Allocation (Table #32)

Calculation Thread Allocation (Table #32)

The Calculation Thread Allocation table will typically only be modified for advanced station
control operations. This function allows you to designate how calculations are executed (one
time per second, ten times per second, one time per every five seconds).

Thread Priority: This value indicates a calculation threads priority with regards to other
threads. Currently, all threads have the same priority. This field is reserved for the future.
Thread Descriptor: A string that can be assigned from Table 15 to describe the thread.
Reset Cycle Times: Use this flag to reset the calculated timer values.
Repeat Timer: Enter how often a thread can run.
Last Cycle Time: This value represents the length of time that the entire thread
calculation took to run.
Shortest/Longest Cycle Times: These values represent the shortest and longest times
the entire thread calculation took to run.
Thread Status: This field is for future development.
Calculation Item and Block Reference: Select a calculation item and the associated
block reference is displayed.
Last Cycle Time: This value represents the length of time that the selected calculation
item took to run.
Shortest/Longest Cycle Times: These values represent the shortest and longest times
the selected calculation item took to run.
Block Status: This field is for future development.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 138


Calculations
PID (Table #33)

PID (Table #33)

Configurations for a true PID loop are more complex than the configurations for a proportional
PID loop. The derivative parameter in gas control is typically not used.
Prior to configuring the PID, determine whether it will run on 1–5 V or 4–20 mA. If you are
using 1–5 V, a 12-V power source going to the analog output board is required. If using 4–20
mA, a 24-V power source going to the analog output is required. Additionally, calibrating the
analog output will reduce the potential for error.

Calculation: Enable/disable the PID calculation here.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
ID: The PID calculation table ID.
Mode: Select Auto if you want the RTU to control output based on process input. Select
Manual if you want to control the output directly.
Failure Status: This field is selectable so that something external to this function, such as
another table or discrete input, can fail the calculation.
Output Value: The actual calculated output value in percentage (0% to 100%).
Output Mode: Select whether the end device will be connected to an analog or discrete
output.
Open / Close Discrete Output: If the PID is using two discrete outputs to control a
stepper motor for a valve (as opposed to using an analog output), these two discrete
outputs represent the points that activate the opening and closing of the valve.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 139


Calculations
PID (Table #33)

Open /Close Limit Discrete In: These discrete inputs act as limit switches to the PID
calculation. The PID will stop trying to open or close the outputs if the corresponding input
limit is active.
Process Variables: The live values of the process outputs. In the figure, for example,
Process Variable #1 is linked to the hourly flow rate of DP run #1.
Control Mode: Select whether the algorithm will use the set point from the remote host
system or the set point entered by the local user.
L (Local) Set Point: The set point entered by the local user.
R (Remote) Set Point: The set point from the remote host system.
R (Remote) Set Point Load: Enabling this field provides the ability to force the loading
of the PID set point designated by the Host.
Op (Operating) Set Point: The actual operating set point being used by the algorithm.
Maximum Set Point: The maximum limit on the set point.
Ramp Set Point: The ramping function causes the output to be gradually ramped up or
down until it reaches the set point defined in this field, essentially smoothing set point
transitions so the PID output does not change too rapidly.
Ramp Rate: Enter the rate at which the set point will be ramped up or down.
Maximum Output: Enter the reading of the output signal on the analog output point that
is being used to control the end device. This value is in percent. For example, if you are
using a 4–20 mA device and 8 mA is measured on the analog output point, this value is
25%.
Remote Load Required: If you enable this field, the Remote Set Point Load field must
also be enabled for the set point to actually be loaded (similar to a check back before
execute).
Pro (Proportional) Term: The element of the PID that is proportional to the difference
between the current and desired process output.

Integral and Derivative Terms: These values are used to control how fast the valve
opens or closes. Fine tuning a valve is a matter of trial and error. Thus, we suggest using
the default settings first and making adjustments as necessary. The integral value is
usually set at less than 1/10 of the PID gain to avoid overshooting the set point value. The
derivative constant is used to slow the changes of the process variable. For gas control
applications, leave the derivative value at 0.0 to reduce stability problems

Error Deadband: Enter the optimum operating range for the PID loop. This value is a
plus/minus value from the set point. As long as the signal output is within this range, the
PID loop does not make any corrections. This parameter is useful for power sensitive
installations. For example, if stepper motors are being used the function will not actuate
the motors if the process variable is within this deadband region, conserving a great deal
of power.
PID Action: Typically, Forward action implies the device is fully open if it has 1 V or 4 mA
going to it and fully closed when it has 5 V or 20 mA going to it. Reverse action implies the
opposite: The device is fully closed if it has 1 V or 4 mA going to it and fully open if it has
5 V or 20 mA going to it. Some control devices have up and down arrow indicators that
are used to determine whether the device is open or closed. A Forward acting device with
an arrow pointed down is open, and a Reverse acting device is the opposite.
Maximum PV: Enter the maximum limit on the incoming input process value.
Copy Enable: Enabling this field causes the set point to be copied to specified locations.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 140


Calculations
PID (Table #33)

Set Point Track: If this function is enabled and the PID is in manual mode, the algorithm
will force the set point to the current process variable. If the PID is set automatic, the set
point is then equal to the input, resulting in a bumpless transfer.

Fail Mode: Select what the end device should do in the event of a system failure. Options
are listed below.

 Fail Fixed: Valve stops in exact position it is in at the time of the failure.
 Fail Open: Valve opens all the way in the event of a failure.

 Fail Closed: Valve closes all the way in the event of a failure

Fail Mask: This status indicates if one of the input process variables is currently in a fail
condition.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 141


Calculations
PID (Table #33)

Sample PID Graphs

Proportional Only
The graph below depicts a typical Proportional Only controller process response. Normally,
this is all that is required to produce the desired process results. The process output
typically overshoots the desired output and then settles into a steady-state output
somewhat less than the desired output value. The process output settles to some value for
which the proportional control output matches the control input needed to achieve a
steady state. The integral element of the PID controller forces the process output to match
the desired output by utilizing the total error signal.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 142


Calculations
PID (Table #33)

Proportional-Integral
This graph depicts a Proportional-Integral controller process response. It provides a
control signal that is proportional to the total process output error over time. The initial
overshoot and oscillations remain basically unchanged for the example below, and the
steady-state process output gravitates more toward the desired output value.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 143


Calculations
PID (Table #33)

Proportional-Integral with Derivative


Below is an example of the derivative PID element. It provides a control signal that is
proportional to the rate of change of the process output error signal. The derivative
dampens the process overshoot and improves the system's response to change. The graph
shows what happens when the derivative element is added to the proportional-integral
controller. The initial process overshoot and oscillations are reduced, and the process
output seeks the desired output value sooner than it does with P-I control alone.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 144


Calculations
PID (Table #33)

Proportional Only with Gain examples


Determining the PID gain constants that are necessary to control a given process can be
difficult. However, understanding what each element contributes to the output may help
make this task easier. The graph below contains four examples of the same process being
controlled by a Proportional Only controller. Each line shows a different proportional gain.
A smaller proportional band produces a response that is significantly closer to the desired
output but has more overshoot and oscillations than a larger band.
The integral gain must be chosen so that it does not cause oscillations. The tendency is to
use a large integral gain to reset the process output to the set point quickly. However,
doing so can lead to process instability and uncontrollable oscillations. The integral
element can be limited to operating when the process output is within the proportional
band.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 145


Calculations
PID (Table #33)

Proportional-Integral with large Derivative


The derivative gain should be chosen to minimize overshoot on process start-up and
process fluctuations in similar conditions. Too large of a derivative gain causes the
derivative element to overpower the proportional element, resulting in a process start-up
that is longer than necessary. This is demonstrated in the graph shown below. As with the
integral element, the derivative may also be limited to operating whenever the process
output is within the proportional band. This may be desirable because it allows a larger
derivative gain to be used without lengthening the process start-up.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 146


Calculations
Proportional Output (Table #34)

Proportional Output (Table #34)

Proportional PID control is used when an output proportional to the process selected is
desired. The proportional PID input is directly related to the output, whereas true PID is not.
One analog output is required.
Prior to configuring the PID, determine whether it will run on 1–5 V or 4–20 mA. If you are
using 1–5 V, a 12-V power source going to the analog output board is required. If using 4–20
mA, a 24-V power source going to the analog output is required. Additionally, calibrating the
analog output will reduce the potential for error.

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation here.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
ID: The proportional output calculation table ID.
Value: The actual calculated output value in percentage (0% to 100%).
Mode: Select Auto if you want the RTU to control output based on process input. Select
Manual if you want to control the output directly.
Failure Status: This field is selectable so that something external to this function, such as
another table or discrete input, can fail the calculation.
Minimum Scale: Set the minimum value that the percentage output is going to record as
it ramps up toward the set point. This value is in engineering units.
Maximum Scale: Set the maximum value that the percentage output is going to record
as it ramps beyond the set point. This value is in engineering units.
Action: Typically, Forward action implies the device is fully open if it has 1 V or 4 mA
going to it and fully closed when it has 5 V or 20 mA going to it. Reverse action implies the
opposite: The device is fully closed if it has 1 V or 4 mA going to it and fully open if it has
5 V or 20 mA going to it. Some control devices have up and down arrow indicators that
are used to determine whether the device is open or closed. A Forward acting device with
an arrow pointed down is open, and a Reverse acting device is the opposite.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 147


Calculations
Proportional Output (Table #34)

Fail Mode: Select what the output should do in the event of an input failure. Options are
listed below.

 Fail Fixed: Output stops at the exact value at the time of the failure.
 Fail to Maximum Scale: Output goes to maximum scale in the event of a failure.
 Fail to Minimum Scale: Output goes to minimum scale in the event of a failure.

Process Variables: The live values of the process outputs. For example, you could link
Process Variable #1 to the hourly flow rate of DP run #1.
Fail Mask: Specify what the fail condition is for any of the connected process variables.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 148


Calculations
High / Low Selection (Table #35)

High / Low Selection (Table #35)

On this page, you can configure a high or low selection PID. A high selection PID is used in a
cascade PID loop where the higher value is the prevailing one of several input PID functions,
and a low selection PID is used in a cascade PID loop where the lower value is the prevailing
one.

Calculation: Enable/disable the PID calculation here.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
Select ID: The high/low selection PID calculation table ID.
Mode: Select whether this is a high or low selection PID loop.
Copy Enable: When enabled, the function will copy the currently selected output back to
all of the process variables. This is intended to zero any error term build-up for PID loops
that may be connected to this function.
Number of High/Low Inputs: Enter the number of inputs to be used in the calculation.
Output Value: The value of the selected (highest or lowest) process variable. Typically,
this will be connected to a physical analog output.
Process Variables Selected: An indication of the currently selected process variable.
Process Variables: The process variables, typically % outputs from several PID loops,
that will be evaluated to determine which output (highest or lowest) will be selected to be
used as an output (Output Value).

Thermo Fisher Scientific 149


Calculations
Alarm Status (Table #36)

Alarm Status (Table #36)

This function converts a point alarm indication into a discrete output value so that it can be to
be connected to other functions.

Calculation: Enable/disable the function here.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
Status ID: Table 15 text description of this entry.
Alarm Status: This value is the output of the alarm status calculation. It indicates the
result of the test of the connected source point. If the connected source point is in alarm
(Hi/Lo/HiHi/LoLo etc) and the appropriate alarm mask is selected the output will be Active,
else it will be Clear.
FP Alarm Source: This field provides the user with a floating point connection point.
Word Alarm Source: This field provides the user with a word point connection point.
Byte Alarm Source: This field provides the user with a byte point connection point.
Alarm Mask: Select which conditions to test for in the connected point's status.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 150


Calculations
Point Type Conversion (Table #37)

Point Type Conversion (Table #37)

When connecting points together with AutoCONFIG, the input/output types must be the same
(byte to byte, float to float, etc.). If you want to connect two point types that are not the
same (byte to float, etc.), use Table #37 to convert the point type input into the desired point
type output.

Calculation: Enable/disable this function here.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device of function associated with the
calculation.
Output ID: The point type conversion table ID.
Byte/discrete/16-bit word/floating point input: Copy the input into the correct input
type field, i.e., if a byte input, use the Byte Input field.
Click Apply and the input will be converted to all four output types.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 151


Calculations
Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)

Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)

An orifice meter run uses a differential pressure (DP) transducer to calculate flow rate based
on pressure drop across an orifice (restriction) plate. There are eight pages in the AutoCONFIG
software associated with each DP run:
 Static: Enter the basic information required to configure an orifice meter run.
 Instantaneous: View current data pertaining to the meter run.
 Engineering Units: Set the engineering units used for calculations.
 Min/Max: View minimum/maximum flow data.
 Location Factor: Calculate the Fwl and Fpwl factors.
 History: Set up and view historical data.
 Well Stream: Enter a Full Well Stream factor to be used in the calculation.
 Fwv: Enter a Water Vapor Factor.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 152


Calculations
Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)

Static Data for Differential Pressure Flow Calculation Table

The Static page contains the basic information required to configure an orifice meter run.

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation here.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
ID: The DP flow calculation table ID.
Pipe Thermal Expansion Coefficient: Enter the value that represents the amount the
meter run's pipe expands or contracts in inches per inch per °F (in/in-F).
Orifice Thermal Expansion Coefficient: Enter the value that represents the amount the
meter run's orifice plate expands or contracts in inches per inch per °F (in/in-F).
Isentropic Exponent: The isentropic exponent is equal to the ratio of the specific heat
(cp/cv) of the gas at constant pressure (cp) and constant volume (cv). It is independent of
pressure.
Pipe Diameter: Enter the actual measured inside pipe diameter in inches used by the
equations to calculate flow.
Orifice Diameter: Enter the actual measured orifice diameter in inches used by the
equations to calculate flow.
Atmospheric Pressure: Enter the current atmospheric pressure in psi measured at the
installation site.
Contract Hour: Enter the time of day that the unit will store an archive in the daily
historical log and start a new set of averages and accumulations for a new day. Valid
entries are 0 (midnight) through 23 (11 PM).
Pressure Base: Enter the base pressure that the flow equations use to correct the
volumes.
Temperature Base: Enter the base temperature that the flow equations use to correct
the volumes.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 153


Calculations
Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)

Low DP Cutoff: The low DP cutoff (low flow cutoff) is used to force the flow rate to zero
when the differential pressure drops below a set value.
Manual Flow Cutoff: For applications with bidirectional flow, you can change this field to
Force to force flow to zero.
Static Pressure Type: Select a gauge pressure or absolute pressure type.
Calculation Method: Select the AGA 3 method used for orifice flow measurement.
Options are listed below.

 AGA 2530-1992
 AGA 3-1985
 Gost
 V-Cone
 Slotted Orifice
 ISO 5167
 Gost 8.586-2005

Fpv Calculation Method: Select the method used for calculating supercompressibility for
this meter run. Options are listed below.

 NX-19: Gas calculation, 1985


 NX-19 Analysis: Gas calculation with full gas components, 1985
 AGA 8 Short: Gas calculation (no longer used)
 AGA 8 Gross: Gas calculation, 1992
 AGA 8 Detail: Gas calculation with full gas components, 1992
 GERG91 Mod: A supercompressibility calculation (Fpv) method used in the
calculation of the gas flow equation. This option should only be selected for the
GOST gas flow calculation.
 Constant 1.0: Assumes Fpv value as 1
 NX19 mod

GQ Data Definition Block: Select the gas quality data block (Table #128) that the meter
run is using.
Floating Point block
The parameters displayed in this section of the Static page change depending on the
calculation method you selected.
AGA 2530-1992

AGA2530 Orifice Reference Temperature: Enter the reference temperature of the


orifice plate in °F.
AGA2530 Pipe Reference Temperature: Enter the reference temperature of the pipe
in °F.
AGA2530 Tap Location: Select whether the location of the pressure tap relative to the
orifice plate is upstream or downstream.

AGA 3-1985

Thermo Fisher Scientific 154


Calculations
Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)

AGA 3 Tap Location: Select whether the location of the pressure tap relative to the
orifice plate is upstream or downstream.
AGA 3 Tap Configuration: Select whether the tap configuration is a flange or pipe.

Gost

Gost Orifice Edge Radius: Enter the radius of the upstream edge of the orifice plate
hole.
Gost Pipe Wall Roughness: Enter the inside roughness of the pipe.
Gost Orifice Check Interval: Enter the length of time in years that can pass before
the orifice plate will be checked for wear.

V-Cone

V-Cone Calibration Temperature: This is the temperature at which the manufacturer


calibrated the meter when it was made.
V-Cone Flow Coefficient: Enter the coefficient factor applied for calculation.

Slotted Orifice

Slotted Beta: This value is a constant specific to the plate being used and is supplied
by the manufacturer of the meter.
Slotted Gas Viscosity: This value is calculated and supplied by the RTU.
Slotted Meter A–F Constants: These values are constants specific to the plate being
used and are supplied by the manufacturer of the meter.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 155


Calculations
Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)

Instantaneous Data for Differential Pressure Flow Calculations

The Instantaneous page displays current data pertaining to the meter run. For continuous
updates, click the Auto Refresh check box.

Zb Factor: The compressibility at base condition.


Zf Factor: The compressibility at upstream flowing condition.
Zs Factor: The calculated compressibility of the gas at standard conditions (60°F,
14.73 psi).
Square Root Extension: The square root of absolute pressure multiplied by DP. For V-
Cone, the square root of V-Cone DP multiplied by the calculated V-Cone Rho.
Gas Temperature: The gas temperature as measured by a temperature probe inside
of pipe line.
Differential Pressure: The differential pressure.
Static Pressure: The line pressure measured on the pipe.
Fpv Factor: The supercompressibility factor calculated by using AGA 8.
Current Hour Volume: The gross volume for the current hour.
Previous Hour Volume: The gross volume for the previous hour.
Current Hour Energy: The result of multiplying the value in Current Hour Volume by
the BTU factor.
Previous Hour Energy: The result of multiplying the value in Previous Hour Volume by
the BTU factor.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 156


Calculations
Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)

Current Month Volume: The gross volume for the current month.
Previous Month Volume: The gross volume for the previous month.
Current Month Energy: The result of multiplying the value in the Current Month
Volume by the BTU factor.
Previous Month Energy: The result of multiplying the value in the Previous Month
Volume by the BTU factor.
Flow Status: This field displays Flowing or Not Flowing.
Flow Time This Period: The flow time during the current log period.
Hourly Flow Rate: The current calculate flow rate calculated as rate per hour.
Daily Flow Rate: The current calculate flow rate calculated as rate per day.
Totalized Volume: The total volume that will be rolled over at 1,000,000 Mcf.
Current Day Volume: The corrected volume for the current day.
Previous Day Volume: The corrected volume for the previous day.
Current Day Flow Time: The flow accumulated flow time for the current day.
Previous Day Flow Time: The flow accumulated flow time for the previous day.
Hourly Energy Rate: The energy rate in the sales line for the current hour.
Daily Energy Rate: The current calculated energy rate.
Totalized Energy: The total energy that will be rolled over at 1,000,000 MMBTU.
Current Day Energy: The totalized energy from the contract hour of the previous day
to the contract hour of the current day.
Previous Day Energy: The result of multiplying the value in Previous Day Volume by
the BTU factor.
Floating Point block
The information displayed in this section of the Instantaneous page changes depending
on the calculation method you selected (on the Static page).
Note: A detailed explanation of each factor is outside the scope of this document.
Please refer to the appropriate reference material for the calculation of interest.
AGA 2530-1992

AGA2530 Beta: The diameter ratio of the orifice plate bore diameter to the meter
tube internal diameter at flowing temperature.
AGA2530 Ftf: The flowing temperature factor.
AGA2530 Ftb: The base temperature factor.
AGA2530 Fpb: The base pressure factor.
AGA2530 Fgr: The real gas relative density factor.
AGA2530 Fn: The numeric conversion factor.
AGA2530 Fsl: The orifice slope factor.
AGA2530 Fc: The orifice calculation factor.
AGA2530 Red: The Reynolds Number.
AGA2530 Y1: The expansion factor (upstream).

Thermo Fisher Scientific 157


Calculations
Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)

For AGA 3-1985

AGA 3 C Prime: The composite orifice flow factor.


AGA 3 Beta: The diameter ratio of the orifice plate bore diameter to the meter
tube internal diameter at flowing temperature.
AGA 3 Ftf: The flowing temperature factor.
AGA 3 Ftb: The base temperature factor.
AGA 3 Fpb: The base pressure factor.
AGA 3 Fgr: The real gas relative density factor.
AGA 3 Fr: The Reynolds Number factor.
AGA 3 E: The velocity of approach factor.
AGA 3 Y: The expansion factor.
AGA 3 Fb: The basic orifice factor.
AGA 3 Fa: The orifice thermal expansion factor.

For Gost

Gost Beta: The ratio of the internal pipe size to orifice size.
Gost Dynamic Viscosity: The calculated gas viscosity.
Gost E: The velocity of approach factor.
Gost e: The expansion factor.
Gost d: The orifice bore diameter at line conditions.
Gost D: The pipe diameter at line conditions.
Gost Kp: The orifice rounding factor.
Gost Ksh: The pipe roughness factor, first approximation.
Gost Ksfh: The pipe roughness factor, final value.
Gost Cinf: The coefficient of discharge at Re = infinity.
Gost KRe: The Reynolds Number coefficient.
Gost Re: The Reynolds Number.

For V-Cone

VCone Beta: The diameter ratio of the orifice plate bore diameter to the meter
tube internal diameter at flowing temperature.
VCone Ftf: The flowing temperature factor.
VCone Fpf: A value calculated by the RTU.
VCone Rho: The V-Cone calculated factor associated with V-Cone gravity,
absolute pressure, absolute temperature, and flowing gas compressibility factor.
VCone Fgr: The real gas relative density factor.
VCone Y: Value resulting from the association of the beta factor and V-Cone DP
and SP.
VCone Fa: The meter thermal expansion factor.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 158


Calculations
Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)

For Slotted Orifice

Slotted Cd: The meter discharge coefficient.


Slotted Red: The Reynolds Number of the pipe.
Slotted Fp: The flow pressure.
Slotted Ft: The flow temperature.
Slotted Standard Density: The gas density at standard conditions.
Slotted Flowing Density: The gas density at flowing conditions.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 159


Calculations
Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)

Setting Engineering Units for Differential Pressure Flow Calculations

Access this page to change the engineering units used for calculations.

Pipe/Orifice: inches, ft, mm, cm, m.


Atmospheric Pressure: psi, bar, mbar, Pascal, kPa, mPa, kg/cm2, mmHg, "H2O.
Differential Pressure: inH2O, mbar, kPa, kg/cm2, mmHg.
Static Pressure: psi, bar, mbar, Pascal, kPa, mPa, kg/cm2, mmHg, "H2O.
Temperature: °F, °C, °R, K.
Volume: Mcf, cf, MMcf, M3, E3M3.
Flow Rate: Mcf, cf, MMcf, M3, E3M3.
Energy: MMBTU, BTU, MBTU, MJ, GJ.
Energy Rate: MMBTU, MBTU, MJ, GJ.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 160


Calculations
Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)

Min/Max Data for Differential Pressure Flow Calculations

Enter the maximum and minimum differential pressure values for this meter. The RTU will
then calculate the meter's maximum and minimum corrected flow rates and compare them to
the calculated standard flow rate. If the maximum or minimum is exceeded for the number of
seconds defined in Flow Alarm Timeout field, then the corresponding flow alarm is set to
Active.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 161


Calculations
Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)

Location Factor for Differential Pressure Flow Calculations

The calculations on this page provide two factors: Fwl and Fpwl. Fwl is the local gravitational
correction factor and can be determined using the following equation:

Enable the calculation, and enter the latitude in degrees and the height (elevation) in feet
above sea level. Download the data, and click Refresh to obtain the Fwl factor.
Note For additional information on this calculation, refer to Appendix 3-A.6 of Orifice
Metering of Natural Gas, Part 3 (Third Ed., 1992).
The Fpwl factor is used to correct for the effect of local gravity on the weights of a deadweight
calibrator. The Fpwl equation is shown below:

When a deadweight calibrator is used for DP and SP, both must be corrected for local gravity,
and you must enable corrections for them separately (Fpwl SP Correction Calculation Enable
and Fpwl DP Correction Calculation Enable).
Enable the Fpwl SP and/or DP correction calculation, and enter the Fpwl gl and g0 values to
obtain the Fpwl factor.
Note For additional information on this calculation, refer to Appendix 3-A.7 of Orifice
Metering of Natural Gas, Part 3 (Third Ed., 1992).

Thermo Fisher Scientific 162


Calculations
Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)

History

Setup

The Setting tab allows you to set up historical data. Once you complete this page, click Apply.
Click the Data tab to generate and view historical data.

Audit Register Offset: This value is used to generate Modbus registers that are logged
in the event trail. As an example, assign an offset of 8001 to meter run #1 and 9001 to
meter run #2. If you change the orifice size for meter run #1, the unit will log 8007. If
you change the orifice size for meter run #2, the unit will log 9007. The index value of
7 corresponds to the orifice/primary device size item in Table #38 (DP flow calculation).
If the atmospheric pressure of meter run #1 changes, the unit will log 8008 because
the index value of 8 corresponds to the atmospheric pressure item in Table #38.
Periodic Data Block Index, Daily Data Block Index, Audit/Alarm Data Block
Index, Periodic Time Period: By default, these parameters are restricted to
Supervisor/Technician access only. To change these parameters or the access levels,
you must be logged in as a Supervisor or Technician. For more on security access
levels, refer to Password Table.
Break Periodic Log Upon Audit: Select whether a periodic log should be interrupted
when an audit occurs.
Historical Averaging Technique: Select the historical averaging technique. Options
include: Flow-Dependent Time-Weighted Linear Average, Flow-Dependent Time-
Weighted Formulaic Average, Flow-Weighted Linear Average, Flow-Weighted Formulaic
Average, Time-Weighted Linear Average, and Linear Average. For detailed explanations
of these techniques, reference API Chapter 21.1, Appendix B.
Break Log Upon GQ Audit: Select whether the RTU should break the periodic log and
start a new entry if the gas quality values are changed.
GQ Audit Logging: Setting this to Disabled disables the logging of audits for gas
quality values. This is necessary when gas quality values are coming in from a live
source, such as a chromatograph or live analog input.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 163


Calculations
Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)

Viewing Historical Data for Differential Pressure Flow Calculations

From the Data page, you can select whether you want hourly or periodic data. Click the
Retrieve Data button. The software displays the data in three tabs (history, audits, alarms).
See a sample below.

You can now generate a report by clicking the Generate Report button. This function saves the
report data (.hst file) on the PC so that you can view it or print it at a later time.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 164


Calculations
Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)

Well Stream Factor for Differential Pressure Flow Calculations

A full well stream factor is provided for production applications that require compensation for
well stream conditions. If this calculation is enabled, the factor is directly multiplied by the
calculated gas volume.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 165


Calculations
Differential Pressure Flow (Table #38)

Water Vapor Factor for Differential Pressure Flow Calculations

The water vapor factor (Fwv) is a direct multiplier into the flow equation that compensates for
any water vapor in the system. The number is a value close to the one derived from the
following equation:
Fwv = 1 - [((lb/MMcf) 21.0181)/1000000].
The Fwv for flowing gas that is considered fully saturated as currently implemented in the
standard Thermo Scientific flow computer software is shown below:

Calculation Enable: Enable or disable the calculation here.


Correction Mode: Select the water vapor factor method of calculation. Options are listed
below:
 Manual: Enter the Fwv directly (usually approximately .98). If you select this
option, see Fwv.
 Partial Calculation: Enter the pounds of water per million cubic feet of gas to
enable the RTU to calculate Fwv. If you select this option, see Water Content.

 Full Calculation: The software assumes full saturation and calculates the pounds of
water per million cubic feet of gas at the measured temperature and pressure. It
then takes that result and calculates the Fwv factor. This option is not an AGA
approved method and should not be used for custody transfer
installations.
Water Content: If you select Partial as the correction mode, enter the water content of
the gas (lb/MMcf) to enable the RTU to calculate Fwv.

Fwv: Enter the Fwv directly (usually approximately .98) here if you select Manual as the
correction mode.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 166


Calculations
AGA 7 Flow (Table #39)

AGA 7 Flow (Table #39)

The AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO support turbine and ultrasonic installations for linear meter
runs. Per AGA 7 and AGA 9, the equation is fixed at AGA 7 for both.
There are nine pages associated with each AGA 7 flow calculation:
 Static: Enter the basic information required to configure turbine meter run.
 Instantaneous: View current data pertaining to the meter run.
 Engineering Units: Set the engineering units used for calculations.
 Min/Max: View minimum/maximum flow data.
 Location Factor: Calculate the Fwl and Fpwl factors.
 History: Set up and view historical data.
 K-Factor: Configure the K-Factor table.
 Well Stream: Enter a Full Well Stream factor to be used in the calculation.
 Fwv: Enter a Water Vapor Factor.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 167


Calculations
AGA 7 Flow (Table #39)

Static Data for AGA 7 Flow Calculation Table

The Static page requires you to enter the basic information to configure a turbine meter run.

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
ID: The AGA 7 table ID.
Pipe Diameter: Enter the actual measured inside pipe diameter in inches used by the
equations to calculate flow.
Atmospheric Pressure: Enter the current atmospheric pressure in psi measured at the
installation site.
Low Flow Cutoff Time: Low flow cutoff is used to force the flow rate to zero when the
input pulse frequency drops below a set value.
Low Frequency Cutoff: If the calculated frequency of the pulse input falls below this
value, the meter will be considered to NOT be flowing and the flow rate will be forced to
zero.
Accumulator Pulse Count (Main Pulse Count if Auto-Adjust selected as calculation
method): Connect this field to the physical accumulator input (Table #20).
Data Valid Alarm Input: A discrete input, typically provided by an ultrasonic device that
indicates whether or not the primary device is operating properly. If this value is ON (1),
the flow calculation will stop.
Pulse Frequency: Pulse frequency is provided as information only as an indication of the
current pulse rate. This value is not used in the flow calculation.
Contract Hour: Enter the time of day that the unit will store an archive in the daily
historical log and start a new set of averages and accumulations for a new day. Valid
entries are 0 (midnight) through 23 (11 PM).
Flow Rate Filter Time: The flow rate filter time is basically the number of seconds over
which to average the current flow rate. This is used for intermittent or fluctuating pulse
inputs to smooth out the value when used in flow control.
Pressure Base: Enter the base pressure in psi that the flow equations use to correct the
volumes.
Temperature Base: Enter the base temperature in degrees Fahrenheit that the flow
equations use to correct the volumes.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 168


Calculations
AGA 7 Flow (Table #39)

M Correction Factor: Enter the meter correction factor provided by the turbine meter
manufacturer that is applied to the input pulses. This value does not have a unit, and it is
close to 1. During each cycle, the counted pulses are multiplied by this value to arrive at a
volume increment.
Manual Flow Cutoff: For applications with bidirectional flow, you can change this field to
Force to force flow to zero.
Static Pressure Type: Select a gauge pressure or absolute pressure type.
Calculation Method: Select whether this is a turbine meter or auto-adjust turbine meter
run. A turbine meter run uses a flow computer pulse input to measure the flow based on
pulses from a turbine blade. An auto-adjust turbine meter run uses two flow computer
pulse inputs to measure the flow based on pulses from turbine blades. The pulse ratio
between the pulses is used to compensate for mechanical wear.
Fpv Calculation Enable: Select the currently used method for calculating
supercompressibility for this meter run. Options are listed below.

 NX-19: Gas calculation, 1985

 NX-19 Analysis: Gas calculation with full gas components, 1985


 AGA 8 Short: Gas calculation (no longer used)
 AGA 8 Gross: Gas calculation, 1992
 AGA 8 Detail: Gas calculation with full gas components, 1992
 GERG91 Mod: A supercompressibility calculation (Fpv) method used in the
calculation of the gas flow equation. This option should only be selected for the
GOST gas flow calculation.
 Constant 1.0: Assumes Fpv value as 1, default

GQ Data Definition Block: Select the gas quality data block associated with this
calculation.
Floating Point block
If you select Auto-Adjust as the calculation method, a Floating Point section opens at the
bottom of the Static page.
Sensor Rotor Accumulator Pulse Count: The totalized count from the sensor rotor
accumulator.
Main Rotor Factor: Indicates the conversion factor (pulses/cf) for the main rotor.
Sensor Rotor Factor: Indicates the conversion factor (pulses/cf) for the sensor rotor.
A Bar Factor: Defined as the average relative adjustment (%) determined at factory
calibration.
Delta A High Alarm Limit: The high alarm limit at which the unit will log an alarm when
the live calculated A Bar Factor deviates from the factory calibration.
Delta A Low Alarm Limit: The low alarm limit at which the unit will log an alarm when
the live calculated A Bar Factor deviates from the factory calibration.
A Delta A High Warning Limit: The high warning limit at which the unit will log an alarm
when the live calculated A Bar Factor deviates from the factory calibration, indicating that
the meter is approaching failure.
A Delta A Low Warning Limit: The low warning limit at which the unit will log an alarm
when the live calculated A Bar Factor deviates from the factory calibration, indicating that
the meter is approaching failure.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 169


Calculations
AGA 7 Flow (Table #39)

Thermo Fisher Scientific 170


Calculations
AGA 7 Flow (Table #39)

Instantaneous Data for AGA 7 Flow Calculations

The Instantaneous page displays current data pertaining to the meter run. For continuous
updates, click the Auto Refresh check box.

Zb Factor: The compressibility at base condition.


Zf Factor: The compressibility at upstream flowing condition.
Zs Factor: The calculated compressibility of the gas at standard conditions (60°F, 14.73
psi).
Static Pressure: The line pressure measured on the pipe.
Gas Temperature: The line temperature as measured by a temperature probe inside the
pipe line.
Fpv Factor: The supercompressibility factor calculated by using AGA 8.

The remainder of this page displays values for current and previous volumes, energy,
energy rates, flow rates, and flow times:
Current Hour Actual Volume: The gross volume for the current hour.
Previous Hour Actual Volume: The gross volume for the previous hour.
Current Hour Corrected Volume: The corrected volume for the current hour.
Previous Hour Corrected Volume: The corrected volume for the previous hour.
Current Hour Energy: The result of multiplying the value in Current Hour Corrected
Volume by the BTU factor.
Previous Hour Energy: The result of multiplying the value in Previous Hour Corrected
Volume by the BTU factor.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 171


Calculations
AGA 7 Flow (Table #39)

Current Month Actual Volume: The gross volume for the current month.
Previous Month Actual Volume: The gross volume for the previous month.
Current Month Corrected Volume: The corrected volume for the current month.
Previous Month Correct Volume: The corrected volume for the previous month.
Current Month Energy: The result of multiplying the value in the Current Month
Corrected Volume by the BTU factor.
Previous Month Energy: The result of multiplying the value in the Previous Month
Corrected Volume by the BTU factor.
Flow Status: This field displays Flowing or Not Flowing.
Flow Time This Period: The flow time during the current log period.
Hourly Actual Flow Rate: The current flow rate into the sales line.
Daily Actual Flow Rate: The current calculated flow rate.
Hourly Corrected Flow Rate: The correct flow rate into the sales line.
Daily Corrected Flow Rate: The current corrected flow rate.
Totalized Actual Volume: The total volume that will be rolled over at 1,000,000 Mcf.
Current Day Actual Volume: The corrected volume for the current day.
Previous Day Actual Volume: The correct volume for the previous day.
Totalized Corrected Volume: The total corrected volume that will be rolled over at
1,000,000 Mcf.
Current Day Corrected Volume: The corrected volume for the current day.
Previous Day Corrected Volume: The corrected volume for the previous day.
Current Day Flow Time: The flow accumulated flow time for the current day.
Previous Day Flow Time: The flow accumulated flow time for the previous day.
Hourly Energy Rate: The energy rate in the sales line for the current hour.
Daily Energy Rate: The current calculated energy rate.
Totalized Energy: The total energy that will be rolled over at 1,000,000 MMBTU.
Current Day Energy: The totalized energy from the contract hour of the previous day to
the contract hour of the current day.
Previous Day Energy: The result of multiplying the value in Previous Day Volume by the
BTU factor.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 172


Calculations
AGA 7 Flow (Table #39)

Setting Engineering Units for AGA 7 Flow Calculations

Access this page to change the engineering units used for calculations.

Pipe/Orifice: inches, ft, mm, cm, m.


Atmospheric Pressure: psi, bar, mbar, Pascal, kPa, mPa, kg/cm2, mmHg, "H2O.
Static Pressure: psi, bar, mbar, Pascal, kPa, mPa, kg/cm2, mmHg, "H2O.
Temperature: °F, °C, °R, K.
Volume: Mcf, cf, MMcf, M3, E3M3.
Flow Rate: Mcf, cf, MMcf, M3, E3M3.
Energy: MMBtu, Btu, MBtu, MJ, GJ.
Energy Rate: MMBtu, MBtu, MJ, GJ.
Corrected Flow Rate: Macf, acf, MMacf, am3, E3am3.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 173


Calculations
AGA 7 Flow (Table #39)

Min/Max Data for AGA 7 Flow Calculations

Enter the maximum and minimum actual flow rates for this meter. The RTU will then calculate
the meter's maximum and minimum corrected flow rates and compare them to the calculated
standard flow rate. If the maximum or minimum is exceeded for the number of seconds
defined in Flow Alarm Timeout parameter, then the corresponding flow alarm is set to Active.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 174


Calculations
AGA 7 Flow (Table #39)

History

Setup

The Setting tab allows you to set up historical data. Once you complete this page, click Apply.

Audit Register Offset: This value is used to generate Modbus registers that are logged in
the event trail. As an example, assign an offset of 8001 to meter run #1 and 9001 to
meter run #2. If you change the pipe diameter for meter run #1, the unit will log 8006. If
you change the pipe diameter for meter run #2, the unit will log 9006. The index value of
6 corresponds to the pipe diameter item of Table #39 (AGA 7 flow calculation). If the
atmospheric pressure of meter run #1 changes, the unit will log 8031 because the index
value of 31 corresponds to the atmospheric pressure item of Table #39.
Periodic Data Block Index, Daily Data Block Index, Audit/Alarm Data Block
Index, Periodic Time Period: By default, these parameters are restricted to
Supervisor/Technician access only. To change these parameters or the access levels, you
must be logged in as a Supervisor or Technician. For more on security access levels, refer
to Password Table.
Break Periodic Log Upon Audit: Select whether a periodic log should be interrupted
when an audit occurs.
Historical Averaging Technique: Select the historical averaging technique. Options
include: Flow-Dependent Time-Weighted Linear Average, Flow-Dependent Time-Weighted
Formulaic Average, Flow-Weighted Linear Average, Flow-Weighted Formulaic Average,
Time-Weighted Linear Average, and Linear Average. For detailed explanations of these
techniques, reference API Chapter 21.1, Appendix B.
Break Log Upon GQ Audit: Select whether the RTU should break the periodic log and
start a new entry if the gas quality values are changed.
GQ Audit Logging: Setting this to Disabled disables the logging of audits for gas quality
values. This is necessary when gas quality values are coming in from a live source, such
as a chromatograph or live analog input.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 175


Calculations
AGA 7 Flow (Table #39)

Viewing Historical Data for AGA 7 Flow Calculations

From the Data page, you can select whether you want hourly or periodic data. Click the
Retrieve Data button. The software displays the data in three tabs (history, audits, alarms).
See a sample below.

You can now generate a report by clicking the Generate Report button. This function saves the
report data (.hst file) on the PC so that you can view it or print it at a later time.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 176


Calculations
AGA 7 Flow (Table #39)

K-Factor Setup for AGA 7 Flow Calculations

The K-Factor curve is defined by an array of 10 structures. Entering the K-Factor values and
their corresponding frequency values enables the RTU to calculate a frequency of an incoming
pulse stream. The calculated frequency is then used to determine which table entries it falls
between. The RTU interpolates between the two values to obtain a "flowing" K-Factor value. If
the calculated frequency exceeds the maximum frequency contained in the table, the RTU
uses the K-Factor of the previous table entry.
For off-site calculation, a flow time average value is entered into the history table along with
an actual volume so that proper correction of volumes can be performed by the software.
If you are going to use the K-Factor table, enable the calculation. If you are not going to use
the table, the factor is calculated and displayed in the K Meter Factor field.
Enter the K-Factor engineering units. In the remaining fields, enter the K-Factor frequencies in
Hz and their corresponding values.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 177


Calculations
AGA 7 Flow (Table #39)

Location Factor for AGA 7 Flow Calculations

The Fpwl factor is used to correct for the effect of local gravity on the weights of a deadweight
calibrator. The Fpwl equation is shown below:

Enable the Fpwl SP correction calculation, and enter the Fpwl gl and g0 values. Click Apply to
obtain the Fpwl factor.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 178


Calculations
AGA 7 Flow (Table #39)

Well Stream for AGA 7 Flow Calculations

A Full Well Stream factor is provided for production applications that require compensation for
well stream conditions. If this calculation is enabled, the factor entered is directly multiplied by
the calculated gas volume.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 179


Calculations
AGA 7 Flow (Table #39)

Water Vapor Factor for AGA 7 Flow Calculations

The water vapor factor (Fwv) is a direct multiplier into the flow equation that compensates for
any water vapor in the system. The number is a value close to the one derived from the
following equation:
Fwv = 1 - [((lb/MMcf) 21.0181)/1000000].
The Fwv for flowing gas that is considered fully saturated as currently implemented in the
standard Thermo Scientific flow computer software is shown below:

Calculation Enable: Enable or disable the calculation here.


Correction Mode: Select the water vapor factor method of calculation. Options are listed
below:

 Manual: Enter the Fwv directly (usually approximately .98). If you select this
option, see Fwv.
 Partial Calculation: Enter the pounds of water per million cubic feet of gas to
enable the RTU to calculate Fwv. If you select this option, see Water Content.
 Full Calculation: The software assumes full saturation and calculates the pounds of
water per million cubic feet of gas at the measured temperature and pressure. It
then takes that result and calculates the Fwv factor. This option is not an AGA
approved method and should not be used for custody transfer
installations.
Water Content: If you select Partial as the correction mode, enter the water content of
the gas (lb/MMcf) to enable the RTU to calculate Fwv.
Fwv: Enter the Fwv directly (usually approximately .98) here if you select Manual as the
correction mode.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 180


Calculations
AGA 10 Speed of Sound (Table #40)

AGA 10 Speed of Sound (Table #40)

Use Table #40 to calculate the speed of sound for a gas based on the latest AGA 10 standard.
The calculated speed of sound can then be used to compare individual path velocities for an
ultrasonic flowmeter and generate an alarm annunciation on a path velocity error.
There are three pages associated with this calculation:
 General: Enter the basic information required to configure the meter run.
 Engineering Units: Set the engineering units used for calculations.
 Speed of Sound: Set SOS deviation limits and alarms.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 181


Calculations
AGA 10 Speed of Sound (Table #40)

General Configuration for AGA 10 Calculation

Set the basic calculation parameters on this page.

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
ID: The AGA 10 table ID.
Atmospheric Pressure: Enter the current atmospheric pressure in psi measured at the
installation site.
Pressure Base: Enter the base pressure in psi that the flow equations use to correct the
volumes.
Temperature Base: Enter the base temperature in degrees Fahrenheit that the flow
equations use to correct the volumes.
Static Pressure: Enter the line pressure measured on the pipe.
Static Pressure Type: Select a gauge pressure or absolute pressure type.
Gas Temperature: Enter the gas temperature.
GQ Data Definition Block: Select the gas quality data block associated with this
calculation.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 182


Calculations
AGA 10 Speed of Sound (Table #40)

Setting Engineering Units for AGA 10 Calculations

Access this page to change the engineering units used for calculations.

Atmospheric Pressure: psi, bar, mbar, Pascal, kPa, mPa, kg/cm2, mmHg, inH2O.
Static Pressure: psi, bar, mbar, Pascal, kPa, mPa, kg/cm2, mmHg, inH2O.
Temperature: °F, °C, °R, K.
Speed of Sound: ft/sec, m/sec.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 183


Calculations
AGA 10 Speed of Sound (Table #40)

Speed of Sound Data for AGA 10 Calculations

On this page, set SOS deviation limits and alarms.

Calculated Speed of Sound: The speed of sound as calculated by the unit.


Supercompressibility: The supercompressibility as calculated by the unit.
Reference Speed of Sound: Thespeed of sound as entered by the user or obtained via
the serial Modbus diagnostic data from the ultrasonic device.
Speed of Sound Deviation Limit: Set the maximum deviation between the speeds of
sound as measured by the ultrasonic meter and calculated by the unit.
Speed of Sound Deviation Alarm: Displays whether the calculated speed of sound is
within acceptable limits.
Path Speed of Sound Deviation Limit: Set the maximum deviation between path
velocities as measured by the ultrasonic meter.
Path Speed of Sound Deviation Alarm: Displays whether the path velocities are within
acceptable limits.
Reference Paths #1–#8: The calculated speed of sound for each path.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 184


Calculations
Meter Station (Table #41)

Meter Station (Table #41)

This function provides the ability to associate various meter runs and totalize the volumes and
energy values of the runs. For example, the meter station shown in the figure below displays
the totalized values for DP meter runs #1 and #2.
The screen below is an example of the values displayed for gas flow runs. If configuring a
meter station for liquid meter runs, the values displayed will be those associated with liquid
flow runs.

Calculation: Enable the function.


Descriptor: Enter a description for this calculation.
Output ID: The meter station table ID.
Flow Type: Select whether the flow type is gas or liquid.
Meter Run Calc. Block section: Connect the Meter Run # Calc. Block fields to the actual
meter runs you want to include using copy and paste. Click Apply and Refresh, and the
calculated values will be displayed.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 185


Calculations
Meter Run Switching (Table #42)

Meter Run Switching (Table #42)

A typical run switching application involves two meter runs. The first meter run (Run 1)
constantly measures flow rate. The second meter run (Run 2) is switched inline to share the
measurement when flow rates exceed a certain limit. The system usually has a control valve
mounted inline on Run 2. When the flow rate of Run 1 exceeds the specified limit, the flow
computer opens the control valve using one of the unit's discrete outputs, placing Run 2 in
operation.
The Run Switching page contains three tabs:
 Overview: Displays the status of the current run switching function.
 General: Set basic parameters for the run switch function.
 Configuration: Configure the run switch for up to sixteen meter runs.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 186


Calculations
Meter Run Switching (Table #42)

Overview for Run Switching Calculation

This screens displays the status of the current run switching function.

Calculation: Enable/disable run switching here.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
ID: The run switching table ID.
Disable on Setup: If downloading a configuration from a cold start and you want to begin
operation from run 1, disabling the function on startup prevents it from activating
immediately.
Current Action: Indicates the current status of the function.
Capacity to Close: Indicates the flow capacity of the currently open run. If flow capacity
is less than the specified amount, the instrument will close the run. If flow capacity is over
the limit, the instrument will open the next run.
Current Timer Value: Displays the dead band timer (from the Run Open Delay Time,
Close Delay Time, etc.) to open the next run or close the current run.
Current Control Status: This section displays the current status of all runs.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 187


Calculations
Meter Run Switching (Table #42)

General Configuration for Run Switching Calculation

On the General page, set basic parameters for the run switch function.

After Valve Control Idle Time: Enter how long to wait for the meter runs to stabilize
after opening/closing a valve. This time is in seconds.
Run Open Delay Time: Enter the amount of time in seconds to allow the valve to move
from fully closed to fully opened.
Run Close Delay Time: Enter the amount of time in seconds to allow the valve to move
from fully opened to fully closed. This time is in seconds.
Valve Open Timeout Limit: Enter how long to wait for the valve to open before a valve
open fail is set. This time is in seconds.
Valve Close Timeout Limit: Enter how long to wait for the valve to close before a valve
close fail is set. This time is in seconds.
Extra Relay Time: The RTU will have the extra time entered here to turn the run valve
on or off.
On Open Failure (all but last meter run): This field applies to all but the last meter
run. Select Take No Action if you do not want to issue a valve close command before
controlling the next valve after the last valve open failure. Select Close Valve to issue a
valve close command before controlling the next valve after a valve open failure.
On Open Failure (last meter run): This field applies to the last meter run. Select Take
No Action if you do not want to issue a valve close command before controlling the next
valve after the last valve open failure. Select Close Valve to issue a valve close command
before controlling the next valve after a valve open failure.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 188


Calculations
Meter Run Switching (Table #42)

Control Select Mode: Set the operating philosophy of the algorithm. Select Highest
Flowing to use the value from the highest flowing run. Select All Flowing to use the
highest/lowest value of all runs.
Check Capacity Before Closing: If enabled, the function will check the capacity of the
total flow before attempting to close the valve. Doing this prevents the function from
trying to close the valve and then re-opening it if the capacity to close is not sufficient.
Valve Status Detect Mode: The run switch will function based on the method selected
here. Options are to switch based on flow or valve status.
Opened Valve Discrete Status: Select whether the discrete input assigned for opened
valve status should be on or off to indicate an open valve.
Closed Value Discrete States: Select whether the discrete input assigned for closed
valve status should be on or to indicate a closed valve.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 189


Calculations
Meter Run Switching (Table #42)

Run Configuration for Run Switching Calculation

On this page, select the meter runs to be used with the calculation.

Meter Run Selection: Select the meter run you want to configure.
Valve Control Status: Enable/disable valve monitoring.
Meter Run or Process Variable Assignment: Connect this field to the required process
variable. If Run 1 is an orifice type, the process variable used is the DP for that run. If Run
1 is a turbine type, the process variable used is the actual flow rate.
Rate Selection: Select the rate associated with the run. Options are: DP/ACFH, MSCFH,
and Other.
Status Inputs - Open Status: Select whether the discrete input should be on or off to
indicate open status.
Status Inputs - Close Status: Select whether the discrete input should be on or off to
indicate close status.
Relay Outputs - Open Status: Select whether the relay should be on or off to indicate
open status.
Relay Outputs - Close: Select whether the relay should be on or off to indicate close
status.
Switching Limits - Open when Greater Than / Close when Less Than / Use
Calculated Min/Max Limits: When the flow is greater than the value entered in the
Open When Greater Than field, the instrument will try to open the next run. When the flow
is less than the value entered in the Close When Less Than field, the instrument will close
the run.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 190


Calculations
Meter Run Switching (Table #42)

Meter Run Priority Assignments: Prioritize the meter runs in this flow switch. Priority
#1 is the first run to be monitored. When the flow goes over its upper limit, Priority #2
will be the next run to open and be monitored, and so on.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 191


Calculations
Historical Averages (Table #43)

Historical Averages (Table #43)

Use this function to collect historical data on up to 36 inputs. There are three tabs for the
historical average calculation:

 General: Set the basic parameters for recording historical data.


 Historical Average Configuration: Configure the individual historical points.
 History: View the historical data.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 192


Calculations
Historical Averages (Table #43)

General Setup for Historical Averages

Set the basic parameters for recording historical data.

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
ID: The historical average calculation table ID.
History Data Block Index: Enter which historical data allocation log (Table #192) the
data will be logged at the end of each period.
Record Time Period: Select how long the record should run.
Force Log Break: You can use this field to manually end the current log period and begin
a new one.
Daily Log Contract Hour: The hour of the day that the daily log ends and a new daily log
begins.
Delta Time: The time that has elapsed since the last time the averaging module ran. This
value will typically be one second.
Flow Dependency Factor / Flow Weighting Factor / Flow Weighting Factor
Power: Refer to API Chapter 21.1 for explanations of these fields.
Event Based Logging block
The historical average function has the ability to provide event based logging. In this
mode, the function will continuously log records until an event trigger occurs, after which
the function will continue to log until an additional number of logs (Post Event Records)
are recorded. This provides users with a number of records before and after the event
occurred.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 193


Calculations
Historical Averages (Table #43)

The Event Trigger is a simple logical level that, when switched to Triggered, will cause
the function to go into an Event Capture mode as indicated by the Post Event Log
parameter changing to Capturing. During this mode, the function will continue to log
records until the number of Post Event Records are logged. At this point, the function
will stop logging records until the Event Capture field is set to Reset/Idle by the user.
Typically, the Event Trigger will be tied to a callout function that can be configured to
monitor some outside process and alarm and trigger when an upset is recognized. The
callout function can be tied to the event trigger using the copy/paste method.
The Last Event Date/Time fields display the last date and time a trigger occurred.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 194


Calculations
Historical Averages (Table #43)

Historical Average Configuration

Configure the individual historical points on this page.

Historical Point Number: Select the point number you want to configure.
Historical Point Value: Connect this field to the actual physical point.
Averaging/Accumulation Technique: Select the historical averaging technique. Options
include: Flow-Dependent Time-Weighted Linear Average, Flow-Dependent Time-Weight
Formulaic Average, Flow-Weighted Linear Average, Flow-Weighted Formulaic Average,
Time-Weighted Linear Average, Linear Average, Accumulation (accumulator input),
Accumulation (hourly rate input), Accumulator (daily rate input), and Snapshot.
Current/Previous Period Averages/Accumulations: The averages or accumulations
for the current and previous periods.
Current/Previous Period Low Values: The low values for the current and previous
periods.
Current/Previous Period High Values: The high values for the current and previous
periods.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 195


Calculations
Historical Averages (Table #43)

Viewing Historical Average Data

Click the Retrieve Data button on this page to display the historical data. You can then
generate a report by clicking the Generate Report button. This function saves the report data
(.hst file) on the PC so that you can view it or print it at a later time.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 196


Calculations
Floating Point Scaling (Table #44)

Floating Point Scaling (Table #44)

Table #44 enables you to scale an input before sending it to another function. On the General
page, enable this calculation and enter a text string that identifies the device or function
associated with the calculation in the Descriptor field. The floating point scaling table ID is
shown in the ID field.
Click the Floating Pt. Scale Configuration tab to configure the function.

Scale Item Number: Assign a number to this point.


Floating Point Input Value: Enter the value of the input you want to scale.
Input Low Range/Input High Range: Enter the low and high ranges for the input.
Output Low Range/Output High Range: Enter the low and high ranges of the scaled
output.
Scaled 16-Bit Word Output: After entering the other data, click Apply and Refresh, and
the scaled output will be displayed here.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 197


Calculations
16-Bit Word Scaling (Table #45)

16-Bit Word Scaling (Table #45)

This function (Table #45) allows you to scale word data before sending it to another function.
On the General page, enable this function. In the Descriptor field, enter a text string that
identifies the device or function associated with the calculation. The ID field displays the 16-
bit word scaling table ID.
Click the Scale Item Configuration tab to configure the function.

Scale Item Number: Assign a number to this point.


16-Bit Word Input Value: Enter the word value or copy the data you want to scale.
Input Low Range/Input High Range: Enter the low and high ranges for the input.
Output Low Range/Output High Range: Enter the low and high ranges of the scaled
output.
When you click Apply, the scaled output will be displayed in the Scaled Floating Point
Output field.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 198


Calculations
Discrete Logical OR (Table #46)

Discrete Logical OR (Table #46)

The logical OR function will return as TRUE (1) if any of the inputs are TRUE. It will only return
as FALSE (0) if all inputs are FALSE.

Calculation: Enable the calculation.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
ID: The discrete logical OR table ID.
Number of Inputs/Discrete Inputs #1–#16: Enter the number of inputs to be used in
the calculation, and then connect the input fields to the actual inputs. Note that you do not
have to use all 16 inputs. Empty input fields will be ignored.
Click Apply and Refresh. The result of the function will be displayed in the Discrete Output
field (TRUE = 1, FALSE = 0).

Thermo Fisher Scientific 199


Calculations
Discrete Logical AND (Table #47)

Discrete Logical AND (Table #47)

The logical AND function will return as TRUE (1) only when all inputs are TRUE. If one input is
FALSE, then the output will return as FALSE (0).

Calculation: Select the type of input that will be used. Options are: Hourly Flowrate,
Hourly Energy, Daily Flowrate, Daily Energy, Temperature, Pressure, and DP.
Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
ID: The discrete logical AND table ID.
Number of Inputs/Discrete Inputs #1–#16: Enter the number of inputs to be used in
the calculation, and then connect the input fields to the actual inputs. Note that you do not
have to use all 16 inputs. Empty input fields will be ignored.
Click Apply and Refresh. The result of the function will be displayed in the Discrete Output
field (TRUE = 1, FALSE = 0).

Thermo Fisher Scientific 200


Calculations
Floating Point Summing (Table #48)

Floating Point Summing (Table #48)

This function enables you to add data from multiple floating points.

Calculation: To perform this function, enable it here.


Descriptor: Enter a description of the function.
ID: The floating point summary table ID.
Number of Inputs: Enter the number of inputs you want to add.
Output: After entering the inputs, click Apply and Refresh. The sum will be displayed in
this field.
FP Input section: Copy the inputs you want to add together into the FP Input fields. For
instance, to add the current hour volumes from configured meter runs, copy the Current
Hour Volume field for run #1 into Input #1; copy the Current Hour Volume field for run #2
into Input #2, etc.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 201


Calculations
PLC Program (Table #49)

PLC Program (Table #49)

The Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) allows you to download application programs written
in the PLC language into the RTU. These programs can then be executed by the RTU. From the
General screen, enable the function and a description of the problem. Load the program by
clicking the Load PLC File button.

The PLC uses registers to provide storage for program constants and variables. The instrument
supports up to 32 registers for each PLC program. They are displayed on the Registers page.
The PLC uses the RTU’s internal point numbers to identify data items within the flow
computer. The PLC program can read or write any data item with an internal point number.
This data is displayed on the References page.
Since most data handling/manipulation within the PLC operates on floating point numbers, all
data types (discrete, byte, word, etc.) will be automatically converted to/from floating point
values when read/written by the PLC. For example, reading and loading the PLC accumulator
with a discrete value (which is a single bit value of 0 or 1) will cause a floating point value of
0.0 or 1.0 to be loaded. Writing a floating point value to a discrete data item will cause either
a 0 (if the floating point value is 0.0) or a 1 (if the floating point value is not 0.0).
Note A write to any data item that has audit logging enabled will result in an audit being
generated. Changing the values of some internal data items within the RTU may result in
indeterminate operation.
You can download an example from this page in the help system.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 202


Calculations
Floating Point Copy (Table #50)

Floating Point Copy (Table #50)

This function enables you to copy floating point values (from items in Table #1) to multiple
destinations.

Calculation: To perform this function, enable it here.


Descriptor: Enter a description of the function.
ID: The floating point copy table ID.
Floating Point Source: Copy the Table #1 item into this field.
Destination section: Copy the desired destinations into these fields.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 203


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

Liquid Flow (Table #51)

*AutoEXEC only
The AutoEXEC takes inputs from ultrasonic flow meters and temperature and pressure probes
to perform real-time calculations. The calculations are in accordance to API Chapter 11.1.
Manual of Petroleum Measurement Chapter 11—Physical Properties Data
Section 1—Temperature and Pressure Volume Correction Factors for Generalized
Crude Oils, Refined Products, and Lubricating Oils. Adjunct to: ASTM D 1250-04 and IP
200/04. May 2004.
There are seven pages in AutoCONFIG associated with each liquid flow calculation:
 General: Configure the liquid flow calculation.
 Orifice: If using an orifice meter, set and view orifice parameters. Monthly Volume:
View volume totals.
 Engineering Units / DI/DO: Set the engineering units and connect physical DI and DO
to the fields on this page.
 Flow/Volume: View the current status of various flow and volume parameters.
 History: Set up and view historical data.
 Last Period Data: View the last periodic data.
 Name/Linear Factor: Enable the meter linearization function.
 Last Batch: View data from the previous batch.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 204


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

General Configuration for Liquid Flow Calculation

Configure the liquid flow calculation and enable it from the General page.
Calculation: Enable/disable the liquid flow calculation here.
Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the calculation.
Meter ID: Enter a text string that identifies or names the device associated with the
calculation.
Flow Type: Select whether a turbine or orifice meter is used.
API Table Used: Select the API table to be used for this calculation. Options are listed
below.
 Table 23/24 A
 Table 23/24 B
 Table 24 C
 Old Table 23/24
 Table 23/24 E
 Table 53/54 A
 Table 53/54 B

 Table 54 C
 Old Table 53/54
 Propylene (CH 11.3.3)
 Ethylene (API 2565)
 Ethylene (NBS 1045)
Turbine Pickup: If you selected turbine as the flow type, select a single or dual turbine
meter pickup pulse.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 205


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

SG Override: To use a live API/SG/density input, enter '0' in this field. Otherwise, enter
the API/SG/density override value.
Atmospheric Pressure: Enter the current atmospheric pressure in psi measured at the
installation site.
K-Factor: Enter the meter's K-Factor.
Include HYC Fact: If you selected an API A/B table, enter the glass hydrometer
correction factor. Refer to API Chapter 9 or other appropriate density/hydrometer
standards for further explanation.
Contract Hour: Enter the time of day that the flow computer stores an archive in the
daily historical log and starts a new set of averages and accumulations for a new day.
ASTM 1250 Selection: Select the ASTM standard being used (ASTM1250-1980 or ASTM
1250-2004).
Meter Pulse Hz: This is a read-only field that displays the current meter pulse.
Meter Accumulator Pulse: Connect this field to a live value (typically a #20-Physical
Accumulator entry).
Current Product Index: This field displays the index of the product that is currently
running.
Reference Temperature: Enter the correction temperature used to calculate SG at 60°F
or density at 15°F. The default is to 60.
BS&W % (Water Cut): Enter the volume percentage of BS&W (basic sediments and
water).
Meter Active Threshold Hz: This entry determines when a batch starts. If flowmeter
input (Hz) is greater than this value, a batch will start.
Pulse Deviation Threshold: This field is available if you selected a dual turbine meter
pickup pulse. If pulse frequency exceeds this value, the system will begin comparing and
totalizing error counts.
Density Type: If measuring density, select the type. Options are listed below.
 None
 4–20 mA: If you select 4–20 mA as the density type, choose the input type
(SG, API, Density) in the Density Input Select field.

 Density Calc #1–#6: Select one of these options if you are using a
densitometer and have configured a density calculation.
Density Input Select: Select the density input type. Options are: SG, API, density.
Static Pressure: Enter the current line pressure measured on the pipe, or connect this
field to a live value (typically a #16-Physical Analog Input entry).
Temperature: Enter the temperature of the fluid, or connect this field to a live value
(typically a #16-Physical Analog Input entry).
Reference Density: If you selected ethylene or propylene as the API table being used,
enter density value used to calculate net flow rate.
Alpha T (E-6): If you selected a table C as the API table being used, enter the thermal
expansion coefficient.
Error Pulse Hz: If you selected a dual turbine meter pickup pulse, this field displays the
current error pulse.
Error Accumulator Pulse: If you selected a dual turbine meter pickup pulse, connect this
field to a live value (typically a #20-Physical Accumulator entry).

Thermo Fisher Scientific 206


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

Density Temperature Selection: Select whether the meter temperature or density


temperature is being used.
Density Pressure Selection: Select whether the meter pressure or density pressure is
being used.
Density Temperature: Enter the density temperature.
Density Pressure: Enter the density pressure.
Month Start Day: Enter the day of the month which starts a new contract month.
Error Count Limit: If any unbalance exists in the two pulse trains and the error counts
exceed this threshold, the AutoEXEC will issue an alarm. The error counts will be cleared
at the end of a batch.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 207


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

Orifice Parameters for Liquid Flow Calculation Table

If you selected Orifice as the flow type on the general configuration page, provide the orifice
parameters for the calculation here.

Orifice Calc Method: Select the orifice calculation method. Options are: AGA 3 -1985 and
API 14.3 - 1992.
Include Y Factor: Select whether to include the Y factor (expansion factor) in the orifice
calculations.
Pipe Diameter: Enter the internal diameter of the pipe at reference conditions.
Orifice Diameter: Enter the internal diameter of the orifice at reference conditions.
Pipe Thermal Coefficient: Enter the pipe thermal coefficient, which is used to correct
the diameter for thermal expansion.
DP Selection: Select single, dual or triple DP input.
Mid DP Switch: If the Low DP is less than the value entered here, then Low DP will be
used to calculate flow rate.
High DP Switch: If the Mid DP is less than the value entered here, then Mid DP will use
to calculate flow rate.
Orifice Thermal Coefficient: Enter the coefficient used to correct the diameter for
thermal expansion.
Pipe Temperature: Enter the reference pipe temperature used to correct the diameter
for thermal expansion.
Orifice Temperature: Enter the reference orifice temperature used to correct the
diameter for thermal expansion.
DP Zero Offset: If the input DP value is below this value, the flow computer will assume
the flow rate is zero.
Low DP: If you selected a dual or triple DP, this value indicates the first DP readout.
Mid DP: If you selected triple DP, this value indicates the second DP readout.
High DP: If you selected dual DP, this value indicates second DP readout. If you selected
triple DP, this value indicates the third DP readout.
Y: The expansion factor.
CD: The orifice coefficient.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 208


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

FMP: The mass flow factor.


FIP: The iteration flow factor pressure dependent factor.
EV: The velocity of approach.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 209


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

Monthly Volume Report for Liquid Flow Calculations

Access this page to view totals for the current and previous months. Click the Print Monthly
Report button to generate a hard copy of the report.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 210


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

Setting Engineering Units and DI/DO for Liquid Flow Calculations

Access this page to set the engineering units used for liquid flow calculations.

Density: gm/cc, lb/bbl, lb/cf, kg/m3.


Atmospheric Pressure: psi, bar, mbar, Pascal, kPa, mPa, kg/cm2, mmHg, inH2O.
Static Pressure: psig, bar, mbar, Pascal, kPa, mPa, kg/cm2, mmHg, inH2O.
Temperature: °F, °C.
Pipe/Orifice: inch, ft, mm, cm, m.
Differential Pressure: inH2O, mbar, kPa, kg/cm2.
Gross: bbl/hr, gal/hr, m3/hr.
Net: bbl/hr, gal/hr, m3/hr.
Mass: lb/hr,klb/hr, kg/hr.
K Factor: pulse/bbl, pulse/m3, pulse/gal.
You can also connect digital outputs and inputs to the fields on this page. A value of 0 is clear,
and a value of 1 is set.
Digital Out Batch Preset: Connect a digital output for the batch preset value. When the
batch size reaches the preset total, the digital output will provide external
annunciation/control.
Digital Out Batch Warning: Connect a digital output for the batch warning size. The
digital output will indicate when a batch has reached the warning size.
Digital Out Batch Ended: Connect a digital output to indicate when the batch has ended.
Digital Out Channel A Fail: Connect a digital output to indicate if channel A fails.
Digital Out Channel B Fail: Connect a digital output to indicate if channel B fails.
Digital Out Channel AB Fail: Connect a digital output to indicate if both channels A and
B fail.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 211


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

Digital Out Channel A Missing Pulse: Connect a digital output to indicate a missing
pulse on channel A.
Digital Out Channel A Added Pulse: Connect a digital output to indicate an added pulse
on channel A.
Digital Out Channel B Missing Pulse: Connect a digital output to indicate a missing
pulse on channel B.
Digital Out Channel B Added Pulse: Connect a digital output to indicate an added pulse
on channel B.
Digital In End Batch: By connecting this field to a digital input (typically a switch), you
can force an end to the current batch.
Digital In Status Print: Force a report to be printed by connecting this field to a digital
input (typically a switch).
Print Snapshot Report button: Print a snapshot report of all configured liquid flow runs.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 212


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

Flow/Volume Data for Liquid Flow Calculations

This page displays the current status of various flow and volume parameters.

Batch Start Date/Time: The starting date and time of the current batch.
Flow Status: This field displays Flowing or Not Flowing.
Gross Flow Rate: The current calculated gross flow rate.
Net Flow Rate: The current calculated net flow rate.
Mass Flow Rate: The current calculated mass flow rate.
Batch Gross Total: The current batch gross total.
Batch Net Total: The current batch net total.
Batch Mass Total: The current batch mass total.
Daily Gross Total: The current calculated gross volume.
Daily Net Total: The current calculated net volume.
Daily Mass Total: The current calculated mass.
Cumulative Gross Total: The gross total which will be rolled over at 1,000,000 bbl.
Cumulative Net Total: The net total which will be rolled over at 1,000,000 bbl.
Cumulative Mass Total: The mass total which will be rolled over at 1,000,000 KLb.
Uncorrected Density: The actual uncorrected density.
Temperature: The line temperature as measured by a temperature probe inside of pipe
line.
Pressure: The line pressure measured on the pipe.
VCF: The volume correction factor.
CPL: The pressure dependency volume correction factor.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 213


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

SG: The specific gravity of the product currently flowing in the system
SG at 60: The SG at 60°F.
Density: The current calculated density.
FWA VCF: The flow weighted average VCF.
FWA CPL: The flow weighted average CPL.
FWA Temperature: The flow weighted average temperature.
FWA Pressure: The flow weighted average pressure.
FWA SG: The flow weighted average SG.
FWA Density: The flow weighted average density.
FWA SG at 60: The flow weighted average SG at 60°F.
FWA Meter Factor: The flow weighted average meter factor.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 214


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

History

Setup

The Setting tab allows you to set up historical data. Once you complete this page, click Apply.
Click the Data tab to generate and view historical data.

Contract Hour: Enter the time of day that the flow computer stores an archive in the
daily historical log and starts a new set of averages and accumulations for a new day.
Audit Register Offset: This value is used to generate Modbus registers that are logged in
the event trail. As an example, assign an offset of 12801 to run #1 and 12901 to run #2.
If you change the API table for run #1, the unit will log 12806. If you change the API table
for run #2, the unit will log 12906. The index value of 6 corresponds to the API table
selection item in Table #51 (liquid turbine flow calculation). If the atmospheric pressure of
run #1 changes, the unit will log 12807 because the index value of 7 corresponds to the
atmospheric pressure item in Table #51.
These fields are preset and should not be changed: Batch Data Block Index,
Prover Run Block Index, Prover Result Block Index, Periodic Data Block Index,
Daily Data Block Index, Audit/Alarm Data Block Index.
Periodic Time Period: The default time period to stop logging meter run historical data
and begin a new historical log entry is one hour. This field allows you to set a different log
interval.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 215


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

Viewing Historical Data for Liquid Flow Calculations

From the Data page, you can select whether you want hourly, periodic, batch, or prover data.
Click the Retrieve Data button. The software displays the data in three tabs (history, audits,
alarms). A sample for a differential pressure flow calculation is shown below.

You can now generate a report by clicking the Generate Report button. This function saves the
report data (.hst file) on the PC so that you can view it or print it at a later time (go to Viewing
Reports topic page).

Thermo Fisher Scientific 216


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

Last Periodic Data for Liquid Flow Calculations

This screen displays data from the last period.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 217


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

Linear Factor Setup for Liquid Flow Calculations

If you enable the meter linearization function, enter up to ten flowmeter pulse frequencies (in
Hz) and their corresponding linearization factors. Each frequency must be greater than the
previous frequency.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 218


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

Batch Info for Liquid Flow Calculations

Configure batch settings on this page.

End Batch: If a manual batch is running, use this control to stop the batching function.
Batch Type: Select the batch mode of operation. Options are listed below.
 Manual: In this mode of operation, you start and stop batches manually. Use
the End Batch control to stop the batching function.
 Daily: In this mode of operation, the programmed contract hour defines the
start and stop times for a batch. Once the batch is set up for daily operation,
the batch starts immediately and automatically closes at the defined contract
hour. A new batch then begins and lasts for 24 hours. Batching continues until
you turn off daily batch control.

 Preset Volume: If you select Preset Volume, the Preset Volume Batch field
becomes available. Enter the expected batch size based on the gross standard
volume, net standard volume, or mass total (selected in the Batch Volume
Selection field).
Preset Volume Batch: If you selected Preset Volume as the batch type, enter the
expected batch size. The batch will end when the volume reaches this value.
Change to Product Index: Select a new product index to end the current running batch
and start a new batch.
Current block
Next Product ID: Select the product index that will be used to start the next batch after
the current batch has ended.
Batch Volume Selection: If you configured the batch mode as Preset Volume (in the
Batch Type field), select the type of volume (gross standard volume, net standard volume,
or mass total).
Next Batch Preset: This is the batch preset counter. At the start of a new batch, the
counter will start to count down. When the counter reaches zero or goes below zero, the
AutoEXEC will cause the assigned relay output to conduct.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 219


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

Next Batch Preset Warning: Thisis the batch preset warning counter. At the start ofa
new batch, the counter will start to count down. When the counter reaches zero or goes
below zero, the AutoEXEC will cause the assigned relay output to conduct.
Stack Batch block
When this section is configured, all the batch information will shift to the next stack up.
For example, at the end of the current batch, the batch info in stack 1 will move to the
Current window, and all the other stacks will shift up (stack 2 to stack 1, stack 3 to stack
2, etc.).

Thermo Fisher Scientific 220


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

Last Batch Data for Liquid Flow Calculations

This page displays data from the previous batch. If you would like to generate and print a
report, click the Print Batch Report button.

Batch Start Date/Time: The starting date and time of the previous batch.
Batch End Date/Time: The ending date and time of the previous batch.
Batch Number: The batch number assigned by the software (increases by one at the end
of each batch).
Opening Gross Total/Net Total/Mass Total: The gross, net, and mass values at the
beginning of the batch.
Batch Gross Total/Net Total/Mass Total: The batch's current gross, net, and mass
totals.
Closing Gross Total/Net Total/Mass Total: The gross, net, and mass totals at the end
of the batch.
Recalculate Batch/Ticket BS&W Percent/Ticket Gravity Override: If you want to
generate a ticket report, select Yes. Then enter the Ticket BS&W Percent and Ticket
Gravity Override values to use for calculation of the ticket gross volume and ticket net
volume.
FWA VCF: The flow weight average volume correction factor.
FWA CPL: The flow weighted average pressure dependency volume correction factor.
FWA Temperature: The flow weighted average temperature.
FWA Pressure: The flow weighted average pressure.
FWA SG: The flow weighted average specific gravity.
FWA Density: The flow weighted average density.
FWA SG at 60: The flow weighted average SG at 60°F.
FWA Meter Factor: The flow weighted average meter factor.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 221


Calculations
Liquid Flow (Table #51)

Ticket Gross Volume/Ticket Net Volume: If you are generating a ticket report and the
software has recalculated the batch, the calculated ticket gross volume and net volume
will be displayed in these fields.
FWA Density Correction Factor: The flow weighted averaged density correction factor.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 222


Calculations
Proving (Table #53)

Proving (Table #53)

*AutoEXEC only
Standard turbine meters that generate a pulse train and integrate flow are generally proved
through one of the following methods:
 Unidirectional prover (single run and preset volume)
 Bidirectional prover (forward and reverse runs for set preset volume)
 Master meter prover (operator controlled preset volume via start/stop inputs)
 Compact prover (small volume, single run prover with dual chronometry and critical
timing)
With each method, the pulse train from the flowmeter is gated with start and stop signals to
provide a count for a calibrated volume passing through the meter. For a turbine, the pulse
rate is considered real time, so that the flow seen between the start and stop signals is truly
represented by the pulses counted during the gating period.
In cases where the calibrated volume is small and the frequency from the turbine is low, dual
chronometry (pulse interpolation) is used to adjust the pulse count to indicate fractions of
pulses seen between the gating periods.
With an ultrasonic flowmeter, the device provides a flow rate which, due to firing sequences
and associated calculations, is always lagging the real-time flow.
When proving using a traditional third party prover computer, the indicated volume during the
gating period signaled by the start/stop signals will not necessarily be the volume indicated by
the meter. The only way this would be the case is if the flow rate does not change at both the
start and end of a proving run. Since the flow rate may fluctuate during the run, it is
necessary to determine a delay that can be added to the start and stop signals to synchronize
the signals to the true volume indicated by the meter.
For further discussion on proving systems, reference API 4.2, 4.5, 4.6, and 4.8.
Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards Chapter 4—Proving Systems
Section 2—Pipe Provers. 2nd Ed., March 2001
Section 5—Master-Meter Provers. 2nd Ed., May 2000
Section 6—Pulse Interpolation. 2nd Ed., May 1999
Section 8—Operation of Proving Systems. 1st Ed., November 1995
There are four pages in AutoCONFIG associated with the proving function:
 General: Set basic prover parameters.
 I/O Status: View the status of the prover I/O.
 Prover Results: View results of the last proving run.
 Single Prover: View results of last proving run if the proving run was a single/trial
prover.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 223


Calculations
Proving (Table #53)

General Configuration for Prover Calculation Table

Set basic prover parameters on the General page.

Prover Calculation: Enable or disable the calculation here.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
ID: Enter a text string that identifies or names the calculation.
Prover SG Override: Enter a positive prover density that will be used as the density
override value for the current running product. Alternatively, you can use a live flowing
density input.
Prover Type: Select the type prover used for this application. Options are listed below.

 Compact: Small volume, single run prover with double chronometry and
critical timing.
 Pipe: Unidirectional or bidirectional pipe prover.
 Master: Operator controlled preset volume via start/stop inputs.
Prover Volume Type: Select gross or mass type volume.
Single/Trial Prover: If you select Yes, a single proving run will be started. If you select
No, a complete proving sequence will be started.
Uni/Bi Directional: If you are using a pipe prover, select whether it is unidirectional or
bidirectional.

 Unidirectional: Single run, preset volume.


 Bidirectional: Forward and reverse runs, preset volume.
Ambient Temperature: If using a compact prover, enter the ambient temperature of the
Invar rod.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 224


Calculations
Proving (Table #53)

Start/Stop Prover: Initiate/stop the proving sequence by selecting the index number
(liquid flow run) to be proved.
Base Temperature: Enter the temperature used to calculate the correction factor for the
temperature of the liquid in the prover (CTLP). This field applies to compact provers only.
Thermal Coefficient of Invar Rod: If using a compact prover, enter the expansion
coefficient of the Invar rod.
Base Pressure: Enter the pressure used to calculate the correction factor for the pressure
of the liquid in the prover (CPLP). This field applies to compact provers only.
Thermal Coefficient of Prover: If using a compact prover, enter the expansion
coefficient of the prover.
Average Run Number: Enter the number of proving runs to average (from 1 to 6 runs).
Piston Up Signal Polarity: If using a compact prover, select what the input signal state
should be when the piston is upstream and ready to launch (high or low).
Total Run Number: Enter the total number of consecutive good runs required.
Run Signal Maintained: If using a compact prover,select what the state of the prover
drive output signal should be to start a run (on or off).
Prover Abort Second: Enter the maximum time in seconds allowed for the system to
complete a proving run before timing out.
% Pre-Travel Volume: A launch delay is used to allow the prover ball to come to a
complete stop after passing the second detector switch. The time to pass through the pre-
travel distance varies with flow rate, and the launch delay time is proportional to the flow
rate. Enter the pre-travel volume as a percentage of the water draw volume. The
AutoEXEC will calculate the launch delay time depending on the flow rate and the
percentage rate.
Prover Diameter: If using a compact or pipe prover, enter the internal diameter of the
prover.
Prover Volume: Enter the calibrated reference volume of the prover.
Coefficient of Cubic Expansion: Ifusing a pipe prover, enter the prover coefficient of
cubic expansion. This value is used to calculate temperature correction factor for steel in
the prover (CTSP).
Prover Wall Thickness: If using a compact or pipe prover, enter the wall thickness of the
prover.
Allow Prover Temperature Change (Seconds): Before starting a proving run, the
AutoEXEC monitors the temperature at the prover. The temperature must not change
more than the amount entered here during the sample period.
Pulse Deviation %: The prover will attempt to obtain a satisfactory prove by obtaining a
preset number of consecutive runs on which the prove pulses repeat within the limit set
here. If this cannot be accomplished within the number of runs allowed, the prove
sequence will be aborted.
Allow Prover Temperature Change (Degrees): Enter in degrees how much the
temperature can change during the proving run from the initial prover temperature.
P/M Temp Deviation Degrees: Enter the allowable difference in degrees between the
pipe and meter temperatures.
Master Meter K Factor: If using a master prover, enter the meter K Factor.
Meter Factor Final Deviation %: The final deviation percentage of the meter factor.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 225


Calculations
Proving (Table #53)

Prover Temperature: The unit allows for a temperature input from the prover. Enter the
value here. If you do not, the temperature must be taken from the meter. See Use Meter
Temperature.
Modulus of Elasticity: The Modulus of Elasticity is used to calculate the pressure
correction factor for steel in the prover (CPSP).
Use Meter Temperature: If you did not enter the prover temperature, select Yes here,
and the temperature will be taken from the meter run.
Prover Pressure: The unit allows for a pressure input from the prover. Enter the value
here. If you do not, the pressure must be taken from the meter. See User Meter
Pressure.
Prover Temperature Unit: Set the temperature engineering unit (°F or °C).
Use Meter Pressure: If you did not enter the prover pressure, select Yes here, and the
pressure will be taken from the meter run.
Auto Implement Meter Factor: Select whether the system should automatically
implement the new meter factor.
If you enable automatic implementation of the meter factor, the new calculated meter
factor is automatically accepted and replaces the current meter factor. This occurs
without any user intervention.
If you disable auto implementation, you have the option to accept or reject the new
meter factor once the proving sequence is complete.
Prover Volume Unit: Set the engineering unit for prover volume. Options are listed
below.

 BBL: barrels
 GAL: gallons
 M3: cubic meters
Prover Diameter Unit: Set the engineering unit for the prover diameter (inches or
centimeters).

Thermo Fisher Scientific 226


Calculations
Proving (Table #53)

I/O Status for Prover Calculation

This page displays the status of the prover I/O.

Prover Index: The prover index used in the current proving sequence.
Prover State: Where in the proving sequence the prover currently is. Displays include:
Prove Initialize, Check Temperature, Prove Launch, Prove Run, and Check Piston.
Run Number: The run number being proved.
Number of Good Runs: The number of good runs in this proving sequence.
Prover Pulse In: If this field displays Yes, the START detect switch was detected by the
software. If No is displayed, the STOP detect switch was detected or proving was not
required.
Prover Status: The status, or outcome, of the step shown in Prover State field. Displays
include: Prove Complete, Prove Request, Prove Run, Temperature Unstable, Abort In
Progress, Abort Timeout, Prover and Meter Temperature, Abort Not Ready, Abort Request,
Abort Total Runs, Abort End Batch, Piston Up, Piston Down (compact prover only), and
Prove Run Reverse.
Prover Pulse: Connect this field to a pulse input (Table #20).
Digital Output block
Connect the fields in this section to discrete outputs (Table #22) configured for this
calculation.
Digital Input block
Connect the fields in this section to a discrete input (Table #19) configured for this
calculation.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 227


Calculations
Proving (Table #53)

Results for Prover Calculations

This screen shows the results of the last proving run.

Prover Date/Time: The date and time of the proving run.


Prover Meter Number: The meter run which was proved.
Automatic Meter Factor: The meter factor.
Correction Meter Volume: The volume corrected by the meter temperature and
pressure during the proving run.
Master Average Pulses: The accumulated pulses for the master meter.
Gross Total Last Prover: The gross total of the last proving run.
Temperature/Pressure/Density/Gross Flow Rate/Meter Factor at Previous Meter
Factor: Values associated with the previous meter factor.
Run Number: The proving run number.
Pass #1/#2 Pulses: The number of pulses per pass.
Interpolated Pulses: The result of the interpolation between the pass #1 and pass #2
pulses.
Temperature: The temperature at the time of the proving run.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 228


Calculations
Proving (Table #53)

TDVOL: The totalized volume.


Gross Flow Rate: The gross flow rate at the time of the proving run.
Meter Temperature: The meter temperature at the time of the proving run.
Prover Temperature: The prover temperature.
Prover Pressure: Theprover pressure.
Density: The prover density.
Prover Volume: The gross volume of the prover.
Prover Temperature Correction CTSP: The temperature correction factor for steel in
the prover.
Prover Pressure Correction CPSP: The pressure correction factor for steel in the
prover.
Correction Factor CTLP: The temperature correction factor for fluid in the prover.
Correction Factor CPLP: The pressure correction factor for fluid in the prover.
Correction Prover Volume: The correction prover volume.
K Factor: The K Factor.
Gross Meter Volume: The gross meter volume.
Correction Factor CTLM: The temperature correction factor for liquid at the meter.
Correction Factor CPLM: The pressure correction factor for liquid at the meter.
Prove Meter Factor: The new meter factor.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 229


Calculations
Proving (Table #53)

Single/Trial Prover Data

Results of a proving run are only displayed on this page if the proving run was a single/trial
prover.

Single Run Forward Pulse: The number of pulses during the forward run.
Single Run Total Pulse: The total number of pulses for the complete run (forward and
reverse for bidirectional prover).
Single Run Interpolated Pulse: The result of interpolating the forward and total pulses.
Single Run Tfmp: The time elapsed to count the whole pulse (from the start pulse signal
to the stop pulse signal).
Single Run Tdvol: The time elapsed for the piston to travel between switches.
Single Run FWA Meter Temperature: The flow weighted average temperature of the
meter.
Single Run FWA Meter Pressure: The flow weighted average pressure of the meter.
Single Run FWA Prover Temperature: The flow weighted average temperature of the
prover.
Single Run FWA Prover Pressure: The flow weighted average pressure of the prover.
Single Run FWA SG60: The flow weighted average SG at 60°F.
Single Run FWA Flow Rate: The flow weighted average flow rate.
Single Run Meter Number: The meter run number.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 230


Density Calculation (Table #56)

*AutoEXEC only
The AutoEXEC can use the input from a density meter and perform real-time conversion calculations.
The calculations are in accordance to API Chapter 11.1.
Manual of Petroleum Measurement Chapter 11—Physical Properties Data
Section 1—Temperature and Pressure Volume Correction Factors for Generalized Crude Oils,
Refined Products, and Lubricating Oils. Adjunct to: ASTM D 1250-04 and IP 200/04. May 2004.

Calculation: Enable the calculation here.


Densitometer ID: The liquid density calculation table ID.
Period (microseconds): The value converted from the density frequency to calculate density.
Density Pressure: Enter the density pressure.
Descriptor: Use this field to enter a description of this density meter.
Densitometer Type: Select the type of density meter being used. Options are: Sarasota, UGC,
and Solartron.
Density Temperature: Enter the density temperature.
Density Frequency: Enter the density frequency.
Calculated Density: Once you enter the density parameters and click Apply, the software will
calculate and display the density.
Sarasota Density/UGC Density/Solartron Density block: Enter the calibration constants for
the density meter you selected.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 231


Calculations
Station Control (Table #57)

Station Control (Table #57)

The Station Control function is for future development.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 232


Calculations
Multiplexer (Table #59)

Multiplexer (Table #59)

This table allows you to connect two inputs (A and B) to a function and view one of those inputs at a
time. Paste the desired input points into the Input A and Input B fields. Click the Apply button. Then
select input A or B, click the Apply and Refresh buttons, and that input is displayed in the Output field.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 233


Calculations
Sampler Accumulator (Table #60)

Sampler Accumulator (Table #60)

When the system includes a gas sampler or injection unit, you can use Table #60 to set up a discrete
output to activate when a set volume or value has been reached. When this volume or value is
reached, the internal accumulator is reduced by the sampler value and begins accumulating again.
Note Because this function produces a pulse that is proportional to the flow, it is possible to use it as
a flow indication to a secondary device.

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation here.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
Select ID: The sampler accumulator table ID.
Mode: Choose whether the input is an accumulator type or rate type.
Scale Factor: The scale factor is used to scale the inputs to a desired value.
Total Accumulator: The current totalized values of all inputs related to this function (rollover at
1,000,000).
Sampler Output: Enable/disable the generation of the output pulse to the defined output point.
Setpoint: If you have enabled the sampler output, enter the value that the totalizer must reach to
generate the output pulse.
Pulse Discrete Output: Set the output point to which the output pulse will be sent.
Sampler Rollover Value: Enter the value at which the totalized accumulator value rolls over to
zero. In most cases, this value is 1,000,000 in the RTU. A few liquid values roll over at
10,000,000.
Process Variables: The actual input values being totalized.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 234


Calculations
Scheduled Copy Table (Table #61)

Scheduled Copy Table (Table #61)

The Scheduled Copy function gives you the ability to copy floating point data at a specified time to a
specified destination. If you have not done so, first set up the floating point values you want to copy
using Table #1.

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation here.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
ID: The scheduled copy table ID.
Mode: Select how the unit should copy the data. Options are listed below

 Manual: Force the unit to perform the copy.


 Every Hour: The unit will copy the data every hour.
 Every Data at Specified Hour: The unit will copy the data daily at the hour specified. If
selected, set the hour in the Copy Hour field.
 At Date/Time: The unit will copy the data once at a specified date and time. If selected,
set the one-time copy date and time in the Copy Date and Copy Time fields.

Force Copy: Change the selection to Force Copy to cause the unit to copy the data.
Copy Hour: If you selected the Every Day at Specified Hour mode, set the hour at which the unit
should perform the copy in this field.
Copy Date/Time: If you selected the At Date/Time mode, set the date and time in these fields
that the unit should perform the one-time copy.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 235


Calculations
Scheduled Copy Table (Table #61)

Process Variables: Items in Table #1 are the points that will be copied. If you have not done so
already, set up the floating point values, and copy those items into the Source Point # fields. Then
copy the actual destinations into the Destination Point # fields.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 236


Calculations
Nomination Control (Table #62)

Nomination Control (Table #62)

The nomination control is used to schedule a PID setpoint change or accumulation monitoring to
control the amount of gas (or product) that is supplied during the period specified. For example, if
each day you want to provide a volume of gas to a customer at a specified rate, you can use this
function to set the PID control setpoint for the desired rate, and use the accumulation monitoring
function to determine when that volume was met.
For example, you want to provide 250 MMcf of product to a customer at 15 MMcf/hour, and the
contract time starts at 8 AM. You would select Every Day at Specified Hour as the mode and enter 8
AM in the Start Hour field.
At 8 AM, the nomination control function will copy the Next PID Setpoint value to the PID Setpoint
(Destination) field. The function will also copy the Next Accumulation Setpoint value to the
Accumulation Setpoint field. The PID Control (Table #33) will maintain the desired flow rate.

Calculation: Enable/disable the nomination control function.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
ID: The nomination control table ID.
Mode: Select the function start mode. Options are listed below.

 Manual: Nomination information is only transferred when the Manual Start discrete is
set.

 Every Hour: Nomination information is transferred at the start of every hour.


 Every Day at Specific Hour: Nomination information is transferred every day at the
hour specified in the Start Hour field.
 At Date/Time: Nomination information is transferred at the date and time specified in
the Start Date/Time fields.

Next PID Setpoint: When a nomination transfer is initiated, this value is copied to the PID
Setpoint (Destination) field. This field will usually reference the Setpoint field of a PID.
Next Accumulator Setpoint: When a nomination transfer is initiated, this value is copied to the
Accumulation Setpoint field.
PID Setpoint (Destination): Connect this field to the Setpoint field of a PID.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 237


Calculations
Nomination Control (Table #62)

Set Point Load Output: This point connects to the associated PID’s remote setpoint load trigger.
Once the nominations total has been achieved, the setpoint load is triggered and the associated
PID loads the new target volume (next PID setpoint). You can load the setpoint manually by
selecting Load SP and clicking Apply.
Disable on Startup: If the PID starts to control the valve when the unit is first loaded, it can
cause injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment. Selecting Yes to disable on startup,
prevents the PID from trying to control the valve.
Manual Start: Manually force the transfer of nomination data.
Start Hour: Ifyou selected Every Hour as the Mode, enter the hour at which you want the
function to start.
Start Date/Time: If you selected Every Day at Specific Hour as the Mode, enter the date and
time at which you want the function to start.
Accumulation Monitoring: Enable/disable the accumulation monitoring function of the
nomination control.
Accumulation Setpoint: The current accumulation setpoint value.
Accumulation Input: This field is typically connected to an accumulation value, such as station
accumulated volume or meter accumulated volume. This value is compared to the Accumulation
Setpoint value to determine when the nominated accumulation has been met.
Total Accumulation: This is the running total of the volume that has been measured through the
nomination function. Once this running value matches the accumulation setpoint the output
activates, the new setpoint and accumulation are loaded, and the process starts over from the
Start hour, date, or time.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 238


Calculations
Remote Control Valve (Table #63)

Remote Control Valve (Table #63)

The remote control valve function is still under development. Upon completion, it will provide an
advanced means of controlling the opening and closing of valves. To avoid accidental control of valves,
security levels are provided and an arm-and-execute sequence must be performed.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 239


Calculations
Radio Scheduling Table (Table #64)

Radio Scheduling Table (Table #64)

In remote applications, keeping communication devices such as a radio constantly powered may
reduce the available power and autonomy of the power system. The flow computer has a radio
scheduling function to increase the autonomy of the power system by turning on the radio during
scheduled polling intervals and turning it off for the rest of the time.

Calculation: Select Enable to turn on the radio scheduling function.


Descriptor: This is the text description from Table 15.
ID: The numerical ID for host systems.
*Start Time and Stop Time: Enter the beginning and ending times for the polling period. Use
24-hour format (HH:MM) for the entries. For example, if polling period is from 5:00 AM to 7:00
PM, enter the start time as 05:00 and the stop time as 19:00.
*Sampling Time: Enter how often the radio should be turned on for sampling, for example,
every 10 seconds.
*Sample Width: Enter the length of time the radio should be turned on for sampling.
*Frequency: Enter how often the unit is to turn the communication device on between the
start and stop time. For example, if the system is polled every hour, enter 01:00.
*Duration: Enter the length of time that the communication device should be turned on. Note
that configuring Start Time as 00:00, Stop Time as 24:00, Frequency as 01:00, and Duration as
01:00, the result is continuous operation.
Battery Voltage: This is the connection point of the system battery voltage.
Radio Shutdown Voltage: If the unit power source is below the specified voltage, the
communication device is prevented from being turned on by the radio scheduling feature. This
value should be less than the unit low battery alarm value.
Comm Port Data Block Index: This is the communications port that is to be controlled (Host,
expansion 1 etc).
Radio Force On: This connection point, if active, forces the radio to turn on immediately (i.e.
callout).
Radio Activation Point: This is the discrete output point that actually controls the radio power
(a relay, etc.).
*These parameters are illustrated in the figure below.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 240


Calculations
Radio Scheduling Table (Table #64)

Thermo Fisher Scientific 241


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Plunger Lift (Table #65)

*AutoPILOT PRO only


The flow plunger function consists of eight types of plunger lift methods. A short explanation of each
method follows. For in-depth descriptions, refer to the method's sequence of events and/or function
and configuration files. Each method logs extensive history information, enabling the operator to make
informed decisions when adjusting the various method's parameters.
There are three primary methods:
 Original method
 Timer method
 Manual method
Five secondary methods are derived from the three primary methods:
 No Pit method
 Timer No Pit method
 Load Factor method
 Intermittent method
 Gas Lift method

Thermo Fisher Scientific 242


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Original Method

This method uses a calculated load factor compared to the preset load factor to determine when to
open the sales valve and a calculated Turner rate compared to the AGA flow rate to determine when
to close the sales valve. The load ratio and Turner rate are adjusted based on plunger lift arrival
times. These arrival times are defined by the preset early, fast, flow, and late arrival regions.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 243


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Configuration

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation.


Descriptor: Enter a description of the function or device associated with this calculation.
ID: The flow plunger table ID.
Force to Default: Set all values to factory defaults by clicking in the check box and then clicking
the Apply button.
Flow Control Method: Select Original.
Control Command: Select the function to be performed. Options are listed below.
 Abort: Terminate the plunger lift cycle.
 Start: Begin the plunger lift cycle.
 Pause: Suspend the cycle at its current state.
 Resume: Resume the suspended cycle.

 Reset: Reset counters displayed on the Plunger Summary screen.


 Open Pit: Manually open the pit valve.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 244


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

 Close Pit: Manually close the pit valve.


 Open Sales: Manually open the sales valve.
 Close Sales: Manually close the sales valve.
 Out Off Time: Stop the off time countdown and begin looking for the proper conditions
to open the valve.

 Out After Time: Terminate the after flow time countdown and begin a new cycle.
 Force to Off Time: Begin a new cycle at the off time point of the plunger lift algorithm.
 Force to On Time: Begin a new cycle at the on time point of the algorithm. This
command is useful if you do not want to wait for the off time countdown to expire and
you know that the sales valve can be opened immediately.
 Force to Late Time: Begin a new cycle at the late time point of the algorithm. This
command is useful if you need to open the pit valve in order to get the plunger up.
Also, if the After Flow on Late Arrival function is enabled, the algorithm will proceed to
the after flow point once the plunger arrives.
TRM: Initially, enter 1 as the TRM and adjust as necessary.
The program calculates an unloading rate using various pressures, a compressibility factor (Z),
temperature, and tubing diameter. After calculating the unloading rate, the TRM value is
applied to the unloading rate to determine a shut-in rate. When the actual rate falls below the
shut-in rate, the after flow phase ends, the run is shut-in, and a new cycle begins. As TRM
decreases, the shut-in rate also decreases, allowing the well to flow longer during after flow.
As TRM increases, the shut-in rate increases, decreasing after flow.
The TRM value increases and decreases as early, fast, late, slow, and no arrival plunger
arrivals occur. The value does not change for a normal plunger arrival condition. The trial and
error method is typically the best way to determine adjustments and boundaries for the TRM.
Adjustments to the value are made in the TRM Increment and TRM Decrement fields.
Boundaries to the value are set in the Maximum TRM and Minimum TRM fields.
TRM Increment: When a slow, late, or no arrival occurs, the software will increase the TRM by
this value, essentially decreasing after flow time. A typical initial setting is 0.3. For example, TRM
is running at 0.8. TRM Increment is set at 0.25. A slow, late, or no arrival occurs. TRM will
increase to 1.05.
TRM Decrement: When a fast or early arrival occurs, the software will decrease the TRM by this
value, essentially increasing after flow time. A typical initial setting is 0.05. For example, TRM is
running at 0.8. TRM Decrement is at 0.05, and a fast arrival occurs. TRM will decrease to 0.75.
Maximum TRM: Enter the setting that TRM cannot exceed (essentially a minimum after flow
value). If maximum TRM is set too high and TRM increment contains a large value, the well can
cycle too fast and not produce as effectively as possible. For good wells, the value may be set to
above 1.2. For most other wells, begin with 1.2 and adjust as necessary.
Minimum TRM: Enter the setting that TRM cannot fall below (essentially a maximum after flow
value). If minimum TRM is set too low and TRM decrement contains a large value, the well may
load up. For good wells, the value may be set below 0.5. For most other wells, begin with 0.5 and
adjust as necessary.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 245


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Load Factor: This is typically set to 0.5.


This value is compared against the load ratio after minimum off time expires. A well with a
load ratio less than 0.5 should be sufficient to lift the plunger to the surface. However, if the
load factor is set too high (1.0), the sales valve will always open as soon as the minimum off
time expires. If the load factor is set too low (0.1), the load ratio will rarely open the sales
valve, and off time will be extended to the point where only very fast arrivals occur, possibly
resulting in damage to surface equipment or personnel.
If a system has the casing pressure disabled (tubing assist only), the load factor and load ratio
become the difference of the tubing and line pressures (tubing pressure-line pressure). This
value then becomes the number of pounds above line pressure that the tubing pressure must
be in order to open the sales valve.
Increment Load: When a slow, late, or no arrival occurs, the software will increase the load
factor by this amount during the off-time phase of the next cycle, essentially increasing shut-in
time.
Decrement Load: When a fast or early arrival occurs, the software will decrease the load factor
by this amount during the off-time phase of the next cycle, essentially decreasing shut-in time.
Minimum Load: Enter the setting that the load factor cannot fall below (essentially a minimum
shut-in time). If this entry is set too low, it is possible that the well will not have enough pressure
built up to bring the plunger and its fluid load up.
Maximum Load: Enter the setting that the load factor cannot exceed (essentially a maximum
shut-in time). If this entry is set too high and increment load contains a large value, the well can
cycle too slowly and not produce effectively. It is also possible that it may not be able to get the
plunger to the top of the well.
Tubing ID: Enter the inside diameter (ID) of the tubing string. This value is used in the unloading
calculations to determine the shut-in rate. In most cases, 1.90" outside diameter tubing has a
1.61" ID and 2.375" outside diameter tubing has 1.995" ID.
PID Loop: This value informs the plunger lift function if PID control is enabled and which PID
control function to use. Making no selection in this field disables the PID control feature. Selecting
1 through 4 designates which of the PID loop functions to use. If this feature is enabled, the sales
(A) valve's open and close points, valve types, solenoid types, and pulse durations are ignored.
Equivalent parameters are set up in the PID itself.
Early Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines an early arrival. The early arrival window is
helpful in determining whether the plunger has been stuck in the tube somewhat close to the
surface. Damage to equipment and even loss of life can occur if the plunger continues to have too
many early arrivals. Use this entry in conjunction with the Maximum Consecutive Early Arrivals
parameter to avoid this scenario.
Fast Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines a fast arrival.
Slow Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines a slow arrival.
Minimum Off Time: This value should be the amount of time it takes for the plunger to get to
the bottom and no longer. Because the program waits until minimum off time times out before
doing anything else, it is essential that this value be only the amount of time necessary for the
plunger to reach the bottom. Once minimum off time expires, the program begins looking at
tubing, case, and line pressure to calculation load ratios.
Pit Delay: Enter the amount of time in minutes allowed for the plunger to arrive after a slow
arrival but before the pit valve opens. The arrival is considered late once the pit valve opens.
On Time: Enter the maximum amount of time allowed for the program to bring the plunger up
without recycling for a no arrival condition. This time must be longer than the late arrival time.
Mandatory Off Time: This value represents the amount of time a well will shut-in during the off
time portion of the cycle if a no arrival condition occurs (essentially an alternate off time value for
a plunger that never arrived). This allows for a large amount of pressure to build up so the plunger
can be brought to the surface.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 246


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Lo/Hi Sales Pressures: The function checks the values entered here against the sales line
pressure for all methods. If the sales line pressure is below the low or above the high, the cycle
will enter into a “Hold” until the conditions clears.
Maximum Consecutive No Arrivals: A typical value for this input is 2 or 3. When a plunger does
not arrive, a no arrival condition occurs. The program tracks the no arrivals and any consecutive
no arrivals. If the well exceeds this value, the well is shut-in until an operator restarts the cycle.
The counter resets when a non-consecutive no arrival condition occurs.
Solenoid Type: Select the solenoid type used to control the valve. Options are listed below.
 2-wire: Requires 1 discrete output point (single open/close point).
 3-wire: Requires 2 discrete output points (separate open and close points).
Open Point: The control output point to open the valve.
Close Point: The control output point to close the valve.
A Abort Status: Select the mode to set the valve on when an abort condition occurs. Options are
listed below.

 Fail Closed: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to a closed state.
 Opened: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to an open state.
Solenoid Type: Select the solenoid type used to control the valve. Options are listed below.
 2-wire: Requires 1 discrete output point (single open/close point).
 3-wire: Requires 2 discrete output points (separate open and close points).
Open Point: The control output point to open the valve.
Close Point: The control output point to close the valve.
B Abort Status: Select the mode to set the valve on when an abort condition occurs. Options are
listed below.
 Fail Closed: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to a closed state.
 Opened: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to an open state.
Plunger Sensor: Connect the input point used to sense the plunger UP condition to this field. This
is typically an accumulator point.
Tubing Pressure: Connect the analog input point used to sense the tubing pressure to this field.
Cycles < Maintain: Enter the number of cycles the plunger should complete before requiring
maintenance. A plunger and all of the associated surface equipment have a certain life that can be
measured in cycles (trips up and down the tubing). Once the counter reaches the entered value,
"Plunger Maintenance Needed" is displayed, and the well aborts until an operator restarts the
cycle.
PID Set Point: The flow plunger function provides for PID control of the sales valve using either a
jog/discrete out form of control or by an analog output. This entry (typically in inches of water)
prevents the meter run from be over pressurized when the sales line opens. Once the rate/DP falls
below this value, the PID opens the valve, and it is allowed to flow freely.
PID Cutoff: Enter the cutoff value that the PID algorithm uses to determine when a PID process
variable should be considered zero. Any DP/rate that falls below this value is considered to be zero
by the PID.
A Close-B Open: This flag informs the program if the sales (A) valve should be closed before the
pit (B) valve opens. Due to different piping of plunger lift wells, it may be necessary to keep the
sales valve open or closed when the pit valve is opened.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 247


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Sale Leak Check: This flag enables the program to check the sales valve for leaks. During the
off-time portion of the cycle, the meter run's DP value is compared against the run's DP cutoff
value. If the DP remains above the cutoff value, continuously for two minutes, the plunger lift
processing is aborted and the run is shut-in.
Low DP Cutoff: This parameter is the low flow cutoff. The flow rate will be forced to zero when
the differential pressure drops below the value entered here.
C-L Override Enable: Enable/disable the casing-line override test that uses the casing - line
differential (C-L DP field) to force the run into an on time condition.
C-L Differential Pressure: Enter the value that acts as an override for the load ratio. If the C-L
differential becomes greater than this value, the sales valve opens, and the on time portion of the
cycle begins.
Purge Delay Time: This is an additional amount of time that the method waits for the plunger to
arrive once the plunger enters the slow arrival state.
After Flow Delay Deadband: The amount of time that the method waits after a plunger arrival
to allow fluid to clear from the meter so a false high pressure alarm will not occur.
Meter PT: Select the meter run that the method obtains data (flow rate values, etc.) from.
Casing Pressure: Copy the analog input point used to sense the casing pressure.
Minimum Shut-In Time: Enter the minimum amount of time required for the meter run flow rate
to be below the calculated shut-in rate before the algorithm terminates the cycle and begins a new
cycle.
Analog Fail Time: This entry is a timer value that determines when an analog input has failed.
Some analog input values such as pressure and temperature can intermittently spike and drop to
fail conditions. This entry ensures that these normal transient spikes do not result in the cycle
being prematurely aborted.
Maximum Build Time: Enter the amount of time used to monitor the casing pressure buildup.
In a "normal" plunger well, the casing pressure builds in a positive direction during the off-
time portion of the cycle. If this buildup of pressure stops before the open condition of the
sales valve is satisfied, the cycle is aborted and processing of the algorithm is stopped.
Some wells build slower than others. Thus, this entry is used to increase or decrease the time
that the plunger lift program looks for an upward movement of the pressure before
determining a fail condition.
Casing Applied: This flag determines if casing pressure is applied to the calculation of the load
ratio and how the load factor is interpreted in the program.
If casing is applied, the load ratio and factor are calculated as:
[(casing pressure - tubing pressure) / (casing pressure - line pressure)]
If the flag is disabled and casing pressure is not being used in the calculation, load ratio and
factor are the difference of the tubing and line pressures:
(tubing pressure - line pressure)
Maximum Consecutive Early Arrivals: Enter the number of consecutive early arrivals required
to cause the well to shut-in until an operator resets the values in the program.
Plunger Battery: Enter the value that serves as a voltage check so that valve control can be
properly performed. Some types of valve motors require a considerable amount of power to
control them. If the unit's battery voltage is below this value, you can assume that there is not
enough power to control the valves without affecting the normal flow computer operation.
Battery Voltage Setting: The battery voltage must be above this value or the plunger will abort.
PLC Callout Point: This point is tied to the Force Callout field in Table #66 to make it callout in
the event of a plunger lift abort.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 248


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Log Interval: Determine how often the system records the plunger history of the well and enter
this time in minutes. Entering 0 disables this function.
After Flow on Late Arrival: If a plunger arrives as the plunger function is blowing to the pit
valve and if this function is enabled, the program either recycles and goes to off time or closes the
pit valve and enters after flow.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 249


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Sequence of Events for Original Method

The original plunger method can be described in the following sequence of events.
1. Cycle Initialization
At the start of a cycle, the function updates the status of the consecutive no arrivals and
the consecutive early arrivals based on the last cycle's arrival. It then ensures that the on
time is longer than the slow arrival time and that the slow arrival time is longer than the
fast arrival time. The function then checks if the increment and decrement load factors are
within the maximum and minimum load factor values (0 disables these factors). If any
value falls outside the stated boundaries, the process is aborted and an error message is
displayed. Finally, the TRM value is checked and limited to the maximum and minimum
TRM values. Once these checks have been performed, a command to close the sales (A)
and pit (B) valves is issued. This ensures that the valves are closed, and the off time
phase of the sequence can begin.
2. Off Time
This portion of the sequence begins with a determination of how long the shut-in period
should be. The minimum off time value is used in two cases: (1) if the previous arrival was
anything other than a no arrival or (2) if the cycle just started by a user or Host
command. The mandatory off time value is used if the previous arrival was a no arrival.
If the Sales Leak Check option is enabled, the software checks if the run's flow rate is
above the run's DP cutoff. If the run is flowing for more than two minutes, the function
aborts and waits for user intervention. When off time expires, the function begins
evaluating the user-configured parameters in order to move to the on time portion and
open the sales valve.
The casing enabled parameter allows you to modify the evaluation of load ratio and load
factor to include or exclude casing pressure. If casing pressure is applied in the calculation
of the load ratio, the calculation becomes:
[casing pressure - tubing pressure] / [casing pressure - line pressure]
If the casing is not applied, the calculation becomes:
[tubing pressure - line pressure]
If the C-L override enable function is active and if the difference of casing and line
pressures is greater than the value entered for C-L differential pressure, the software is
forced into the on time phase. This fail-safe calculation is in addition to the load ratio
calculation. During the factor calculation, the tubing and casing pressures are monitored
every 15 seconds to ensure that the pressure is building in a positive direction.
If the pressure stops building for the maximum build time, then an alarm is logged.
Additionally, the sales valve is forced to open if the high line pressure value is not
exceeded. The software then moves to the on time phase. If the software determines that
the sales valve can be opened based on the load ratio and load factor, the function checks
the sales line pressure. If the pressure is below the high line pressure value, then the on
time portion of the cycle begins. If the sales line pressure is greater than or equal to this
value, the function logs an alarm and holds until the pressure value drops below this limit.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 250


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

3. On Time
The software begins the on time portion of the cycle by opening the sales valve. It then
waits for the plunger to arrive at the surface. If the plunger arrives before what is
considered a "slow" window, the proper time and arrival type (fast, early, normal) is
logged. If the total number of consecutive early arrivals is greater than or equal to the
maximum consecutive early arrivals value, the cycle aborts and waits for user
intervention. If the arrival time is earlier than the entered early arrival time, the function
restarts the cycle (without modifying the Turner Rate) to allow the plunger more time to
drop.
If the plunger arrives before the slow window, the software moves into the after flow
portion of the cycle. If the plunger arrives after the slow window, the software moves to
the slow phase of the cycle. If the slow timer expires and no plunger sensor point is
defined, the software starts a new cycle. Once the arrival time for the plunger is
determined, the software adjusts the TRM for this cycle.
If the plunger is a late, slow, or no arrival, the corresponding increment values are added
to the Turner Rate. If the plunger is an early or fast arrival, the corresponding decrement
values are subtracted from the Turner Rate.
4. After Flow
At the start of the after flow portion of the cycle, the software resets the counter for
maximum consecutive no arrivals. The on time value is saved, and the after flow timer
starts. The sales line pressure value is compared to the line pressure and shuts in and
recycles if the static line pressure value is exceeded. The shut-in rate is calculated and
compared to the Turner Rate. If the meter run's flow rate drops below the calculated
Turner Rate for the minimum shut-in time, the software continues checking the sales line
pressure for the flow rate to drop below the Turner Rate. Once one of these happens, the
software shuts in and starts a new cycle.
5. Slow/Late Arrival
The slow phase of the cycle begins with the software looking at the user-defined pit delay
time. A non-zero value defines a slow arrival window, as opposed to a late arrival. In the
slow phase, the software waits an additional amount of time to give the plunger more time
before the pit valve opens. If the plunger arrives within this window, the software adjusts
the Turner Rate and load factor and enters the after flow phase of the cycle.
If the plunger does not arrive within this window, the command to open the pit valve is
issued. If the A Close - B Open option is enabled, the sales valve closes and the pit valve
opens. If this option is disabled, the sales valve remains open. This is to accommodate
various piping methods at the wellhead.
Once the pit valve opens, the late phase of the cycle begins. In this phase, the software
continues waiting for the plunger to arrive until the total on-time timer expires. If this
occurs, the software adjusts the Turner Rate and load factor values and starts a new cycle.
If the total number of consecutive no arrivals is greater than or equal to the value entered
for Maximum Consecutive No Arrivals, the software aborts the cycle and waits for user
intervention.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 251


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Sample Configuration for Original Method

1. Cold start the unit and create a configuration.


2. Set up one orifice meter run (DP Flow Calculation table).
3. From the navigation bar, go to Calculations > 65-Plunger Lift.
4. Assume that the following values represent the current state of the well:
 Static Pressure = 30
 Temperature = 70

 DP = 20
 Casing Pressure (if applicable): 90
 Tubing Pressure: 72
 Plunger Drop Time: 1 minute
5. Enter the following suggested starting values:
 Flow Control Method: Original
 TRM: 1.2
 TRM Increment: .08
 TRM Decrement: .01
 Maximum TRM: 1.3
 Minimum TRM: 1.0
 Slow Arrival Time: 2 minutes
 Fast Arrival Time: 1 minute

 Off Time: 1 minute


 Pit Delay: 1 minute
 On Time: 4 minutes
 Plunger Sensor: Accumulator #1 (preferable) or Discrete Input #1
 Tubing Pressure Point: Analog Input #3 (tubing pressure)
 A Close B Open: Enable
 Casing Pressure Point: Analog Input #4 (casing pressure)
 Analog Fail Time: 0

Thermo Fisher Scientific 252


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Load Factor Method

This method is a variation of the original method that does not allow for the adjustment of the load
factor value. It can be implemented in the original method by setting the load factor increment and
decrement values to zero.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 253


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Load Factor Method Configuration

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation.


Descriptor: Enter a description of the function or device associated with this calculation.
ID: The flow plunger table ID.
Force to Default: Set all values to factory defaults by clicking in the check box and then clicking
the Apply button.
Flow Control Method: Select Load Factor.
Force Default: Set all values to factory defaults by clicking in the check box and then clicking the
Apply button.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 254


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Control Command: Select the function to be performed. Options are listed below.
 Abort: Terminate the plunger lift cycle.
 Start: Begin the plunger lift cycle.
 Pause: Suspend the cycle at its current state.
 Resume: Resume the suspended cycle.

 Reset: Reset counters displayed on the Plunger Summary screen.


 Open Pit: Manually open the pit valve.
 Close Pit: Manually close the pit valve.
 Open Sales: Manually open the sales valve.
 Close Sales: Manually close the sales valve.
 Out Off Time: Stop the off time countdown and begin looking for the proper conditions
to open the valve.
 Out After Time: Terminate the after flow time countdown and begin a new cycle.
 Force to Off Time: Begin a new cycle at the off time point of the plunger lift algorithm.
 For to On Time: Begin a new cycle at the on time point of the algorithm. This
command is useful if you do not want to wait for the off time countdown to expire and
you know that the sales valve can be opened immediately.
 Force to Late Time: Begin a new cycle at the late time point of the algorithm. This
command is useful if you need to open the pit valve in order to get the plunger up.
Also, if the After Flow on Late Arrival function is enabled, the algorithm will proceed to
the after flow point once the plunger arrives.
TRM: Initially, enter 1 as the TRM and adjust as necessary.
The program calculates an unloading rate using various pressures, a compressibility factor (Z),
temperature, and tubing diameter. After calculating the unloading rate, the TRM value is
applied to the unloading rate to determine a shut-in rate. When the actual rate falls below the
shut-in rate, the after flow phase ends, the run is shut-in, and a new cycle begins. As TRM
decreases, the shut-in rate also decreases, allowing the well to flow longer during after flow.
As TRM increases, the shut-in rate increases, decreasing after flow.
The TRM value increases and decreases as early, fast, late, slow, and no arrival plunger
arrivals occur. The value does not change for a normal plunger arrival condition. The trial and
error method is typically the best way to determine adjustments and boundaries for the TRM.
Adjustments to the value are made in the TRM Increment and TRM Decrement fields.
Boundaries to the value are set in the Maximum TRM and Minimum TRM fields.
TRM Increment: When a slow, late, or no arrival occurs, the software will increase the TRM by
this value, essentially decreasing after flow time. A typical initial setting is 0.3. For example, TRM
is running at 0.8. TRM Increment is set at 0.25. A slow, late, or no arrival occurs. TRM will
increase to 1.05.
TRM Decrement: When a fast or early arrival occurs, the software will decrease the TRM by this
value, essentially increasing after flow time. A typical initial setting is 0.05. For example, TRM is
running at 0.8. TRM Decrement is at 0.05, and a fast arrival occurs. TRM will decrease to 0.75.
Maximum TRM: Enter the setting that TRM cannot exceed (essentially a minimum afterflow
value). If maximum TRM is set too high and TRM increment contains a large value, the well can
cycle too fast and not produce as effectively as possible. For good wells, the value may be set to
above 1.2. For most other wells, begin with 1.2 and adjust as necessary.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 255


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Minimum TRM: Enter the setting that TRM cannot fall below (essentially a maximum afterflow
value). If minimum TRM is set too low and TRM decrement contains a large value, the well may
load up. For good wells, the value may be set below 0.5. For most other wells, begin with 0.5 and
adjust as necessary.
Load Factor: This is typically set to 0.5.
This value is compared against the load ratio after minimum off time expires. A well with a
load ratio less than 0.5 should be sufficient to lift the plunger to the surface. However, if the
load factor is set too high (1.0), the sales valve will always open as soon as the minimum off
time expires. If the load factor is set too low (0.1), the load ratio will rarely open the sales
valve, and off time will be extended to the point where only very fast arrivals occur, possibly
resulting in damage to surface equipment or personnel.
If a system has the casing pressure disabled (tubing assist only), the load factor and load ratio
become the difference of the tubing and line pressures (tubing pressure-line pressure). This
value then becomes the number of pounds above line pressure that the tubing pressure must
be in order to open the sales valve.
Tubing ID: Enter the inside diameter (ID) of the tubing string. This value is used in the unloading
calculations to determine the shut-in rate. In most cases, 1.90" outside diameter tubing has a
1.61" ID and 2.375" outside diameter tubing has 1.995" ID.
PID Loop: This value informs the plunger lift function if PID control is enabled and which PID
control function to use. Making no selection in this field disables the PID control feature. Selecting
1 through 4 designates which of the PID loop functions to use. If this feature is enabled, the sales
(A) valve's open and close points, valve types, solenoid types, and pulse durations are ignored.
Equivalent parameters are set up in the PID itself.
Early Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines an early arrival. The early arrival window is
helpful in determining whether the plunger has been stuck in the tube somewhat close to the
surface. Damage to equipment and even loss of life can occur if the plunger continues to have too
many early arrivals. Use this entry in conjunction with the Maximum Consecutive Early Arrivals
parameter to avoid this scenario.
Fast Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines a fast arrival.
Slow Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines a slow arrival.
Minimum Off Time: This value should be the amount of time it takes for the plunger to get to
the bottom and no longer. Because the program waits until minimum off time times out before
doing anything else, it is essential that this value be only the amount of time necessary for the
plunger to reach the bottom. Once minimum off time expires, the program begins looking at
tubing, case, and line pressure to calculation load ratios.
Pit Delay: Enter the amount of time in minutes allowed for the plunger to arrive after a slow
arrival but before the pit valve opens. The arrival is considered late once the pit valve opens.
On Time: Enter the maximum amount of time allowed for the program to bring the plunger up
without recycling for a no arrival condition. This time must be longer than the late arrival time.
Mandatory Off-Time: This value represents the amount of time a well will shut-in during the off-
time portion of the cycle if a no arrival condition occurs (essentially an alternate off-time value for
a plunger that never arrived). This allows for a large amount of pressure to build up so the plunger
can be brought to the surface.
Lo/Hi Sales Pressures: The function checks the values entered here against the sales line
pressure for all methods. If the sales line pressure is below the low or above the high, the cycle
will enter into a “Hold” until the conditions clears.
Maximum Consecutive No Arrivals: A typical value for this input is 2 or 3. When a plunger does
not arrive, a no arrival condition occurs. The program tracks the no arrivals and any consecutive
no arrivals. If the well exceeds this value, the well is shut-in until an operator restarts the cycle.
The counter resets when a non-consecutive no arrival condition occurs.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 256


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Solenoid Type: Select the solenoid type used to control the valve. Options are listed below.

 2-wire: Requires 1 discrete output point (single open/close point).

 3-wire: Requires 2 discrete output points (separate open and close points).

Open Point: The control output point to open the valve.


Close Point: The control output point to close the valve.
A Abort Status: Select the mode to set the valve on when an abort condition occurs. Options are
listed below.
 Fail Closed: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to a closed state.
 Fail Open: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to an open state.
Solenoid Type: Select the solenoid type used to control the valve. Options are listed below.
 2-wire: Requires 1 discrete output point (single open/close point).
 3-wire: Requires 2 discrete output points (separate open and close points).
Open Point: The control output point to open the valve.
Close Point: The control output point to close the valve.
B Abort Status: Select the mode to set the valve on when an abort condition occurs. Options are
listed below.
 Fail Closed: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to a closed state.
 Fail Open: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to an open state.
Plunger Sensor: Connect the flow computer input point used to sense the plunger UP condition
to this field. This is typically an accumulator point.
Tubing Pressure: Connect the flow computer analog input point used to sense the tubing
pressure to this field.
Cycles < Maintain: Enter the number of cycles the plunger should complete before requiring
maintenance. A plunger and all of the associated surface equipment have a certain life that can be
measured in cycles (trips up and down the tubing). Once the counter reaches the entered value,
"Plunger Maintenance Needed" is displayed, and the well aborts until an operator restarts the
cycle.
PID Set Point: The flow plunger function provides for PID control of the sales valve using either a
jog/discrete output form of control or by an analog output. This entry (typically in inches of water)
prevents the meter run from being over pressurized when the sales line opens. Once the rate/DP
falls below this value, the PID opens the valve, and it is allowed to flow freely.
PID Cutoff: Enter the cutoff value that the PID algorithm uses to determine when a PID process
variable should be considered zero. Any DP/rate that falls below this value is considered to be zero
by the PID.
A Close-B Open: This flag informs the program if the sales (A) valve should be closed before the
pit (B) valve opens. Due to different piping of plunger lift wells, it may be necessary to keep the
sales valve open or closed when the pit valve is opened.
Sale Leak Check: This flag enables the program to check the sales valve for leaks. During the
off-time portion of the cycle, the meter run's DP value is compared against the run's DP cutoff
value. If the DP remains above the cutoff value, continuously for two minutes, the plunger lift
processing is aborted and the run is shut-in.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 257


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Low DP Cutoff: This parameter is the low flow cutoff. The flow rate will be forced to zero when
the differential pressure drops below the value entered here.
C-L Override Enable: Enter a value to enable the casing-line override test that uses the casing -
line differential (C-L DP field) to force the run into an on-time condition.
C-L Differential Pressure: Enter the value that acts as an override for the load ratio. If the C-L
differential becomes greater than this value, the sales valve opens, and the on-time portion of the
cycle begins.
Purge Delay Time: This is an additional amount of time that the method waits for the plunger to
arrive once the plunger enters the slow arrival state.
After Flow Delay Deadband: The amount of time that the method waits after a plunger arrival
to allow fluid to clear from the meter so a false high pressure alarm will not occur.
Meter PT: Select the meter run that the method obtains data (flow rate values, etc.) from.
Casing Pressure: Connect the flow computer analog input point used to sense the casing
pressure to this field.
Minimum Shut-In Time: Enter the minimum amount of time required for the meter run flow rate
to be below the calculated shut-in rate before the algorithm terminates the cycle and begins a new
cycle.
Analog Fail Time (sec): This entry is a timer value that determines when an analog input has
failed. Some analog input values, such as pressure and temperature, can intermittently spike and
drop to fail conditions. This entry ensures that these normal transient spikes do not result in the
cycle being prematurely aborted.
Maximum Build Time: Enter the amount of time used to monitor the casing pressure buildup.
In a "normal" plunger well, the casing pressure builds in a positive direction during the off
time portion of the cycle. If this buildup of pressure stops before the open condition of the
sales valve is satisfied, the cycle is aborted and processing of the algorithm is stopped.
Some wells build slower than others. Thus, this entry is used to increase or decrease the time
that the plunger lift program looks for an upward movement of the pressure before
determining a fail condition.
Casing Applied: This flag determines if casing pressure is applied to the calculation of the load
ratio and how the load factor is interpreted in the program.
If casing is applied, the load ratio and factor are calculated as:
[(casing pressure - tubing pressure) / (casing pressure - line pressure)]
If the flag is disabled and casing pressure is not being used in the calculation, load ratio and
factor are the difference of the tubing and line pressures:
(tubing pressure - line pressure)
Maximum Consecutive Early Arrivals: Enter the number of consecutive early arrivals required
to cause the well to shut-in until an operator resets the values in the program.
Plunger Battery: Enter the value that serves as a voltage check so that valve control can be
properly performed. Some types of valve motors require a considerable amount of power to
control them. If the unit's battery voltage is below this value, you can assume that there is not
enough power to control the valves without affecting the normal flow computer operation.
Battery Voltage Setting: The battery voltage must be above this value or the plunger will abort.
PLC Callout Point: This point is tied to the Force Callout field in Table #66 to make it callout in
the event of a plunger lift abort.
Log Interval: Determine how often the system records the plunger history of the well and enter
this time in minutes. Entering 0 disables this function. Maximum interval time is 254 minutes.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 258


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

After Flow on Late Arrival: If a plunger arrives as the plunger function is blowing to the pit
valve and if this function is enabled, the program either recycles and goes to off-time or closes the
pit valve and enters after flow.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 259


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Sequence of Events for Load Factor Method

The flow control plunger load factor method can be described in the following sequence of events:
1. Cycle Initialization
At the start of a cycle, the function updates the status of the consecutive no arrivals and
the consecutive early arrivals based on the last cycle's arrival. It then ensures that the on
time is longer than the slow arrival time and that the slow arrival time is longer than the
fast arrival time. The function then checks if the increment and decrement load factors are
within the maximum and minimum load factor values (0 disables these factors). If any
value falls outside the stated boundaries, the process is aborted and an error message is
displayed. Finally, the TRM value is checked and limited to the maximum and minimum
TRM values. Once these checks have been performed, a command to close the sales (A)
and pit (B) valves is issued. This ensures that the valves are closed, and the off time
phase of the sequence can begin.
2. Off Time
This portion of the sequence begins with a determination of how long the shut-in period
should be. The minimum off-time value is used in two cases: (1) if the previous arrival
was anything other than a no arrival or (2) if the cycle just started by a user or Host
command. The mandatory off time value is used if the previous arrival was a no arrival.
If the Sales Leak Check option is enabled, the software checks if the run's flow rate is
above the run's DP cutoff. If the run is flowing for more than two minutes, the function
aborts and waits for user intervention. When the off-time expires, the function begins
evaluating the user-configured parameters in order to move to the on time portion and
open the sales valve.
If the C-L Override Enable function is active and if the difference of casing and line
pressures is greater than the value entered for C-L DP, the software is forced into the on
time phase. This fail-safe calculation is in addition to the load ratio calculation.
If the software determines that the sales valve can be opened, the function checks the
sales line pressure. If the pressure is below the high line pressure value, then the on time
portion of the cycle begins. If the sales line pressure is greater than or equal to this value,
the function logs an alarm and holds until the pressure value drops below this limit.
3. On Time
The software begins the on time portion of the cycle by opening the sales valve. It then
waits for the plunger to arrive at the surface. If the plunger arrives before what is
considered a "slow" window, the proper time and arrival type (fast, early, normal) is
logged. If the total number of consecutive early arrivals is greater than or equal to the
maximum consecutive early arrivals value, the cycle aborts and waits for user
intervention. If the arrival time is earlier than the early arrival time, the function restarts
the cycle (without modifying the Turner Rate and load factor) to allow the plunger more
time to drop.
If the plunger arrives before the slow window, the software moves into the after flow
portion of the cycle. If the plunger arrives after the slow window, the software moves to
the slow phase of the cycle. If the slow timer expires and no plunger sensor point is
defined, the software starts a new cycle. Once the arrival time for the plunger is
determined, the software adjusts the TRM for this cycle and the load factor for the next
cycle.
If the plunger is a late, slow, or no arrival, the corresponding increment values are added
to the Turner Rate and load factor. If the plunger is an early or fast arrival, the
corresponding decrement values are subtracted from the Turner Rate and load factor.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 260


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

4. After Flow
At the start of the after flow portion of the cycle, the software resets the counter for
consecutive no arrivals. The on time value is saved, and the after flow timer starts. The
sales line pressure value is compared to the line pressure and shuts in and recycles if the
static line pressure value is exceeded. The shut-in rate is calculated and compared to the
Turner Rate. If the meter run's flow rate drops below the calculated Turner Rate for the
minimum shut-in time, the software continues checking the sales line pressure for the flow
rate to drop below the Turner Rate. Once one of these happens, the software shuts in and
starts a new cycle.
5. Slow/Late Arrival
The slow phase of the cycle begins with the software looking at the pit delay time. A non-
zero value defines a slow arrival window, as opposed to a late arrival. In the slow phase,
the software waits an additional amount of time to give the plunger more time before the
pit valve opens. If the plunger arrives within this window, the software adjusts the Turner
Rate and load factor and enters the afterflow phase of the cycle.
If the plunger does not arrive within this window, the command to open the pit valve is
issued. If the A Close - B Open option is enabled, the sales valve closes and the pit valve
opens. If this option is disabled, the sales valve remains open. This is to accommodate
various piping methods at the wellhead.
Once the pit valve opens, the late phase of the cycle begins. In this phase, the software continues
waiting for the plunger to arrive until the total on-time timer expires. If this occurs, the software
adjusts the Turner Rate and load factor values and starts a new cycle. If the total number of
consecutive no arrivals is greater than or equal to the value entered for Consecutive No Arrivals, the
software aborts the cycle and waits for user intervention.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 261


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Sample Configuration for Load Factor Method

1. Cold start the unit and create a configuration.


2. Set up one orifice meter run (DP Flow Calculation table).
3. From the navigation bar, go to Calculations > 65-Plunger Lift.
4. Assume that the following values represent the current state of the well:
 Static Pressure = 30
 Temperature = 70

 DP = 20
 Casing Pressure (if applicable): 90
 Tubing Pressure: 72
 Plunger Drop Time: 1 minute
5. Enter the following suggested starting values:
 Flow Control Method: Load Factor
 TRM: 1.2
 TRM Increment: .08
 TRM Decrement: .01
 Maximum TRM: 1.3
 Minimum TRM: 1.0
 Slow Arrival Time: 2 minutes
 Fast Arrival Time: 1 minute

 Off-Time: 1 minute
 Pit Delay: 1 minute
 On-Time: 4 minutes
 Plunger Sensor: Accumulator #1 (preferable) or Discrete Input #1
 Tubing Pressure Point: Tubing Pressure (analog input #3)
 Casing Pressure Point: Casing Pressure (analog input #4)
 After Flow Time: 1 minute
 Analog Fail Time: 0

Thermo Fisher Scientific 262


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Timer Method

This method uses timers to determine how long the shut-in and after flow periods should be. Like the
original method, the shut-in time and after flow timers are adjusted based on the plunger arrival time.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 263


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Timer Method Configuration

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation.


Descriptor: Enter a description of the function or device associated with this calculation.
ID: The flow plunger table ID.
Force to Default: Set all values to factory defaults by clicking in the check box and then clicking
the Apply button.
Flow Control Method: Select Timer.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 264


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Control Command: Select the function to be performed. Options are listed below.
 Abort: Terminate the plunger lift cycle.
 Start: Begin the plunger lift cycle.
 Pause: Suspend the cycle at its current state.
 Resume: Resume the suspended cycle.

 Reset: Reset counters displayed on the Plunger Summary screen.


 Open Pit: Manually open the pit valve.
 Close Pit: Manually close the pit valve.
 Open Sales: Manually open the sales valve.
 Close Sales: Manually close the sales valve.
 Out Off Time: Stop the off time countdown and begin looking for the proper conditions
to open the valve.
 Out After Time: Terminate the after flow time countdown and begin a new cycle.
 Force to Off Time: Begin a new cycle at the off time point of the plunger lift algorithm.
 Force to On Time: Begin a new cycle at the on time point of the algorithm. This
command is useful if you do not want to wait for the off time countdown to expire and
you know that the sales valve can be opened immediately.
 Force to Late Time: Begin a new cycle at the late time point of the algorithm. This
command is useful if you need to open the pit valve in order to get the plunger up.
Also, if the After Flow on Late Arrival function is enabled, the algorithm will proceed to
the after flow point once the plunger arrives.
Decrement Off Time: Enter the amount of time to increase off time during the next cycle if a fast
arrival occurs.
Increment Off Time: Enter the amount of time to decrease off time during the next cycle if
anything other than a fast arrival occurs.
Maximum Off Time: Enter the maximum amount of time that off time can be.
Minimum Off Time: Enter the minimum amount of time that off time can be.
Decrement After Flow Time: Enter the amount of time to increase after flow time during the
next cycle if a fast arrival occurs.
Increment After Flow Time: Enter the amount of time to decrease after flow time during the
next cycle if anything other than a fast arrival occurs.
Maximum After Flow Time: Enter the maximum amount of time that after flow time can be.
Minimum After Flow Time: Enter the minimum amount of time that after flow time can be.
PID Loop: This value informs the plunger lift function if PID control is enabled and which PID
control function to use. Making no selection disables the PID control feature. Selecting 1 through 4
designates which of the PID loop functions to use. If this feature is enabled, the sales (A) valve's
open and close points, valve types, solenoid types, and pulse durations are ignored. Equivalent
parameters are set up in the PID itself.
Early Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines an early arrival. The early arrival window is
helpful in determining whether the plunger has been stuck in the tube somewhat close to the
surface. Damage to equipment and even loss of life can occur if the plunger continues to have too
many early arrivals. Use this entry in conjunction with the Maximum Consecutive Early Arrivals
parameter to avoid this scenario.
Fast Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines a fast arrival.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 265


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Slow Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines a slow arrival.
Minimum Off Time: This value should be (and almost always is) the amount of time that it takes
for the plunger to get to the bottom and no longer. Because the program waits until minimum off
time times out before doing anything else, it is essential that this value be only the amount of
time necessary for the plunger to reach the bottom. Once minimum off time expires, the program
begins looking at tubing, casing, and line pressures to calculate load ratios.
Pit Delay: Enter the amount of time in minutes allowed for the plunger to arrive after a slow
arrival but before the pit valve opens. The arrival is considered late once the pit valve opens.
On Time: Enter the maximum amount of time allowed for the program to bring the plunger up
without recycling for a no arrival condition. This time must be longer than the late arrival time.
Mandatory Off Time: This value represents the amount of time a well will shut-in during the off-
time portion of the cycle if a no arrival condition occurs (essentially an alternate off-time value for
a plunger that never arrived). This allows for a large amount of pressure to build up so the plunger
can be brought to the surface.
After Flow Time: Enter the amount of time in hh:mm:ss format that the sales valve is open after
the plunger arrives at the top of the well.
Lo/Hi Sales Pressures: The function checks the values entered here against the sales line
pressure for all methods. If the sales line pressure is below the low or above the high, the cycle
will enter into a “Hold” until the conditions clears.
Maximum Consecutive No Arrivals: A typical value for this input is 2 or 3. When a plunger does
not arrive, a no arrival condition occurs. The program tracks the no arrivals and any consecutive
no arrivals. If the well exceeds this value, the well is shut-in until an operator restarts the cycle.
The counter resets when a non-consecutive no arrival condition occurs.
Solenoid Type: Select the solenoid type used to control the valve. Options are listed below.
 2-wire: Requires 1 discrete output point (single open/close point).
 3-wire: Requires 2 discrete output points (separate open and close points).
Open Point: The control output point to open the valve.
Close Point: The control output point to close the valve.
A Abort Status: Select the mode to set the valve on when an abort condition occurs. Options are
listed below.
 Fail Closed: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to a closed state.
 Fail Open: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to an open state.
Solenoid Type: Select the solenoid type used to control the valve. Options are listed below.
 2-wire: Requires 1 discrete output point (single open/close point).
 3-wire: Requires 2 discrete output points (separate open and close points).
Open Point: The control output point to open the valve.
Close Point: The control output point to close the valve.
B Abort Status: Select the mode to set the valve on when an abort condition occurs. Options are
listed below.
 Fail Closed: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to a closed state.
 Fail Open: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to an open state.
Plunger Sensor: Connect the input point used to sense the plunger UP condition to this field. This
is typically an accumulator point.
Tubing Pressure: Connect the analog input point used to sense the tubing pressure to this field.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 266


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Cycles < Maintain: Enter the number of cycles the plunger should complete before requiring
maintenance. A plunger and all of the associated surface equipment have a certain life that can be
measured in cycles (trips up and down the tubing). Once the counter reaches the entered value,
"Plunger Maintenance Needed" is displayed, and the well aborts until an operator restarts the
cycle.
PID Set Point: The flow plunger function provides for PID control of the sales valve using either a
jog/discrete output form of control or by an analog output. This entry (typically in inches of water)
prevents the meter run from being over pressurized when the sales line opens. Once the rate/DP
falls below this value, the PID opens the valve, and it is allowed to flow freely.
PID Cutoff: Enter the cutoff value that the PID algorithm uses to determine when a PID process
variable should be considered zero. Any DP/rate that falls below this value is considered to be zero
by the PID.
A Close-B Open: This flag informs the program if the sales (A) valve should be closed before the
pit (B) valve opens. Due to different piping of plunger lift wells, it may be necessary to keep the
sales valve open or closed when the pit valve is opened.
Sale Leak Check: This flag enables the program to check the sales valve for leaks. During the
off-time portion of the cycle, the meter run's DP value is compared against the run's DP cutoff
value. If the DP remains above the cutoff value, continuously for two minutes, the plunger lift
processing is aborted and the run is shut-in.
Low DP Cutoff: This parameter is the low flow cutoff. The flow rate will be forced to zero when
the differential pressure drops below the value entered here.
Purge Delay Time: This is an additional amount of time that the method waits for the plunger to
arrive once the plunger enters the slow arrival state.
After Flow Delay Deadband: The amount of time that the method waits after a plunger arrival
to allow fluid to clear from the meter so a false high pressure alarm will not occur.
Meter PT: Select the meter run that the method obtains data (flow rate values, etc.) from.
Casing Pressure: Connect the analog input point used to sense the casing pressure to this field.
Analog Fail Time (sec): This entry is a timer value that determines when an analog input has
failed. Some analog input values, such as pressure and temperature, can intermittently spike and
drop to fail conditions. This entry ensures that these normal transient spikes do not result in the
cycle being prematurely aborted.
Maximum Consecutive Early Arrivals: Enter the number of consecutive early arrivals required
to cause the well to shut-in until an operator resets the values in the program.
Plunger Battery: Enter the value that serves as a voltage check so that valve control can be
properly performed. Some types of valve motors require a considerable amount of power to
control them. If the unit's battery voltage is below this value, you can assume that there is not
enough power to control the valves without affecting the normal flow computer operation.
Battery Voltage Setting: The battery voltage must be above this value or the plunger will abort.
PLC Callout Point: This point is tied to the Force Callout field in Table #66 to make it callout in
the event of a plunger lift abort.
Log Interval: Determine how often the system records the plunger history of the well and enter
this time in minutes. Entering 0 disables this function.
After Flow on Late Arrival: If a plunger arrives as the plunger function is blowing to the pit
valve and if this function is enabled, the program either recycles and goes to off time or closes the
pit valve and enters after flow.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 267


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Sequence of Events for Timer Method

The flow control plunger timer method can be described in the following sequence of events.
1. Cycle Initialization
At the start of a cycle, the function updates the status of the consecutive no arrivals and
the consecutive early arrivals based on the last cycle's arrival. It then ensures that the on
time is longer than the slow arrival time and that the slow arrival time is longer than the
fast arrival time. The function then checks if the increment and decrement off-times are
within the maximum and minimum off time values (0 disables these factors). It also checks
if the increment and decrement after flow time values are within the maximum and
minimum after flow time values (0 disables these factors). If any value falls outside the
stated boundaries then the process is aborted and an error message is displayed. Once
these checks have been performed, a command to close the sales (A) and pit (B) valves is
issued. This ensures that the valves are closed, and the off time phase of the sequence can
begin.
2. Off Time
This portion of the sequence begins with a determination of how long the shut-in period
should be. The minimum off time value is used in two cases: (1) if the previous arrival was
anything other than a no arrival or (2) if the cycle just started by a user or Host command.
The mandatory off time value is used if the previous arrival was a no arrival.
If the Sales Leak Check option is enabled, the software checks if the run's flow rate is
above the run's DP cutoff. If the run is flowing for more than two minutes, the function
aborts and waits for user intervention. When off-time expires, the function checks the sales
line pressure. If the pressure is below the high line pressure value, then the on time
portion of the cycle begins. If the sales line pressure is greater than or equal to this value,
the function logs an alarm and holds until the pressure value drops below this limit.
3. On Time
The software begins the on time portion of the cycle by opening the sales valve. It then
waits for the plunger to arrive at the surface. If the plunger point is not defined, the
software waits for the on time timer to expire and then starts a new cycle.
If the plunger arrives before what is considered a "slow" window, the proper time and
arrival type (fast, early, normal) is logged. If the total number of consecutive early arrivals
is greater than or equal to the maximum consecutive early arrivals value, the cycle aborts
and waits for user intervention. If the arrival time is earlier than the early arrival time, the
function restarts the cycle (without modifying the after flow timer) to allow the plunger
more time to drop.
If the plunger arrives before the slow window, the software moves into the after flow
portion of the cycle. If the plunger arrives after the slow window, the software moves to
the slow phase of the cycle. If the slow timer expires and no plunger sensor point is
defined, the software starts a new cycle. Once the arrival time for the plunger is
determined, the software adjusts the after flow time for this cycle.
If the plunger is a late, slow, or no arrival, the off time and after flow increment values are
added to the corresponding values. If the plunger is an early or fast arrival, the off time
decrement and after flow values are subtracted from the corresponding values.
4. After Flow
At the start of the after flow portion of the cycle, the software resets the counter for
maximum consecutive no arrivals. The on-time value is saved, and the after flow timer
starts. The sales line pressure value is compared to the line pressure and shuts in and
recycles if the static line pressure value is exceeded. The software continues checking the
sales line pressure and waiting for the after flow timer to expire. Once this happens, the
software shuts in and starts a new cycle.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 268


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

5. Slow/Late Arrival
The slow phase of the cycle begins with the software looking at the pit delay time. A non-
zero value defines a slow arrival window, as opposed to a late arrival. In the slow phase,
the software waits an additional amount of time to give the plunger more time before the
pit valve opens. If the plunger arrives within this window, the software adjusts the after
flow and off time timers and enters the after flow phase of the cycle.
If the plunger does not arrive within this window, the command to open the pit valve is
issued. If the A Close - B Open option is enabled, the sales valve closes and the pit valve
opens. If this option is disabled, the sales valve remains open. This is to accommodate
various piping methods at the wellhead.
Once the pit valve opens, the late phase of the cycle begins. In this phase, the software
continues waiting for the plunger to arrive until the total on-time timer expires. If this
occurs, the software adjusts the after flow and off-time timers values and starts a new
cycle. If the total number of consecutive no arrivals is greater than or equal to the value
entered for Maximum Consecutive No Arrivals, the software aborts the cycle and waits for
user intervention.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 269


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Sample Configuration for Timer Method

1. Cold start the unit and create a configuration.


2. Set up one orifice meter run (DP Flow Calculation table).
3. From the navigation bar, go to Calculations > 65-Plunger Lift.
4. Assume that the following values represent the current state of the well:
 Static Pressure = 200
 Temperature = 150

 DP = 50
 Casing Pressure (if applicable): 90
 Tubing Pressure: 72
 Plunger Drop Time: 1 minute
5. Enter the following suggested starting values:
 Flow Control Method: Timer
 Slow Arrival Time: 2 minutes
 Fast Arrival Time: 1 minute
 Off-Time: 1 minute
 Pit Delay: 1 minute
 On-Time: 4 minutes
 Plunger Sensor: Accumulator #1 (preferable) or Discrete Input #1
 After Flow Time: 1 minute

 Hi Line Pressure: 250


 Analog Fail Time: 0
 Decrement Off: 10 second
 Increment Off: 10 seconds
 Maximum Off: 1 minute, 30 seconds
 Minimum Off: 30 seconds
 Decrement After: 10 seconds
 Increment After: 10 seconds
 Maximum After: 1 minute, 30 seconds
 Minimum After: 30 seconds
 A Close B Open: Enable

Thermo Fisher Scientific 270


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

No Pit Method

This method is a variation of the original method that removes the pit operation. It cycles differently
because no pit valve is present to assist the plunger in arriving to the surface.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 271


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

No Pit Method Configuration

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation.


Descriptor: Enter a description of the function or device associated with this calculation.
ID: The flow plunger table ID.
Force to Default: Set all values to factory defaults by clicking in the check box and then clicking
the Apply button.
Flow Control Method: Select No Pit.
Control Command: Select the function to be performed. Options are listed below.

 Abort: Terminate the plunger lift cycle.


 Start: Begin the plunger lift cycle.
 Pause: Suspend the cycle at its current state.
 Resume: Resume the suspended cycle.
 Reset: Reset counters displayed on the Plunger Summary screen.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 272


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

 Open Pit: Manually open the pit valve.


 Close Pit: Manually close the pit valve.
 Open Sales: Manually open the sales valve.
 Close Sales: Manually close the sales valve.
 Out Off-Time: Stop the off time countdown and begin looking for the proper conditions
to open the valve.

 Out After Time: Terminate the after flow time countdown and begin a new cycle.
 Force to Off Time: Begin a new cycle at the off time point of the plunger lift algorithm.
 Force to On Time: Begin a new cycle at the on time point of the algorithm. This
command is useful if you do not want to wait for the off time countdown to expire and
you know that the sales valve can be opened immediately.
 Force to Late Time: Begin a new cycle at the late time point of the algorithm. This
command is useful if you need to open the pit valve in order to get the plunger up.
Also, if the After Flow on Late Arrival function is enabled, the algorithm will proceed to
the after flow point once the plunger arrives.
TRM: Initially, enter 1 as the TRM and adjust as necessary.
The program calculates an unloading rate using various pressures, a compressibility factor (Z),
temperature, and tubing diameter. After calculating the unloading rate, the TRM value is
applied to the unloading rate to determine a shut-in rate. When the actual rate falls below the
shut-in rate, the after flow phase ends, the run is shut-in, and a new cycle begins. As TRM
decreases, the shut-in rate also decreases, effectively allowing the well to flow longer during
after flow. As TRM increases, the shut-in rate increases, decreasing after flow.
The TRM value increases and decreases as early, fast, late, slow, and no arrival plunger
arrivals occur. The value does not change for a normal plunger arrival condition. The trial and
error method is typically the best way to determine adjustments and boundaries for the TRM.
Adjustments to the value are made in the TRM Increment and TRM Decrement fields.
Boundaries to the value are set in the Maximum TRM and Minimum TRM fields.
TRM Increment: When a slow, late, or no arrival occurs, the software will increase the TRM by
this value, essentially decreasing after flow time. A typical initial setting is 0.3. For example, TRM
is running at 0.8. TRM Increment is set at 0.25. A slow, late, or no arrival occurs. TRM will
increase to 1.05.
TRM Decrement: When a fast or early arrival occurs, the software will decrease the TRM by this
value, essentially increasing after flow time. A typical initial setting is 0.05. For example, TRM is
running at 0.8. TRM Decrement is at 0.05, and a fast arrival occurs. TRM will decrease to 0.75.
Maximum TRM: Enter the setting that TRM cannot exceed (essentially a minimum after flow
value). If maximum TRM is set too high and TRM increment contains a large value, the well can
cycle too fast and not produce as effectively as possible. For good wells, the value may be set to
above 1.2. For most other wells, begin with 1.2 and adjust as necessary.
Minimum TRM: Enter the setting that TRM cannot fall below (essentially a maximum after flow
value). If minimum TRM is set too low and TRM decrement contains a large value, the well may
load up. For good wells, the value may be set below 0.5. For most other wells, begin with 0.5 and
adjust as necessary.
Load Factor: This is typically set to 0.5.
This value is compared against the load ratio after minimum off time expires. A well with a
load ratio less than 0.5 should be sufficient to lift the plunger to the surface. However, if the
load factor is set too high (1.0), the sales valve will always open as soon as the minimum off
time expires. If the load factor is set too low (0.1), the load ratio will rarely open the sales
valve, and off time will be extended to the point where only very fast arrivals occur, possibly
resulting in damage to surface equipment or personnel.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 273


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

If a system has the casing pressure disabled (tubing assist only), the load factor and load ratio
become the difference of the tubing and line pressures (tubing pressure-line pressure). This
value then becomes the number of pounds above line pressure that the tubing pressure must
be in order to open the sales valve.
Increment Load: When a slow, late, or no arrival occurs, the software will increase the load
factor by this amount for the off-time phase of the next cycle, essentially increasing shut-in time.
Decrement Load: When a fast or early arrival occurs, the software will decrease the load factor
by this amount for the off-time phase of the next cycle, essentially decreasing shut-in time.
Minimum Load: Enter the setting that the load factor cannot fall below (essentially a minimum
shut-in time). If this entry is set too low, it is possible that the well will not have enough pressure
built up to bring the plunger and its fluid load up.
Maximum Load: Enter the setting that the load factor cannot exceed (essentially a maximum
shut-in time). If this entry is set too high and increment load contains a large value, the well can
cycle too slowly and not produce effectively. It is also possible that it may not be able to get the
plunger to the top of the well.
Tubing ID: Enter the inside diameter (ID) of the tubing string. This value is used in the unloading
calculations to determine the shut-in rate. In most cases, 1.90" outside diameter tubing has a
1.61" ID and 2.375" outside diameter tubing has 1.995" ID.
PID Loop: This value informs the plunger lift function if PID control is enabled and which PID
control function to use. Making no selection in this field disables the PID control feature. Selecting
1 through 4 designates which of the PID loop functions to use. If this feature is enabled, the sales
(A) valve's open and close points, valve types, solenoid types, and pulse durations are ignored.
Equivalent parameters are set up in the PID itself.
Early Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines an early arrival. The early arrival window is
helpful in determining whether the plunger has been stuck in the tube somewhat close to the
surface. Damage to equipment and even loss of life can occur if the plunger continues to have too
many early arrivals. Use this entry in conjunction with the Maximum Consecutive Early Arrivals
parameter to avoid this scenario.
Fast Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines a fast arrival.
Slow Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines a slow arrival.
Minimum Off Time: This value should be the amount of time it takes for the plunger to get to
the bottom and no longer. Because the program waits until minimum off time times out before
doing anything else, it is essential that this value be only the amount of time necessary for the
plunger to reach the bottom. Once minimum off time expires, the program begins looking at
tubing, case, and line pressure to calculation load ratios.
On Time: Enter the maximum amount of time allowed for the program to bring the plunger up
without recycling for a no arrival condition. This time must be longer than the late arrival time.
Mandatory Off Time: This value represents the amount of time a well will shut-in during the off
time portion of the cycle if a no arrival condition occurs (essentially an alternate off time value for
a plunger that never arrived). This allows for a large amount of pressure to build up so the plunger
can be brought to the surface.
Lo/Hi Sales Pressures: The function checks the values entered here against the sales line
pressure for all methods. If the sales line pressure is below the low or above the high, the cycle
will enter into a “Hold” until the conditions clears.
Maximum Consecutive No Arrivals: A typical value for this input is 2 or 3. When a plunger does
not arrive, a no arrival condition occurs. The program tracks the no arrivals and any consecutive
no arrivals. If the well exceeds this value, the well is shut-in until an operator restarts the cycle.
The counter resets when a non-consecutive no arrival condition occurs.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 274


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Solenoid Type: Select the solenoid type used to control the valve. Options are listed below.
 2-wire: Requires 1 discrete output point (single open/close point).
 3-wire: Requires 2 discrete output points (separate open and close points).
Open Point: The control output point to open the valve.
Close Point: The control output point to close the valve.
A Abort Status: Select the mode to set the valve on when an abort condition occurs. Options are
listed below.

 Fail Closed: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to a closed state.
 Fail Open: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to an open state.
Plunger Sensor: Connect the input point used to sense the plunger UP condition to this field. This
is typically an accumulator point.
Tubing Pressure: Connect the analog input point used to sense the tubing pressure to this field.
Cycles < Maintain: Enter the number of cycles the plunger should complete before requiring
maintenance. A plunger and all of the associated surface equipment has a certain life that can be
measured in cycles (trips up and down the tubing). Once the counter reaches the entered value,
"Plunger Maintenance Needed" is displayed, and the well aborts until an operator restarts the
cycle.
PID Set Point: The flow plunger function provides for PID control of the sales valve using either a
jog/discrete output form of control or by an analog output. This entry (typically in inches of water)
prevents the meter run from being over pressurized when the sales line opens. Once the rate/DP
falls below this value, the PID opens the valve, and it is allowed to flow freely.
PID Cutoff: Enter the cutoff value that the PID algorithm uses to determine when a PID process
variable should be considered zero. Any DP/rate that falls below this value is considered to be zero
by the PID.
DP Cutoff Alarm: This flag is used to disable the logging of a DP cutoff alarm to the meter run
alarm log. Normally, for the meter run volume calculation a DP cutoff alarm is logged into a
meter's alarm log if the DP for that meter run drops below the DP cutoff value for a certain
amount of time. Thus, it may be desirable to disable the logging of this alarm.
Sale Leak Check: This flag enables the program to check the sales valve for leaks. During the
off-time portion of the cycle, the meter run's DP value is compared against the run's DP cutoff
value. If the DP remains above the cutoff value, continuously for 2 minutes, the plunger lift
processing is aborted and the run is shut-in.
Low DP Cutoff: This parameter is the low flow cutoff. The flow rate will be forced to zero when
the differential pressure drops below the value entered here.
C-L Override Enable: Enter a value to enable the Casing - Line override test that uses the
casing-line differential (C-L DP field) to force the run into an on-time condition.
C-L Differential Pressure: Enter the value that acts as an override for the load ratio. If the C-L
differential becomes greater than this value, the sales valve opens, and the on-time portion of the
cycle begins.
Maximum Build Time: Enter the amount of time used to monitor the casing pressure buildup.
In a "normal" plunger well, the casing pressure builds in a positive direction during the off
time portion of the cycle. If this buildup of pressure stops before the open condition of the
sales valve is satisfied, the cycle is aborted and processing of the algorithm is stopped.
Some wells build slower than others. Thus, this entry is used to increase or decrease the time
that the plunger lift program looks for an upward movement of the pressure before
determining a fail condition.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 275


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

After Flow Delay Deadband: The amount of time that the method waits after a plunger arrival
to allow fluid to clear from the meter so a false high pressure alarm will not occur.
Meter PT: Select the meter run that the method obtains data (flow rate values, etc.) from.
Casing Pressure: Connect the analog input point used to sense the casing pressure to this field.
Minimum Shut-In Time: Enter the minimum amount of time required for the meter run flow rate
to be below the calculated shut-in rate before the algorithm terminates the cycle and begins a new
cycle.
Analog Fail Time (sec): This entry is a timer value that determines when an analog input has
failed. Some analog input values, such as pressure and temperature, can intermittently spike and
drop to fail conditions. This entry ensures that these normal transient spikes do not result in the
cycle being prematurely aborted.
Casing Applied: This flag determines if casing pressure is applied to the calculation of the load
ratio and how the load factor is interpreted in the program. More...
If casing is applied, the load ratio and factor are calculated as:
[(casing pressure - tubing pressure) / (casing pressure - line pressure)]
If the flag is disabled and casing pressure is not being used in the calculation, load ratio and
factor are the difference of the tubing and line pressures:
(tubing pressure - line pressure)
Maximum Consecutive Early Arrivals: Enter the number of consecutive early arrivals required
to cause the well to shut-in until an operator resets the values in the program.
Plunger Battery: Enter the value that serves as a voltage check so that valve control can be
properly performed. Some types of valve motors require a considerable amount of power to
control them. If the unit's battery voltage is below this value, you can assume that there is not
enough power to control the valves without affecting the normal flow computer operation.
Battery Voltage Setting: The battery voltage must be above this value or the plunger will abort.
PLC Callout Point: This point is tied to the Force Callout field in Table #66 to make it callout in
the event of a plunger lift abort.
Log Interval: Determine how often the system records the plunger history of the well and enter
this time in minutes. Entering 0 disables this function.
After Flow on Late Arrival: If a plunger arrives as the plunger function is blowing to the pit
valve and if this function is enabled, the program either recycles and goes to off-time or closes the
pit valve and enters afterflow.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 276


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Sequence of Events for No Pit Method

The flow control plunger no pit method can be described in the following sequence of events:
1. Cycle Initialization
At the start of a cycle, the function updates the status of the consecutive no arrivals and
the consecutive early arrivals based on the last cycle's arrival. It then ensures that the on
time is longer than the slow arrival time and that the slow arrival time is longer than the
fast arrival time. The function then checks if the increment and decrement load factors are
within the maximum and minimum load factor values (0 disables these factors). If any
value falls outside the stated boundaries, the process is aborted and an error message is
displayed. Finally, the TRM value is checked and limited to the maximum and minimum
TRM values. Once these checks have been performed, a command to close the sales (A)
and pit (B) valves is issued. This ensures that the valves are closed, and the off time phase
of the sequence can begin.
2. Off Time
This portion of the sequence begins with a determination of how long the shut-in period
should be. The minimum off-time value is used in two cases: (1) if the previous arrival was
anything otherthan a no arrival or (2) if the cycle just started by a user or Host command.
The mandatory off time value is used if the previous arrival was a no arrival.
If the Sales Leak Check option is enabled, the software checks if the run's flow rate is
above the run's DP cutoff. If the run is flowing for more than two minutes, the function
aborts and waits for user intervention. When the off time expires, the function checks the
sales line pressure. If the pressure is below the high line pressure value, then the on time
portion of the cycle begins. If the sales line pressure is greater than or equal to this value,
the function logs an alarm and holds until the pressure value drops below this limit.
3. On Time
The software begins the on time portion of the cycle by opening the sales valve. It then
waits for the plunger to arrive at the surface. If the plunger arrives before what is
considered a "slow" window, the proper time and arrival type (fast, early, normal) is
logged. If the total number of consecutive early arrivals is greater than or equal to the
value entered for Maximum Consecutive Early Arrivals, the cycle aborts and waits for user
intervention. If the arrival time is earlier than the early arrival time, the function restarts
the cycle (without modifying the Turner Rate and load factor) to allow the plunger more
time to drop.
If the plunger arrives before the slow window, the software moves into the after flow
portion of the cycle. If the plunger arrives after the slow window, the software delays for
the minimum shut-in time and then moves to the after flow phase of the cycle. If the slow
timer expires and no plunger sensor point is defined, the software starts a new cycle.
4. After Flow
At the start of the after flow portion of the cycle, the software resets the counter for
consecutive no arrivals. The on time value is saved, and the after flow timer starts. The
sales line pressure value is compared to the line pressure and shuts in and recycles if the
static line pressure value is exceeded. The shut-in rate is calculated and compared to the
Turner Rate. If the meter run's flow rate drops below the calculated Turner Rate for the
minimum shut-in time, the software continues checking the sales line pressure for the flow
rate to drop below the Turner Rate. Once one of these happens, the software shuts in and
starts a new cycle.
This method performs an additional check by comparing the casing pressure against the
line pressure. If the casing drops below the line pressure, the software recycles. If the
casing is disabled, this test uses the tubing pressure instead.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 277


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

5. Late Arrival
The late phase of the cycle begins with the software waiting for the plunger to arrive until
the total on-time timer expires. If this occurs, the software adjusts the Turner Rate and
load factor values and starts a new cycle. If the total number of consecutive no arrivals is
greater than or equal to the value entered for Maximum Consecutive No Arrivals, the
software aborts the cycle and waits for user intervention. No pit valve exists, so no
additional control can be done.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 278


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Sample Configuration for No Pit Method

1. Cold start the unit and create a configuration.


2. Set up one orifice meter run (DP Flow Calculation table).
3. From the navigation bar, go to Calculations > 65-Plunger Lift.
4. Assume that the following values represent the current state of the well:
 Static Pressure = 200
 Temperature = 150

 DP = 50
 Casing Pressure (if applicable): 90
 Tubing Pressure: 72
 Plunger Drop Time: 1 minute
5. Enter the following suggested starting values:
 Flow Control Method: No Pit
 TRM: 1.2
 TRM Increment: .08
 TRM Decrement: .01
 Maximum TRM: 1.3
 Minimum TRM: 1.0
 Slow Arrival Time: 2 minutes
 Fast Arrival Time: 1 minute

 Off Time: 1 minute


 Pit Delay: 1 minute
 On Time: 4 minutes
 Plunger Sensor: Accumulator #1 (preferable) or Discrete Input #1
 After Flow Time: 1 minute
 Analog Fail Time: 0

Thermo Fisher Scientific 279


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Timer No Pit Method

This method is a variation of the timer method that removes the pit operation. It cycles differently
because no pit valve is present to assist the plunger in arriving to the surface.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 280


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Timer No Pit Method Configuration

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation.


Descriptor: Enter a description of the function or device associated with this calculation.
ID: The flow plunger table ID.
Force to Default: Set all values to factory defaults by clicking in the check box and then clicking
the Apply button.
Flow Control Method: Select Timer No Pit.
Control Command: Select the function to be performed. Options are listed below.
 Abort: Terminate the plunger lift cycle.
 Start: Begin the plunger lift cycle.
 Pause: Suspend the cycle at its current state.
 Resume: Resume the suspended cycle.
 Reset: Reset counters displayed on the Plunger Summary screen.
 Open Pit: Manually open the pit valve.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 281


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

 Close Pit: Manually close the pit valve.


 Open Sales: Manually open the sales valve.
 Close Sales: Manually close the sales valve.
 Out Off Time: Stop the off time countdown and begin looking for the proper conditions
to open the valve.

 Out After Time: Terminate the after flow time countdown and begin a new cycle.
 Force to Off Time: Begin a new cycle at the off time point of the plunger lift algorithm.
 Force to On Time: Begin a new cycle at the on time point of the algorithm. This
command is useful if you do not want to wait for the off time countdown to expire and
you know that the sales valve can be opened immediately.
 Force to Late Time: Begin a new cycle at the late time point of the algorithm. This
command is useful if you need to open the pit valve in order to get the plunger up.
Also, if the After flow on Late Arrival function is enabled, the algorithm will proceed to
the after Flow point once the plunger arrives.
Decrement Off Time: Enter the amount of time to increase off time during the next cycle if a fast
arrival occurs.
Increment Off Time: Enter the amount of time to decrease off time during the next cycle if
anything other than a fast arrival occurs.
Maximum Off Time: Enter the maximum amount of time that off time can be.
Minimum Off Time: Enter the minimum amount of time that off time can be.
Decrement After Flow Time: Enter the amount of time to increase after flow time during the
next cycle if a fast arrival occurs.
Increment After Flow Time: Enter the amount of time to decrease after flow time during the
next cycle if anything other than a fast arrival occurs.
Maximum After Flow Time: Enter the maximum amount of time that after flow time can be.
Minimum After Flow Time: Enter the minimum amount of time that after flow time can be.
PID Loop: This value informs the plunger lift function if PID control is enabled and which PID
control function to use. Making no selection in this field disables the PID control feature. Selecting
1 through 4 designates which of the PID loop functions to use. If this feature is enabled, the sales
(A) valve's open and close points, valve types, solenoid types, and pulse durations are ignored.
Equivalent parameters are set up in the PID itself.
Early Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines an early arrival. The early arrival window is
helpful in determining whether the plunger has been stuck in the tube somewhat close to the
surface. Damage to equipment and even loss of life can occur if the plunger continues to have too
many early arrivals. Use this entry in conjunction with the Maximum Consecutive Early Arrivals
parameter to avoid this scenario.
Fast Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines a fast arrival.
Slow Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines a slow arrival.
Minimum Off Time: This value should be (and almost always is) the amount of time that it takes
for the plunger to get to the bottom and no longer. Because the program waits until minimum off
time times out before doing anything else, it is essential that this value be only the amount of
time necessary for the plunger to reach the bottom. Once minimum off time expires, the program
begins looking at tubing, casing, and line pressures to calculate load ratios.
On Time: Enter the maximum amount of time allowed for the program to bring the plunger up
without recycling for a no arrival condition. This time must be longer than the late arrival time.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 282


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Mandatory Off Time: This value represents the amount of time a well will shut-in during the off-
time portion of the cycle if a no arrival condition occurs (essentially an alternate off-time value for
a plunger that never arrived). This allows for a large amount of pressure to build up so the plunger
can be brought to the surface.
After Flow Time: Enter the amount of time in hh:mm:ss format that the sales valve is open after
the plunger arrives at the top of the well.
Lo/Hi Sales Pressures: The function checks the values entered here against the sales line
pressure for all methods. If the sales line pressure is below the low or above the high, the cycle
will enter into a “Hold” until the conditions clears.
Maximum Consecutive No Arrivals: A typical value for this input is 2 or 3. When a plunger does
not arrive, a no arrival condition occurs. The program tracks the no arrivals and any consecutive
no arrivals. If the well exceeds this value, the well is shut-in until an operator restarts the cycle.
The counter resets when a non-consecutive no arrival condition occurs.
Solenoid Type: Select the solenoid type used to control the valve. Options are listed below.2-
wire: Requires 1 discrete output point (single open/close point).
 3-wire: Requires 2 discrete output points (separate open and close points).
Open Point: The control output point to open the valve.
Close Point: The control output point to close the valve.
A Abort Status: Select the mode to set the valve on when an abort condition occurs. Options are
listed below.
 Fail Closed: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to a closed state.
 Fail Open: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to an open state.
Plunger Sensor: Connect the input point used to sense the plunger UP condition to this field. This
is typically an accumulator point.
Tubing Pressure: Connect the analog input point used to sense the tubing pressure to this field.
Cycles < Maintain: Enter the number of cycles the plunger should complete before requiring
maintenance. A plunger and all of the associated surface equipment have a certain life that can be
measured in cycles (trips up and down the tubing). Once the counter reaches the entered value,
"Plunger Maintenance Needed" is displayed, and the well aborts until an operator restarts the
cycle.
PID Set Point: The flow plunger function provides for PID control of the sales valve using either a
jog/discrete output form of control or by an analog output. This entry (typically in inches of water)
prevents the meter run from being over pressurized when the sales line opens. Once the rate/DP
falls below this value, the PID opens the valve, and it is allowed to flow freely.
PID Cutoff: Enter the cutoff value that the PID algorithm uses to determine when a PID process
variable should be considered zero. Any DP/rate that falls below this value is considered to be zero
by the PID.
A Close-B Open: This flag informs the program if the sales (A) valve should be closed before the
pit (B) valve opens. Due to different piping of plunger lift wells, it may be necessary to keep the
sales valve open or closed when the pit valve is opened.
Sale Leak Check: This flag enables the program to check the sales valve for leaks. During the off
time portion of the cycle, the meter run's DP value is compared against the run's DP cutoff value.
If the DP remains above the cutoff value, continuously for two minutes, the plunger lift processing
is aborted and the run is shut-in.
Low DP Cutoff: This parameter is the low flow cutoff. The flow rate will be forced to zero when
the differential pressure drops below the value entered here.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 283


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Continuous Cycle: This function is used exclusively in the timer no pit method. Enabling the
function causes the software to continue operating during no arrival conditions until the Maximum
Consecutive No Arrivals value is exceeded. Leaving the function disabled causes the software to
abort whenever a no arrival condition occurs.
After Flow Delay Deadband: The amount of time that the method waits after a plunger arrival
to allow fluid to clear from the meter so a false high pressure alarm will not occur.
Meter PT: Select the meter run that the method obtains data (flow rate values, etc.) from.
Casing Pressure: Connect the analog input point used to sense the casing pressure to this field.
Minimum Shut-In Time: Enter the minimum amount of time required for the meter run flow rate
to be below the calculated shut-in rate before the algorithm terminates the cycle and begins a new
cycle.
Analog Fail Time (sec): This entry is a timer value that determines when an analog input has
failed. Some analog input values, such as pressure and temperature, can intermittently spike and
drop to fail conditions. This entry ensures that these normal transient spikes do not result in the
cycle being prematurely aborted.
Maximum Consecutive Early Arrivals: Enter the number of consecutive early arrivals required
to cause the well to shut-in until an operator resets the values in the program.
Plunger Battery: Enter the value that serves as a voltage check so that valve control can be
properly performed. Some types of valve motors require a considerable amount of power to
control them. If the unit's battery voltage is below this value, you can assume that there is not
enough power to control the valves without affecting the normal flow computer operation.
Battery Voltage Setting: The battery voltage must be above this value or the plunger will abort.
PLC Callout Point: This point is tied to the Force Callout field in Table #66 to make it callout in
the event of a plunger lift abort.
Log Interval: Determine how often the system records the plunger history of the well and enter
this time in minutes. Entering 0 disables this function.
After Flow on Late Arrival: If a plunger arrives as the plunger function is blowing to the pit
valve and if this function is enabled, the program either recycles and goes to off time or closes the
pit valve and enters after flow.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 284


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Sequence of Events for Timer No Pit Method

The flow control plunger timer no pit method can be described in the following sequence of events.
1. Cycle Initialization
At the start of a cycle, the function updates the status of the consecutive no arrivals and
the consecutive early arrivals based on the last cycle's arrival. It then ensures that the on
time is longer than the slow arrival time and that the slow arrival time is longer than the
fast arrival time. The function then checks if the increment and decrement load factors are
within the maximum and minimum load factor values (0 disables these factors). It also
checks if the increment and decrement after flow time values are within the maximum and
minimum after flow time values (0 disables these factors). If any value falls outside the
stated boundaries then the process is aborted and an error message is displayed. Once
these checks have been performed, a command to close the sales (A) and pit (B) valves is
issued. This ensures that the valves are closed, and the off time phase of the sequence
can begin.
2. Off Time
This portion of the sequence begins with a determination of how long the shut-in period
should be. The minimum off time value is used in two cases: (1) if the previous arrival was
anything otherthan a no arrival or (2) if the cycle just started by a user or Host command.
The mandatory off time value is used if the previous arrival was a no arrival.
If the Sales Leak Check option is enabled, the software checks if the run's flow rate is
above the run's DP cutoff. If the run is flowing for more than two minutes, the function
aborts and waits for user intervention. When off time expires, the function checks the
sales line pressure. If the pressure is below the high line pressure value, then the on time
portion of the cycle begins. If the sales line pressure is greater than or equal to this value,
the function logs an alarm and holds until the pressure value drops below this limit.
3. On Time
The software begins the on time portion of the cycle by opening the sales valve. It then
waits for the plunger to arrive at the surface. If the plunger point is not defined, the
software waits for the on-time timer to expire and then starts a new cycle.
If the plunger arrives before what is considered a "slow" window, the proper time and
arrive type (fast, early, normal) is logged. If the total number of consecutive early arrivals
is greater than or equal to the value entered for Maximum Consecutive Early Arrivals, the
cycle aborts and waits for user intervention. If the arrival time is earlier than the early
arrival time, the function restarts the cycle (without modifying the after flow timer) to
allow the plunger more time to drop.
If the plunger arrives before the slow window, the software moves into the after flow
portion of the cycle. If the plunger arrives after the slow window, the software moves to
the slow phase of the cycle. If the slow timer expires and no plunger sensor point is
defined, the software starts a new cycle. Once the arrival time for the plunger is
determined, the software adjusts the after flow time for this cycle.
If the plunger is a late, slow, or no arrival, the off-time and after flow increment values
are added to the corresponding values. If the plunger is an early or fast arrival, the off
time decrement and after flow values are subtracted from the corresponding values.
4. After Flow
At the start of the after flow portion of the cycle, the software resets the counter for
consecutive no arrivals. The on time value is saved, and the after flow timer starts. The
sales line pressure value is compared to the line pressure and shuts in and recycles if the
static line pressure value is exceeded. The software continues checking the sales line
pressure and waiting for the after flow timer to expire. Once this happens, the software
shuts in and starts a new cycle.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 285


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

5. Late Arrival
The late phase of the cycle begins with the software waiting for the plunger to arrive until
the total on-time timer expires. If this occurs, the software adjusts the after flow and off-
time timers and starts a new cycle. If the total number of consecutive no arrivals is
greater than or equal to the value entered for Maximum Consecutive No Arrivals, the
software aborts the cycle and waits for user intervention. No pit valve exists so no
additional control can be done.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 286


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Sample Configuration for Timer No Pit Method

1. Cold start the unit and create a configuration.


2. Set up one orifice meter run (DP Flow Calculation table).
3. From the navigation bar, go to Calculations > 65-Plunger Lift.
4. Assume that the following values represent the current state of the well:
 Static Pressure = 200
 Temperature = 150

 DP = 50
 Casing Pressure (if applicable): 90
 Tubing Pressure: 72
 Plunger Drop Time: 1 minute
5. Enter the following suggested starting values:
 Flow Control Method: Timer No Pit
 Slow Arrival Time: 2 minutes
 Fast Arrival Time: 1 minute
 Off Time: 1 minute
 On Time: 4 minutes
 Plunger Sensor: Accumulator #1 (preferable) or Discrete Input #1
 After Flow Time: 1 minute
 Analog Fail Time: 0

 Decrement Off: 10 seconds


 Increment Off: 10 seconds
 Maximum Off: 1 minute, 30 seconds
 Minimum Off: 30 seconds
 Decrement After: 10 seconds
 Increment After: 10 seconds
 Maximum After: 1 minute, 30 seconds
 Minimum After: 30 seconds
 Mandatory Y/N: Enabled

Thermo Fisher Scientific 287


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Manual Method

This method uses one or a combination of the following to determine when to open the sales valve:
analog pressures, the difference of pressures, and/or a minimum off timer. It uses one or a
combination of the following to determine when to close the sales valve and end the cycle: analog
pressures, the difference of pressures, flow rates, and/or a maximum on-time.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 288


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Manual Method Configuration

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation.


Descriptor: Enter a description of the function or device associated with this calculation.
ID: The flow plunger table ID.
Force to Default: Set all values to factory defaults by clicking in the check box and then clicking
the Apply button.
Flow Control Method: Select Manual.
Control Command: Select the function to be performed. Options are listed below.
 Abort: Terminate the plunger lift cycle.
 Start: Begin the plunger lift cycle.
 Pause: Suspend the cycle at its current state.
 Resume: Resume the suspended cycle.
 Reset: Reset counters displayed on the Plunger Summary screen.
 Open Pit: Manually open the pit valve.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 289


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

 Close Pit: Manually close the pit valve.


 Open Sales: Manually open the sales valve.
 Close Sales: Manually close the sales valve.
 Out Off-Time: Stop the off-time countdown and begin looking for the proper conditions
to open the valve.

 Out After Time: Terminate the afterflow time countdown and begin a new cycle.
 Strt@OFFTIME: Begin a new cycle at the off-time point of the plunger lift algorithm.
 Strt@ONTIME: Begin a new cycle at the on-time point of the algorithm. This command
is useful if you do not want to wait for the off-time countdown to expire and you know
that the sales valve can be opened immediately.
 Strt@LATE: Begin a new cycle at the late-time point of the algorithm. This command is
useful if you need to open the pit valve in order to get the plunger up. Also, if the
Afterflow on Late Arrival function is enabled, the algorithm will proceed to the afterflow
point once the plunger arrives.
Early Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines an early arrival. The early arrival window is
helpful in determining whether the plunger has been stuck in the tube somewhat close to the
surface. Damage to equipment and even loss of life can occur if the plunger continues to have too
many early arrivals. Use this entry in conjunction with the Maximum Consecutive Early Arrivals
parameter to avoid this scenario.
Fast Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines a fast arrival.
Slow Arrival Time: Enter the time that defines a slow arrival.
Minimum Off Time: This value should be the amount of time it takes for the plunger to get to
the bottom and no longer. Because the program waits until minimum off time times out before
doing anything else, it is essential that this value be only the amount of time necessary for the
plunger to reach the bottom. Once minimum off time expires, the program begins looking at
tubing, case, and line pressure to calculation load ratios.
Pit Delay: Enter the amount of time in minutes allowed for the plunger to arrive after a slow
arrival but before the pit valve opens. The arrival is considered late once the pit valve opens.
PID Loop: This value informs the plunger lift function if PID control is enabled and which PID
control function to use. Making no selection in this field disables the PID control feature. Selecting
1 through 4 designates which of the PID loop functions to use. If this feature is enabled, the sales
(A) valve's open and close points, valve types, solenoid types, and pulse durations are ignored.
Equivalent parameters are set up in the PID itself.
Maximum On Time:Enter the maximum amount of time allowed for the program to bring the
plunger up without recycling for a no arrival condition. This time must be longer than the late
arrival time.
Mandatory Off Time: This value represents the amount of time a well will shut-in during the off
time portion of the cycle if a no arrival condition occurs (essentially, an alternate off-time value for
a plunger that never arrived). This allows for a large amount of pressure to build up so the plunger
can be brought to the surface.
After Flow Time: Enter the amount of time in hh:mm:ss format that the sales valve is open after
the plunger arrives at the top of the well.
Lo/Hi Sales Pressures: The function checks the values entered here against the sales line
pressure for all methods. If the sales line pressure is below the low or above the high, the cycle
will enter into a “Hold” until the conditions clears.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 290


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Maximum Consecutive No Arrivals: A typical value for this input is 2 or 3. When a plunger does
not arrive, a no arrival condition occurs. The program tracks the no arrivals and any consecutive
no arrivals. If the well exceeds this value, the well is shut-in until an operator restarts the cycle.
The counter resets when a non-consecutive no arrival condition occurs.
Flow Logic: Select the logical function of the flow casing set point. Options are listed below.
 OR: The count or limit value must be above zero.

 AND: Applies in the same manner as OR except all chosen conditions must be
satisfied.
Flow Casing Timer: Enter the number of seconds that flow casing pressure must be above the
flow casing pressure set point in order to enable this point in the logic.
Flow Casing Limit (>): This value is the casing pressure set point. The flow casing must exceed
this value before the sales valve opens. If left at zero, the plunger operates only on a time basis.
Flow Tubing Timer: Enter the number of seconds that tubing pressure must be above the tubing
pressure set point in order to enable this point in the logic.
Flow Tubing Limit (>): This value is the tubing pressure set point. The flow tubing must exceed
this value before the sales valve opens. If left at zero, the plunger operates only on a time basis.
Flow C-T DP Timer: Enter the number of seconds that flow C-T DP (casing pressure - tubing
pressure DP) must be below the flow C-T DP set point in order to enable this point in the logic.
Flow C-T DP Limit (<): This value is the flow C-T DP set point. The flow C-T DP must fall below
this value before the sales valve opens. If left at zero, the plunger operates only on a time basis.
Flow T-L DP Timer: Enter the number of seconds that flow T-L DP (tubing pressure - line
pressure DP) must be above the flow T-L DP set point in order to enable this point in the logic.
Flow T-L DP Limit (>): This value is the flow T-L DP set point. The flow T-L DP must exceed this
value before the sales valve opens. If left at zero, the plunger operates only on a time basis.
Flow C-L DP Timer: Enter the number of seconds that flow C-L DP (casing pressure - line
pressure DP) must be above the flow C-L DP set point in order to enable this point in the logic.
Flow C-L DP Limit (>): This value is the flow C-L DP set point. The flow C-L DP must exceed this
value before the sales valve opens. If left at zero, the plunger operates only on a time basis.
Shut Logic: Select the logical function of the shut set points.
 OR: The count or limit value must be above zero.
 AND: Applies in the same manner as OR except all chosen conditions must be
satisfied.
Shut Casing Timer: Enter the number of seconds that the shut casing pressure must be below
the shut casing pressure set point in order to enable this point in the logic.
Shut Casing Limit (<): This value is the shut casing pressure set point. The shut casing pressure
must fall below this value before the shut-in valve opens. If left at zero, the plunger operates only
on a time basis.
Shut Tubing Timer: Enter the number of seconds that the shut tubing pressure must be below
the shut tubing pressure set point in order to enable this point in the logic.
Shut Tubing Limit (<): This value is the shut tubing pressure set point. The shut tubing
pressure must fall below this value before the shut-in valve opens. If left at zero, the plunger
operates only on a time basis.
Shut C-T DP Timer: Enter the number of seconds that shut C-T DP (casing pressure - tubing
pressure DP) must be above the shut C-T DP set point in order to enable this point in the logic.
Shut C-T DP Limit (>): This value is the shut C-T DP set point. The shut C-T DP must exceed
this value before the shut-in valve opens. If left at zero, the plunger operates only on a time basis.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 291


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Shut T-L DP Timer: Enter the number of seconds that shut T-L DP (tubing pressure - line
pressure DP) must be above the shut T-L DP set point in order to enable this point in the logic.
Shut T-L DP Limit (<): This value is the shut T-L DP set point. The shut T-L DP must fall below
this value before the shut-in valve opens. If left at zero, the plunger operates only on a time basis.
Shut C-L DP Timer: Enter the number of seconds that shut C-L DP (casing pressure - line
pressure DP) must be above the shut C-L DP set point in order to enable this point in the logic.
Shut C-L DP Limit (<): This value is the shut C-L DP set point. The shut C-L DP must fall below
this value before the shut-in valve opens. If left at zero, the plunger operates only on a time basis.
Shut Rate Timer: Enter the number of seconds that the shut rate must be below the shut rate
set point in order to enable this point in the logic.
Shut Rate Limit (<): This value is the shut rate set point. The shut rate must fall below this
value before the shut-in valve opens. If left at zero, the plunger operates only on a time basis.
Solenoid Type: Select the solenoid type used to control the valve. Options are listed below.
 2-wire: Requires 1 discrete output point (single open/close point).
 3-wire: Requires 2 discrete output points (separate open and close points).
Open Point: The control output point to open the valve.
Close Point: The control output point to close the valve.
A Abort Status: Select the mode to set the valve on when an abort condition occurs. Options are
listed below.
 Fail Closed: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to a closed state.
 Fail Open: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to an open state.
Solenoid Type: Select the solenoid type used to control the valve. Options are listed below.

 2-wire: Requires 1 discrete output point (single open/close point).


 3-wire: Requires 2 discrete output points (separate open and close points).
Open Point: The control output point to open the valve.
Close Point: The control output point to close the valve.
B Abort Status: Select the mode to set the valve on when an abort condition occurs. Options are
listed below.
 Fail Closed: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to a closed state.
 Fail Open: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to an open state.
Tubing Pressure: Select the flow computer analog input point used to sense the tubing pressure.
Cycles < Maintain: Enter the number of cycles the plunger should complete before requiring
maintenance. A plunger and all of the associated surface equipment have a certain life that can be
measured in cycles (trips up and down the tubing). Once the counter reaches the entered value,
"Plunger Maintenance Needed" is displayed, and the well aborts until an operator restarts the
cycle.
PID Set Point: The flow plunger function provides for PID control of the sales valve using either a
jog/discrete output form of control or by an analog output. This entry (typically in inches of water)
prevents the meter run from being over pressurized when the sales line opens. Once the rate/DP
falls below this value, the PID opens the valve, and it is allowed to flow freely.
PID Cutoff: Enter the cutoff value that the PID algorithm uses to determine when a PID process
variable should be considered zero. Any DP/rate that falls below this value is considered to be zero
by the PID.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 292


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Plunger Sensor: If enabled, the software detects whether a plunger arrives or not. The function
uses status input and accumulator input types to detect arrivals.
DP Cutoff Alarm: This flag is used to disable the logging of a DP cutoff alarm to the meter run
alarm log. Normally, for the meter run volume calculation a DP cutoff alarm is logged into a
meter's alarm log if the DP for that meter run drops below the DP cutoff value for a certain
amount of time. Thus, it may be desirable to disable the logging of this alarm.
A Close-B Open: This flag informs the program if the sales (A) valve should be closed before the
pit (B) valve opens. Due to different piping of plunger lift wells, it may be necessary to keep the
sales valve open or closed when the pit valve is opened.
Sale Leak Check: This flag enables the program to check the sales valve for leaks. During the off
time portion of the cycle, the meter run's DP value is compared against the run's DP cutoff value.
If the DP remains above the cutoff value, continuously for two minutes, the plunger lift processing
is aborted and the run is shut-in.
Low DP Cutoff: This parameter is the low flow cutoff. The flow rate will be forced to zero when
the differential pressure drops below the value entered here.
After Flow Delay Deadband:The amount of time that the method waits after a plunger arrival to
allow fluid to clear from the meter so a false high pressure alarm will not occur.
Meter PT: Select the meter run that the method obtains data (flow rate values, etc.) from.
Casing Pressure: Select the flow computer analog input point used to sense the casing pressure.
Analog Fail Time (sec): This entry is a timer value that determines when an analog input has
failed. Some analog input values, such as pressure and temperature, can intermittently spike and
drop to fail conditions. This entry ensures that these normal transient spikes do not result in the
cycle being prematurely aborted.
Maximum Consecutive Early Arrivals: Enter the number of consecutive early arrivals required
to cause the well to shut-in until an operator resets the values in the program.
Plunger Battery: Enter the value that serves as a voltage check so that valve control can be
properly performed. Some types of valve motors require a considerable amount of power to
control them. If the unit's battery voltage is below this value, you can assume that there is not
enough power to control the valves without affecting the normal flow computer operation.
Battery Voltage Setting: The battery voltage must be above this value or the plunger will abort.
PLC Callout Point: This point is tied to the Force Callout field in Table #66 to make it callout in
the event of a plunger lift abort.
Log Interval: Determine how often the system records the plunger history of the well and enter
this time in minutes. Entering 0 disables this function.
After Flow on Late Arrival: If a plunger arrives as the plunger function is blowing to the pit
valve and if this function is enabled, the program either recycles and goes to off time or closes the
pit valve and enters after flow.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 293


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Sequence of Events for Manual Method

The flow control plunger manual method can be described in the following sequence of events.
1. Cycle Initialization
At the start of a cycle, the function updates the status of the consecutive no arrivals and
the consecutive early arrivals based on the last cycle's arrival. It then ensures that the on
time is longer than the slow arrival time and that the slow arrival time is longer than the
fast arrival time. If any value falls outside the stated boundaries, the process is aborted
and an error message is displayed. Once these checks have been performed, a command
to close the sales (A) and pit (B) valves is issued. This ensures that the valves are closed,
and the off time phase of the sequence can begin.
2. Off Time
This portion of the sequence begins with a determination of how long the shut-in period
should be. The minimum off time value is used in two cases: (1) if the previous arrival was
anything other than a no arrival or (2) if the cycle just started by a user or Host command.
The mandatory off time value is used if the previous arrival was a no arrival.
If the Sales Leak Check option is enabled, the software checks if the run's flow rate is
above the run's DP cutoff. If the run is flowing for more than two minutes, the function
aborts and waits for user intervention. When off time expires, the function begins
evaluating the user-configured parameters in order to move to the on time portion and
open the sales valve.
When the software determines that the sales valve can be opened based on the
combination of pressures that are logically together (via AND or OR operations), the
function checks the sales line pressure. If the pressure is below the high line pressure
value, the on time portion of the cycle begins. If the sales line pressure is greater than or
equal to this value, the function logs an alarm and holds until the pressure value drops
below this limit.
3. On Time
The software begins the on time portion of the cycle by opening the sales valve. It then
waits for the plunger to arrive at the surface. If the plunger point is not defined, the
software moves immediately to the after flow portion of the cycle.
If the plunger arrives before what is considered a "slow" window, the proper time and
arrival type (fast, early, normal) is logged. If the total number of consecutive early arrivals
is greater than or equal to the maximum consecutive early arrivals value, the cycle aborts
and waits for user intervention. If the arrival time is earlier than the early arrival time, the
function restarts the cycle (without modifying the Turner Rate and load factor) to allow the
plunger more time to drop.
If the plunger arrives before the slow window, the software moves into the after flow
portion of the cycle. If the plunger arrives after the slow window, the software moves to
the slow phase of the cycle. If the slow timer expires and no plunger sensor point is
defined, the software starts a new cycle.
4. After Flow
At the start of the after flow portion of the cycle, the software resets the counter for
consecutive no arrivals. The on time value is saved, and the after flow timer starts. The
sales line pressure value is compared to the line pressure and shuts in and recycles if the
static line pressure value is exceeded. The software continues checking the sales line
pressure. Once the shut-in logic is satisfied based on the combination of pressures that
are logically together (via AND or OR operations), the software shuts in and starts a new
cycle.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 294


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

5. Slow/Late Arrival
The slow phase of the cycle begins with the software looking at the pit delay time. A non-
zero value defines a slow arrival window, as opposed to a late arrival. In the slow phase,
the software waits an additional amount of time to give the plunger more time before the
pit valve opens. If the plunger arrives within this window, the software enters the after
flow phase of the cycle.
If the plunger does not arrive within this window, the command to open the pit valve is
issued. If the A Close - B Open option is enabled, the sales valve closes and the pit valve
opens. If this option is disabled, the sales valve remains open. This is to accommodate
various piping methods at the wellhead.
Once the pit valve opens, the late phase of the cycle begins. In this phase, the software
continues waiting for the plunger to arrive until the total on-time timer expires. If this
occurs, the software starts a new cycle. If the total number of consecutive no arrivals is
greater than or equal to the value entered for Maximum Consecutive No Arrivals, the
software aborts the cycle and waits for user intervention.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 295


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Intermittent Method

This method is a radical variation of the timer method in that it basically becomes a clock for the sales
valve. It shuts in for a user-defined time and then opens the sales valve at a user-defined time. This
method is normally used on newly drilled wells in order to gather enough information to select a more
appropriate method later.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 296


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Intermittent Method Configuration

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation.


Descriptor: Enter a description of the function or device associated with this calculation.
ID: The flow plunger table ID.
Force Default: Set all values to factory defaults by clicking in the check box and then clicking the
Apply button.
Control Command: Select the function to be performed. Options are listed below.
 Abort: Terminate the plunger lift cycle.
 Start: Begin the plunger lift cycle.
 Pause: Suspend the cycle at its current state.
 Resume: Resume the suspended cycle.
 Reset: Reset counters displayed on the Plunger Summary screen.
 Open Pit: Manually open the pit valve.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 297


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

 Close Pit: Manually close the pit valve.


 Open Sales: Manually open the sales valve.
 Close Sales: Manually close the sales valve.
 Out Off Time: Stop the off time countdown and begin looking for the proper conditions
to open the valve.

 Out After Time: Terminate the after flow time countdown and begin a new cycle.
 Force to Off Time: Begin a new cycle at the off time point of the plunger lift algorithm.
 Force to On Time: Begin a new cycle at the on time point of the algorithm. This
command is useful if you do not want to wait for the off time countdown to expire and
you know that the sales valve can be opened immediately.
 Force to Late Time: Begin a new cycle at the late time point of the algorithm. This
command is useful if you need to open the pit valve in order to get the plunger up.
Also, if the After Flow on Late Arrival function is enabled, the algorithm will proceed to
the after flow point once the plunger arrives.
PID Loop: This value informs the plunger lift function if PID control is enabled and which PID
control function to use. Making no selection in this field disables the PID control feature. Selecting
1 through 4 designates which of the PID loop functions to use. If this feature is enabled, the sales
(A) valve's open and close points, valve types, solenoid types, and pulse durations are ignored.
Equivalent parameters are set up in the PID itself.
Minimum Off Time: This value should be the amount of time it takes for the plunger to get to
the bottom and no longer. Because the program waits until minimum off time times out before
doing anything else, it is essential that this value be only the amount of time necessary for the
plunger to reach the bottom. Once minimum off time expires, the program begins looking at
tubing, case, and line pressure to calculation load ratios.
Maximum On Time: Enter the maximum amount of time allowed for the program to bring the
plunger up without recycling for a no arrival condition. This time must be longer than the late
arrival time.
Lo/Hi Sales Pressures: The function checks the values entered here against the sales line
pressure for all methods. If the sales line pressure is below the low or above the high, the cycle
will enter into a “Hold” until the conditions clears.
Solenoid Type: Select the solenoid type used to control the valve. Options are listed below.
 2-wire: Requires 1 discrete output point (single open/close point).
 3-wire: Requires 2 discrete output points (separate open and close points).
Open Point: The control output point to open the valve.
Close Point: The control output point to close the valve.
A Abort Status: Select the mode to set the valve on when an abort condition occurs. Options are
listed below.

 Fail Closed: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to a closed state.
 Fail Open: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to an open state.
Solenoid Type: Select the solenoid type used to control the valve. Options are listed below.2-
wire: Requires 1 discrete output point (single open/close point).
 3-wire: Requires 2 discrete output points (separate open and close points).
Open Point: The control output point to open the valve.
Close Point: The control output point to close the valve.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 298


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

B Abort Status: Select the mode to set the valve on when an abort condition occurs. Options are
listed below.

 Fail Closed: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to a closed state.
 Fail Open: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to an open state.
Tubing Pressure: Connect the analog input point used to sense the tubing pressure to this field.
Cycles < Maintain: Enter the number of cycles the plunger should complete before requiring
maintenance. A plunger and all of the associated surface equipment have a certain life that can be
measured in cycles (trips up and down the tubing). Once the counter reaches the entered value,
"Plunger Maintenance Needed" is displayed, and the well aborts until an operator restarts the
cycle.
PID Set Point: The flow plunger function provides for PID control of the sales valve using a
jog/discrete output form of control or by an analog output. This entry (typically in inches of water)
prevents the meter run from being over pressurized when the sales line opens. Once the rate/DP
falls below this value, the PID opens the valve, and it is allowed to flow freely.
PID Cutoff: Enter the cutoff value that the PID algorithm uses to determine when a PID process
variable should be considered zero. Any DP/rate that falls below this value is considered to be zero
by the PID.
A Close-B Open: This flag informs the program if the sales (A) valve should be closed before the
pit (B) valve opens. Due to different piping of plunger lift wells, it may be necessary to keep the
sales valve open or closed when the pit valve is opened.
Meter PT: Select the meter run that the method obtains data (flow rate values, etc.) from.
Casing Pressure: Connect the analog input point used to sense the casing pressure to this field.
Plunger Battery: Enter the value that serves as a voltage check so that valve control can be
properly performed. Some types of valve motors require a considerable amount of power to
control them. If the unit's battery voltage is below this value, you can assume that there is not
enough power to control the valves without affecting the normal flow computer operation.
Battery Voltage Setting: The battery voltage must be above this value or the plunger will abort.
Log Interval: Determine how often the system records the plunger history of the well and enter
this time in minutes. Entering 0 disables this function. Maximum interval time is 254 minutes.
After Flow Delay Deadband: The amount of time that the method waits after a plunger arrival
to allow fluid to clear from the meter so a false high pressure alarm will not occur.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 299


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Sequence of Events for Intermittent Method

The flow control plunger intermittent method can be described in the following sequence of events.
1. Cycle Initialization
A command to close the sales (A) and pit (B) valves is issued. This ensures that the valves
are closed, and the off time phase of the sequence can begin.
2. Off Time
The minimum off time is always used as the timer value for this method. When off time
expires, the function checks the sales line pressure. If the pressure is below the high line
pressure value, then the on time portion of the cycle begins. If the sales line pressure is
greater than or equal to this value, the function logs an alarm and holds until the pressure
value drops below this limit.
3. On Time
The software begins this portion by opening the sales valve. When on time expires, the
software simply cycles, starting a new cycle. During the on time phase, the software
constantly monitors the sales line pressure and compares it to the high line pressure value.
If this limit is exceeded, the software logs an alarm and starts a new cycle.
This method has no after flow, slow arrivals, late arrivals, etc., but it does allow you to
control the pit valve even though the pit valve is not used in this method. This enables you
to set up a simpler intermittent method and still force the plunger up to the surface using
the pit. Later, you have the option of moving to one of the more advanced methods of
plunger lift control.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 300


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Gas Lift Method

The gas lift method cycles between four states:

1. "A" Valve Close and "B" Valve Open

2. "A" Valve Open and "B" Valve Open

3. "A" Valve Open and "B" Valve Close

4. "A" Valve Close and "B" Valve Close

Thermo Fisher Scientific 301


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Gas Lift Method Configuration

Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation.


Descriptor: Enter a description of the function or device associated with this calculation.
ID: The flow plunger table ID.
Force Default: Set all values to factory defaults by clicking in the check box and then clicking the
Apply button.
Control Command: Select the function to be performed. Options are listed below.
 Abort: Terminate the plunger lift cycle.
 Start: Begin the plunger lift cycle.
 Pause: Suspend the cycle at its current state.
 Resume: Resume the suspended cycle.
 Reset: Reset counters displayed on the Plunger Summary screen.
 Open Pit: Manually open the pit valve.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 302


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

 Close Pit: Manually close the pit valve.


 Open Sales: Manually open the sales valve.
 Close Sales: Manually close the sales valve.
 Out Off Time: Stop the off time countdown and begin looking for the proper conditions
to open the valve.

 Out After Time: Terminate the after flow time countdown and begin a new cycle.
 Force to Off Time: Begin a new cycle at the off time point of the plunger lift algorithm.
 Force to On Time: Begin a new cycle at the on time point of the algorithm. This
command is useful if you do not want to wait for the off time countdown to expire and
you know that the sales valve can be opened immediately.
 Force to Late Time: Begin a new cycle at the late time point of the algorithm. This
command is useful if you need to open the pit valve in order to get the plunger up.
Also, if the After Flow on Late Arrival function is enabled, the algorithm will proceed to
the after flow point once the plunger arrives.
PID Loop: This value informs the plunger lift function if PID control is enabled and which PID
control function to use. Making no selection in this field disables the PID control feature. Selecting
1 through 4 designates which of the PID loop functions to use. If this feature is enabled, the "A"
valve's open and close points, valve types, solenoid types, and pulse durations are ignored.
Equivalent parameters are set up in the PID itself.
AC & BO Time: The amount of time that the function stays in this state ("A" closed and "B"
open).
AO & BO Time: The amount of time that the function stays in this state ("A" open and "B" open)
AO & BC Time: The amount of time that the function stays in this state ("A" open and "B"
closed).
AC & BC Time: The amount of time that the function stays in this state ("A" closed and "B"
closed).
Lo/Hi Sales Pressures: The function checks the values entered here against the sales line
pressure for all methods. If the sales line pressure is below the low or above the high, the cycle
will enter into a “Hold” until the conditions clears.
Alarm Delay Timer: Alarm conditions are checked against the timer value entered here. If the
alarm condition exists continuously for this length of time, then the alarm path of the code is
taken.
Abort Timer: This is a value that will cause the gas lift method to abort after certain alarm
conditions are set to zero. If it is non-zero, the value acts as a retry counter that allows the
program to continue execution after it has expired.
Solenoid Type: Select the solenoid type used to control the valve. Options are listed below.
 2-wire: Requires 1 discrete output point (single open/close point).
 3-wire: Requires 2 discrete output points (separate open and close points).
Open Point: The control output point to open the valve.
Close Point: The control output point to close the valve.
A Abort Status: Select the mode to set the "A" valve on when an abort condition occurs. Options
are listed below.
 Fail Closed: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to a closed state.
 Fail Open: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to an open state.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 303


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Solenoid Type: Select the solenoid type used to control the valve. Options are listed below.
 2-wire: Requires 1 discrete output point (single open/close point).
 3-wire: Requires 2 discrete output points (separate open and close points).
Open Point: The control output point to open the valve.
Close Point: The control output point to close the valve.
B Abort Status: Select the mode to set the "B" valve on when an abort condition occurs. Options
are listed below.

 Fail Closed: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to a closed state.
 Fail Open: Set or pulse the discrete output to force the valve to an open state.
Plunger Sensor: Connect the input point used to sense the plunger UP condition to this field. This
is typically an accumulator point.
Tubing Pressure: Connect the analog input point used to sense the tubing pressure to this field.
Cycles < Maintain: Enter the number of cycles the plunger should complete before requiring
maintenance. A plunger and all of the associated surface equipment have a certain life that can be
measured in cycles (trips up and down the tubing). Once the counter reaches the entered value,
"Plunger Maintenance Needed" is displayed, and the well aborts until an operator restarts the
cycle.
Casing Hi Limit: The casing pressure cannot be above this value before opening the "A" valve.
Tubing Hi Limit: The tubing pressure cannot go above this value before opening the "A" valve.
Tubing Low Limit: The tubing pressure cannot go below this value before opening the "A" valve.
Side Pressure: This is a measured value of a small tube that extends to the bottom of the well
and measures the height of the fluid by measuring the tube pressure.
Max Highs: This value indicates the maximum number of tubing high alarms that can occur
before the program aborts.
Meter PT: Select the meter run that the method obtains data (flow rate values, etc.) from.
Casing Pressure: Connect the analog input point used to sense the casing pressure to this field.
Plunger Battery: Enter the value that serves as a voltage check so that valve control can be
properly performed. Some types of valve motors require a considerable amount of power to
control them. If the unit's battery voltage is below this value, you can assume that there is not
enough power to control the valves without affecting the normal flow computer operation.
Battery Voltage Setting: The battery voltage must be above this value or the plunger will abort.
Log Interval: Determine how often the system records the plunger history of the well and enter
this time in minutes. Entering 0 disables this function. Maximum interval time is 254 minutes.
Deadband Timer: The timer value that defines a late arrival of a plunger (if one is being used). If
this value is set to zero the method will abort on a no arrival.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 304


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Sequence of Events for Gas Lift Plunger Method

Upon initialization of the gas lift method, the "A" valve (or injection valve) is closed and the "B" valve
(or equalization valve) is opened. In its simplest operation, the function cycles through four valve
states delaying at each stage for a specified period of time.
After initialization, the sequence is as follows:
Stage 1) Delay the for the “A” Close “B” Open (ACBO) time.
Open “A” valve.
Stage 2) Delay the for the “A” Open “B” Open (AOBO) time.
Close “B” valve.
Stage 3) Delay the for the “A” Open “B” Closed (AOBC) time.
Close “A” valve.
Stage 4) Delay the for the “A” Close “B” Closed (AOBC) time.
Open “B” valve.
Go back to Stage 1.
If parameters have been set to non-zero values then additional tests will be performed. These
parameters are Casing High Limit, Tubing High, Tubing Low Limit, Max Tubing Highs Limit, Alarm
Delay Timer, Abort Timer and Deadband Timer. The associated logic for these parameters is executed
in Stage 1 (“A” Close “B” Open).
If the Casing High Alarm Limit is set to a non-zero value, the function will test the casing pressure
against this value. If the casing value is continuously higher then this limit for a period of time
determined by the Alarm Delay, then the function will close the “B” valve and enter into a dormant
state. Once the casing pressure has dropped below the casing limit value for the Alarm Delay time the
“B valve will be opened and the operation will pick up where it left off.
If the Tubing High Alarm Limit is set to a non-zero value, the function will test the tubing pressure
against this value. If the tubing value is continuously higher than this limit for a period of time
determined by the Alarm Delay, then the function will close “B” valve and enter into a dormant state.
Once the tubing pressure has dropped below the tubing limit value for the Alarm Delay time, the “B
valve will be opened and the operation will pick up where it left off.
The number of high tubing events is recorded. Once the number of high tubing alarms exceeds the
Max Tubing Highs value, the function will either abort the gas lift function or enter a timing delay
based on the Abort Timer value. For a value of zero the function aborts gas lift operations. For a non-
zero value the function will delay for the number of seconds specified by the Abort timer, open the “B”
valve, and continue operation from where it left off.
If the Tubing Low Alarm Limit is set to a non-zero value, the function will test the tubing pressure
against this value. If the tubing value is continuously lower than this limit for a period of time
determined by the Alarm Delay, then the function will close the “B” valve and will either abort the gas
lift function or enter a timing delay based on the Abort Timer value. For a value of zero the function
aborts gas lift operations. For a non-zero value the function will delay for the number of seconds
specified by the Abort timer, open the “B” valve and continue operation from where it left off.
If a plunger arrival point has been specified, the program will mark each cycle with a fast, normal,
slow or no arrival type:
If the plunger arrives while in Stage 3, the arrival type is considered a fast arrival.
If the plunger arrives while in Stage 4, the arrival type is considered a normal arrival.
If the deadband timer parameter is set to a zero value and the plunger has not arrived by the
end of Stage 4, then the function will abort the gas lift function. If the deadband timer is set to
a non-zero value then the function enters into a delay period waiting for the plunger to arrive.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 305


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

If the plunger arrives while in this deadband timer period, the arrival type is considered a late
arrival.
If the timer expires, the arrival type is considered a no arrival type.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 306


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Instantaneous Data for Flow Control Plunger

The Instantaneous Data display is the same for each flow control plunger type.

Control Status: The control command currently in effect.


KB Timer: The time remaining in the current state of the current cycle.
KB IND: The current state of the current cycle.
State: This is a debug value that displays in hexadecimal format the specific place in the plunger
lift code that is executing.
Current Message: Displays messages pertaining to current activity in the well. Examples include:
Casing < Line, Tubing < Line, Hi Line Pressure, and Open Sales Valve.
Plunger Arrival: Displays whether or not the plunger has arrived during this cycle.
Current State: Displays what state the total plunger lift operation is currently in. Examples
include: Off Time, Open Loop, and After Flow.
Total Time: The amount of time that has elapsed during the current cycle.
A State: Displays whether the valve A (typically the sales valve) is open or closed.
Casing Pressure: The current casing pressure being measured at the site.
Tubing Pressure: The current tubing pressure being measured at the site.
Line Pressure: The current pressure of the sales line.
Line Temperature: The current temperature of the sales line in °F.
Current Pit Delay Time: The amount of pit delay time that has elapsed during the current cycle.
Current On-Time: The amount of on-time that has elapsed during the current cycle.
Side Pressure A Open: This value is specific to the Gas Lift method that displays the pressure of
a small tube that extends to the bottom of the well.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 307


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Current After Flow Time: The amount of after flow time that has elapsed during the current
cycle.
B State: Displays whether the B valve (typically the pit valve) is open or closed.
Flow Rate: The current flow rate into the sales line in engineering units.
Shut-In Rate: The shut-in rate as calculated by the computer.
C-T Differential Pressure: The difference between the current casing pressure and current
tubing pressure.
C-L Differential Pressure: The difference between the current casing pressure and current line
pressure.
T-L Differential Pressure: The difference between the current tubing pressure and current line
pressure.
Current Load Ratio: The load ratio in use in the current cycle.
Current Off Time: The amount of off time that has elapsed during the current cycle.
Current Arrival Time: The amount of time in the total arrival time window that has elapsed
during the current cycle. When the plunger arrives, this timer freezes.
Last Load Ratio: The load ratio from the previous cycle.
2nd Load Ratio: The load ratio from two cycles ago.
Casing Pressure at Off Time: The casing pressure during the off-time portion of the current
cycle.
Last After Flow Time: The after flow time from the previous cycle.
2nd After Flow Time: The after flow time from two cycles ago.
Casing Pressure at After Flow: The casing pressure during the after flow portion of the current
cycle.
Last Off Time: The total off time from the previous cycle.
2nd Off Time: The total off time from two cycles ago.
Tubing Pressure at Off Time: The tubing pressure during the off time portion of the current
cycle.
Last Arrival Time: The plunger arrival time from the previous cycle.
2nd Arrival Time: The plunger arrival time from two cycles ago.
Line Pressure at After Flow: The line pressure during the after flow portion of the current cycle.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 308


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Flow Rate History Data for Flow Control Plunger

View the flow rate and static pressure data from the last ten minutes.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 309


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Off Time History Data for Flow Control Plunger

View the off times and load ratios from the cycle's last ten minutes.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 310


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Tubing & Casing Data for Flow Control Plunger

View tubing and casing pressures over the last ten minutes.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 311


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

History for Flow Control Plunger

View plunger history in a table or graph. Enter the number of records you want to receive. Click
Retrieve Data, and the information is displayed as shown in the figure below. Graph the data by
clicking Graph Data. Adjust the height of the graph by clicking the top of it and dragging it to the
desired height.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 312


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Plunger Summary

View a summary of plunger activities during the displayed number of cycles.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 313


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Callout (Table #66)


With this function you can configure the instrument to initiate a callout when the assigned process
variable exceeds the low or high alarm limit.

Calculation: Enable or disable this function.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the callout.
ID: The callout function table ID.
CallOut Type: Select the type of callout to initiate when the assigned process variable exceeds a
predetermined alarm threshold. Note that a discrete callout may or may not be issued in
conjunction with any other callout type depending on the connection established with the CallOut
Status field. Note: A discrete output will always occur, regardless of the callout type selected.
CallOut Status: The current status of the callout.
Process Variable: Assign the process variable that can trigger a callout. This may be the floating
point value of a direct analog input (Table #16) or the result of another calculation.
Low Alarm Limit: Enter the numeric value that establishes the low alarm threshold (setpoint) for
the process variable. If the current value for the process variable falls below this threshold, a low
alarm state will be indicated.
Hi Alarm Limit: Enter the numeric value that establishes the high alarm threshold (setpoint) for
the process variable. If the current value for the process variable exceeds this threshold, a high
alarm state will be indicated.
Lo Hi Alarm Hysterisis: Enter the value that establishes the “deadband” for both low and high
alarm thresholds (setpoints). For a low alarm to clear, the process variable’s value must exceed
the established setpoint plus the assigned hysterisis. For a high alarm to clear, the process
variable’s value must fall below the established setpoint less the assigned hysterisis.
Alarm TimeOut HMS: This time establishes a delay between the time an alarm threshold is
exceeded and annunciated and the time that the first callout is issued. If the Max CallOut Trys

Thermo Fisher Scientific 314


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

field is greater than 1, this same delay will be used between subsequent callouts. Enter the time in
hh:mm:ss.
Radio Control: Enables internal logic for handling the serial port-to-radio link for a Serial call-out
Type.
Force CallOut: Select Yes to force an immediate callout (or callouts, based on the Max CallOut
Trys field).
Protocol Select: Select the communications protocol to be used for this callout.
Audit Alarm Log Data Block: This value indicates the index of the event log (Table #193) that
an alarm is to be logged to.
Modbus Audit Alarm Base Register: This value indicates the numerical value of the MODBUS
register that will be logged with the event log entry.
Modbus Type: Select the type of Ethernet protocol packet to construct for the callout. Options
are Encapsulated and IP.
CallOut Status: The current status of the callout. This field will show Active when an alarm
setpoint is exceeded, the number of callout tries is greater than zero, and the alarm timeout timer
has expired. This field will show Clear when the callout has been completed. This will continue
until all required callouts have been performed.
Comm Port Data Index: Select which communication port will be used for the callout.
Phone IP: Enter a phone number for a serial-modem callout, if applicable.
IP Port: Enter the port number to be used for an IP connection during a callout.
CallOut Delay Sec: For a callout alarm message on a serial channel, this delay time represents
the period of time between these callout messages to the Host system, in other words, the
seconds between messages to the Host until it responds to the RTU.
Modem Init1 Text: Enter up to 16 characters for the modem initialization command string to be
used prior to the callout (for serial-modem connections).
Modem Init2 Text: This field allows you to continue the modem initialization string with an
additional 16 characters (concatenated with Modem Init1 Text).
Max CallOut Trys: This value denotes the maximum number of times the RTU will try to establish
communications with the Host system before giving up. While the alarm is active, the RTU will not
try to call the Host after this value is reached. If the alarm clears and enters into alarm again, the
RTU will again attempt to establish communications for this number of attempts.
Lo Hi Alarm State: The current alarm state (low, high, normal).
Lo Alarm Extreme Val: The lowest value the process variable has reached during the current low
alarm condition.
Lo Alarm Last In Date: The date the low alarm setpoint was last exceeded.
Lo Alarm Last In Time: The time the low alarm setpoint was last exceeded.
Lo Alarm Last Out Date: The date when the last low alarm returned to normal.
Lo Alarm Last Out Time: The time when the last low alarm returned to normal.
Hi Alarm Extreme Val: The highest value the process variable has reached during the current
high alarm condition.
Hi Alarm Last In Date: The date the high alarm setpoint was last exceeded.
Hi Alarm Last In Time: The time the high alarm setpoint was last exceeded.
Hi Alarm Last Out Date: Thedate when the last high alarm returned to normal.
Hi Alarm Last Out Time: The time when the last high alarm returned to normal.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 315


Calculations
Plunger Lift (Table #65)

Thermo Fisher Scientific 316


Calculations
Sequencing & Direction (Table #67)

Sequencing & Direction (Table #67)

This function is for future development.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 317


Calculations
Gas Quality Data (Table #128)

Gas Quality Data (Table #128)

If a chromatograph is not being used, you can use this table to enter gas quality data.

Descriptor: Enter a description of the gas quality data block.


ID: The gas quality block ID.
BTU and Specific Gravity: Enter the gas quality data.
Audit Register Offset: This value is used to generate Modbus registers that are logged in the
event trail. As an example, assign an offset of 13001 to gas quality block #1 and 13101 to gas
quality block #2. If you change the methane percentage for gas quality block #1, the unit will log
13005. If you change the methane percentage for gas quality block #2, the unit will log 13105.
The index value of 5 corresponds to the methane percentage item of Table #128 (Gas Quality
Data).
Gas Components section: Enter the gas components in percentages, for a total of 100%.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 318


Chapter 5

Communications

Thermo Fisher Scientific 319


Communications
Setting Up Communication Ports (Table #96)

Setting Up Communication Ports (Table #96)

One communications port definition block is used per serial port. The block can be used to specify the
port as a Master or slave. In Master mode, the communications block references contain pointers to
any combination of the following types of Master blocks:
 Modbus Master communications blocks – Read/Write Modbus Data.
 Smart Transducer communications blocks – Read Smart Transducer Data.
 Chromatograph communications block – Read Gas Quality Data.
 Tank Gauge communications block – Read Tank Gauge Data.
In slave mode, the communications block references will contain pointers to a list of Modbus slave
communications blocks.
There are several options when you expand the 96-Communication Port(s) heading. Your selection
depends on the type of port you want to set up:
 Host Comm Port
 Comm Ports #1 through #6
 485 Ports #1 and #2

 Ethernet Ports #1 and #2

Thermo Fisher Scientific 320


Communications
Setting Up Communication Ports (Table #96)

Local Port Configuration

If you are configuring a local port and selected Table 96 - Host Comm Port, Comm Ports #1 through
#6, or 485 Ports #1 or #2, follow the instructions provided here. Be sure to click the Apply button
when finished to save the changes.
To set up a port as a master, refer to the following.

Calculation: Enable the port.


Descriptor: Enter a description of the port. The description in navigation bar will change as well.
Mode: Select Master.
Baud Rate: Select the port's baud rate. Available baud rates include: 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200.
Data Bit: Set the port's data bits as 7 or 8 bits.
Parity: Select the port's parity. Options are: None (default), Even, Odd, and Mark.
Stop Bit: Select the port's stop bits. Options are: 1 (default), 1.5, and 2.
Repeat Timer: This value controls how often the Master begins a new poll. This entry is in
seconds. For example, if you enter 5, the Master will begin a new poll every five seconds.
RTS Delay: Enter how long the instrument should wait after raising a Request to Send on the host
port before transmitting a message.
Handshaking: Select the method by which data is transferred from the modem to the
communications port. Options are: None (no handshaking) and RTS/CTS (Request To Send/Clear
To Send handshaking).
Protocol Format: Select ASCII or RTU format.
Defining Tasks for Ports
You can configure up to 256 different blocks, or tasks, for each port. If you are setting up the first
task for this port, select 1 in the Communications Block Reference field. If you are setting up the
tenth task for this port, select 10, etc.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 321


Communications
Setting Up Communication Ports (Table #96)

Next, select what type of function the port will be performing for this task in the Communications
Block field. Options are: None, Modbus slave, Modbus Master, chromatograph, and tank gauge.
Finally, select the index (entry #) that corresponds to the communications block you chose.

To set up the port as a slave, refer to the following.

Calculation: Enable the port.


Description: Enter a description of the port. The description in the navigation bar will change as
well.
Mode: Select Slave.
Baud Rate: Select the port's baud rate. Available baud rates are: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200.
Data Bit: Set the port's data bits as 7 or 8 bits.
Parity: Select the port's parity. Options are: None (default), Even, Odd, and Mark.
Stop Bit: Select the port's stop bits. Options are: 1 (default), 1.5, and 2.
RTS Delay: Enter how long the instrument should wait after raising a Request to Send on the host
port before transmitting a message.
Handshaking: Select the method by which data is transferred from the modem to the
communications port. Options are: None (no handshaking) and RTS/CTS (Request To Send/Clear
To Send handshaking).
Address: Enter the slave mode communications address.
Write Enable: Enable/disable the port's write function.
Protocol Format: If configuring this port as a slave, select the slave mode protocol format
(Modbus ASCII or Modbus RTU).
Comm. Option: This field is for future development.
Callout Block: This field is for future development.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 322


Communications
Setting Up Communication Ports (Table #96)

Slave Password Number: You can set up to five different passwords per communication port.
This value represents the password selected to configure.
Password Register Number: The host must write the password value to the register number
entered here.
Value: Enter the password value.
Security Access: Set the access level a user must have to access this configuration from the RTU
keypad.
Standard Address: This parameter defines the protocol driver's Modbus address as an 8 bit value
(0-255).
Extended Address: This parameter defines the protocol driver's Modbus address as a 16 bit
value (0-65535).
4,3,2,1 (Daniel Float), etc.: These are the options for the floating point byte order. Select how
bytes and words will be sent.
Message Pad: This parameter tells the communications driver to add “nulls” (0’s) to the end of
the message to assist in extending the time that RTS control is held high.
Defining Tasks for Ports
You can configure up to 256 different blocks, or tasks, for each port. If you are setting up the first
task for this port, select 1 in the Communications Block Reference field. If you are setting up the
tenth task for this port, select 10, etc.
Next, select what type of function the port will be performing for this task in the Communications
Block field. Options are: None, Modbus slave, Modbus Master, chromatograph, and tank gauge.
Finally, select the index (entry #) that corresponds to the communications block you chose.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 323


Communications
Setting Up Communication Ports (Table #96)

Ethernet Port Configuration

Before you can establish a remote connection with an RTU that is connected to a network, the
Ethernet port and the unit’s IP address must be set up. Once this is done, you can access the
instrument from any PC that is also connected to the network. The procedure is below.

1. Open AutoCONFIG.

2. Expand the Communications heading in the Navigation bar. Select 96-Communication Port(s)
> Ethernet Port #1/Ethernet Port #2.

3. Enable the port by changing the Calculation field to Enable. If you are setting up the port as a
master, skip to step 4. If you are setting up the port as a slave, refer to the following.

Description: Enter a description of the port.


Mode: Select Slave.
Protocol Format: Select the slave mode protocol format (ASCII or RTU).
Address: Enter the slave mode communications address.
Write Enable: Enable/disable the port's write function.
Callout Block: This field is for future development.
Slave Password Number: You can assign up to five different passwords per
communication port. This value represents the password selected to configure.
Password Register Number: The host must write the password value to the register
number entered here.
Value: Enter the password value.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 324


Communications
Setting Up Communication Ports (Table #96)

Defining Tasks for Ports – Comm Block Ref, Comm Block, and Block Index
You can configure up to 256 different blocks, or tasks, for each port. If you are
setting up the first task for this port, select 1 in the Communications Block
Reference field. If you are setting up the tenth task for this port, select 10, etc.
Next, select what type of function the port will be performing for this task in the
Communications Block field. Options are: None, Modbus slave, Modbus master,
chromatograph, and tank gauge.
The last step is to select the Block Index that corresponds to the communications
block you chose.
Security Access: Set the access level a user must have to access this configuration from
the RTU keypad.
Comm Option Section
Standard Address: This parameter defines the protocol driver’s Modbus address
as an 8 bit value (0-255).
Extended Address: This parameter defines the protocol driver’s Modbus address
as a 16 bit value (0-65535).
4,3,2,1 (Daniel Float), etc.: These are the options for the floating point byte
order. Select how bytes and words will be sent.
Message Pad: This parameter tells the communications driver to add “nulls” (0’s)
to the end of the message to assist in extending the time that RTS control is held
high.
At the bottom of the screen, configure the Ethernet settings: the IP address, network
mask, Ethernet gateway, and MAC address.
For Modbus using TCP/IP, enter the Modbus encapsulated port number and IP port
number.

4. If you are setting up the port as a master, refer to the following.

Descriptor: Enter a description of the port.


Mode: Select Master.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 325


Communications
Setting Up Communication Ports (Table #96)

Repeat Timer: This value controls how often the master begins a new poll. This entry is
in seconds. For example, if you enter 5, the master will begin a new poll every five
seconds.
Protocol Format: Select ASCII or RTU format.
Defining Tasks for Ports – Comm Block Ref, Comm Block, and Block Index
You can configure up to 256 different blocks, or tasks, for each port. If you are
setting up the first task for this port, select 1 in the Communications Block
Reference field. If you are setting up the tenth task for this port, select 10, etc.
Next, select what type of function the port will be performing for this task in the
Communications Block field. Options are: None, Modbus slave, Modbus master,
chromatograph, and tank gauge.
The last step is to select the Block Index that corresponds to the communications
block you chose.
At the bottom of the screen, configure the Ethernet settings: the IP address, network
mask, Ethernet gateway, and MAC address.
For Modbus using TCP/IP, enter the Modbus encapsulated port number and IP port
number.

5. Click Apply button to save the changes.

6. If the RTU is not powered up, power it up now. If the RTU is powered up, perform a warm
restart (Tools > Warm Restart).

NOTE: Power must be cycled to the RTU in order for the settings to take effect.
When you are ready to establish the remote connection to this unit, follow the steps in “Creating a
Remote Connection via TCP/IP”.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 326


Communications
Defining Communication Blocks

Defining Communication Blocks

Modbus Slave Communication Blocks (Table #97)

If you are going set up a communications port to reference a Modbus slave communications block,
access Table #97 to configure the block.

Starting Register Number: Enter the register number that will start the block.
Number of Entries: Set how many entries will be contained within the block. The software will
populate the Register column in the table with the number of entries specified.
Write Enable: Enable/disable the write function.
Register Format: Select the register format. Options include: Discrete, 32-bit floating point (32-
bit register), 32-bit floating point (2x 16-bit registers), 16-bit word, and byte.
Point Name (Modbus Slave Register Table): Add the points to the table by copying the data
or entering it manually.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 327


Communications
Defining Communication Blocks

Modbus Master Communication Blocks (Table #98)

If you are going to set up a communications port to reference a Modbus Master communications block,
access Table #98 to configure the block.

Master Communications: Enable Modbus Master communications.


Communications Type: Select whether this Master has read or write access.
Address: Enter the communications address of the Modbus Master.
Status: This is a read-only field that displays the status of the Modbus Master. Possible displays
are: Comm OK, Illegal Function, Illegal Data Address, Illegal Data Value, No Response, and
Transmit Failure.
Protocol Format: Select whether the protocol is Modbus ASCII or Modbus RTU.
Start Register: Enter the register number that will start the block.
Number of Entries: Enter how many registers will be contained within the block. The software
will populate the Register column in the table with the number of registers specified.
Host IP Address: This field defines the TCP/IP address to connect to if we are using the Ethernet
port.
Host Port Number: This field defines the TCP/IP port number to connect to once the IP address
has been established.
AutoMITTER Mode: Enable the unit to communicate with a Thermo Scientific
AutoMITTER/AutoMITTER PRO.
Extended Addressing: Enabling extended addressing increases the number of values that can be
held by the table from 9999 to 65536.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 328


Communications
Defining Communication Blocks

Modbus Function Code: Select what the Master will tell the slave to do. Options are: FC03/FC16
(Read/Write Multiple Registers), FC01 (Read Output Status), FC02 (Read Input Status), FC04
(Read Input Register), FC05 (Force Single Coil), FC06 (Preset Single Register), and FC15 (Force
Multiple Coils).
Floating Point Register Size: Select whether the register size will be 32-bit or 2x 16-bit.
Floating Point Byte Order: Select how bytes and words will be sent. Options are: Daniel
(4,3,2,1), IEEE (1,2,3,4), Opt3 (2,1,4,3), Opt4 (3,4,1,2).
16-Bit Register: Enable/disable the use of 16-bit register.
Encapsulated Modbus Format: For Modbus using TCP/IP, select ether Encapsulated Modbus or
Modbus IP.
Point Name (Modbus Slave Register Table): Add the points to the table by copying the data
or entering it manually.In the figure, the current values of the first three smart transducer input
entries have been added to the table.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 329


Communications
Defining Communication Blocks

Chromatograph (Table #100)

General Configuration

If you are going to set up a port to communicate with a chromatograph, access Table #100 and select
the required stream. The chromatograph interface from the RTU is a Modbus Master that polls a
Danalyzer gas chromatograph for its molar percent components, BTU, and specific gravity. Each
chromatograph table can be set up to read one of the four possible streams in the Danalyzer
chromatograph.

Calculation: Enable the chromatograph function.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the
calculation.
ID: The chromatograph configuration table ID.
Type: Currently, the only type supported is Danalyzer.
Address: Enter the communication port address.
Stream Number: Enter the stream number.
Host IP Address: Enter the IP address of the host.
Communication Status: This read-only field displays the status of the chromatograph. Possible
displays include: Comm OK, Illegal Function, Illegal Data Address, Illegal Data Value, No
Response, and Transmit Failure.
Communication Option: For future development.
Alarm Status: This field displays whether any alarms are active.
GQ Block Index: Select the gas quality data block to move data into once the driver has
retrieved it from the chromatograph.
BTU: This value is provided by the chromatograph. If are not using a chromatograph, you can go
to the gas quality data block and enter the data.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 330


Communications
Defining Communication Blocks

Specific Gravity: This value is provided by the chromatograph. If you are not using a
chromatograph, you can go to the gas quality data block and enter the data.
WOBBE: This value is provided by the chromatograph. If you are not using a chromatograph, you
can go to the gas quality data block and enter the data.
Host Port Number: Set the port number the unit will use when communicating with the server.
Gas Percentages: These values are provided by the chromatograph. If you are not using a
chromatograph, you can go to the gas quality data block and enter the data.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 331


Communications
Defining Communication Blocks

Chromatograph Limits 1

When data alarm words are checked, all gas quality data is checked against the high and low limits
defined on Limits pages 1-6. If the values exceed the set limits, then the errant gas quality data is
replaced by its associated limit value.
The Limits 1 page is shown below. Enter the high limit, low limit, and default values for BTU, Specific
Gravity, methane, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, and ethane.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 332


Communications
Defining Communication Blocks

Chromatograph Limits 2

When data alarm words are checked, all gas quality data is checked against the high and low limits
defined on Limits pages 1-6. If the values exceed the set limits, then the errant gas quality data is
replaced by its associated limit value.
On the Limits 2 page, enter the high limit, low limit, and default values for propane, water, hydrogen
sulfide, hydrogen, carbon monoxide, and oxygen.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 333


Communications
Defining Communication Blocks

Chromatograph Limits 3

When data alarm words are checked, all gas quality data is checked against the high and low limits
defined on Limits pages 1-6. If the values exceed the set limits, then the errant gas quality data is
replaced by its associated limit value.
On the Limits 3 page, enter the high limit, low limit, and default values for I-butane, N-butane, I-
pentane, N-pentane, C6 Plus, and N-hexane.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 334


Communications
Defining Communication Blocks

Chromatograph Limits 4

When data alarm words are checked, all gas quality data is checked against the high and low limits
defined on Limits pages 1-6. If the values exceed the set limits, then the errant gas quality data is
replaced by its associated limit value.
On the Limits 4 page, enter the high limit, low limit, and default values for N-heptane, N-octane, N-
nonane, N-decane, helium, and argon.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 335


Communications
Defining Communication Blocks

Chromatograph Limits 5

When data alarm words are checked, all gas quality data is checked against the high and low limits
defined on Limits pages 1-6. If the values exceed the set limits, then the errant gas quality data is
replaced by its associated limit value. This Limits page also allows for the configuration of Total Mole
Hi Low Limit checking and High Low Limit checking.

Enter the high limit and low limit values for Wobbe Index and Neo Pentane.
Enter the high limit, low limit, and default values for air.
Total Mole Chromatograph Components: This field is for future development.
Total Mole Hi/Low Limit Alarming
If the Total Mole Hi Lo Limit Alarming function is enabled, the unit will check the sum of all
the gas components retrieved from the chromatograph (on the General tab). If the sum of all
components is higher than the Total Mole Hi Limit Value or lower than the Total Mole Lo
Limit Value, the unit will perform one of the following actions based on what is configured in
the Total Mole Hi Low Alarm Data Handling parameter:

 Not update the GQ table with the current retrieved values


 Update the GQ table with the values retrieved from the chromatograph
 Update the GQ table with the default values of each component
The Total Mole Hi Lo Alarm Status indicates the current alarm condition for the total mole hi
low limit checking.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 336


Communications
Defining Communication Blocks

High/Low Limit Alarming


If the High Low Limit Alarming function is enabled, the unit will check each component
value. If the component value is higher than the high limit value or lower than the low limit
value (specified on other Limits pages), the unit will perform one of the following actions based
on what is configured in the High Low Alarm Data Handling parameter:
 Not update the GQ table with the current retrieved values

 Update the GQ table with the values retrieved from the chromatograph
 Update the GQ table with the default values of each component
 Update the GQ table with the limited values of each component
The High Low Alarm Status indicates the current alarm condition for the high low limit
checking.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 337


Communications
Defining Communication Blocks

Chromatograph Limits 6

The Limits 6 page allows you to customize the alarm words that indicate the general status of the
chromatograph (Regs 3046, 3647) and configure Danalyzer C6+ type chromatographs to provide
extended analysis up to C8 (Hexane) based on a customized split of the retrieved C6 (Hexane) value.

Regs 3046, 3047


The Danalyzer chromatograph provides two alarm words that indicate the general status of the
chromatograph. Certain bits within those alarm words (Regs 3046, 3047) indicate problems
with the chromatograph. Some of those bits are simply informational. By default, the unit will
alarm based on a mask of bits as defined by the chromatograph documentation. However, the
Limits 6 page gives you the capability to define a custom mask that will be applied to live
values. If any of the bits in the alarm word are still '1' after the mask is applied (StatusReg AND
Mask), an alarm is raised and the selected Regs 3046 3047 Alarm Data Handling action is
performed. Possible actions are:

 Not update the GQ table with the current retrieved values


 Update the GQ table with the values retrieved from the chromatograph
 Update the GQ table with the default values of each component
The Regs 3046 3047 Status Alarm Status field indicates the current alarm status.
The Status Register 3046 Live, Status Register 3046 Alarm, Status Register 3047 Live,
and Status Register 3047 Alarm fields display the current register values before the mask is
applied.

Danalyzer C6+ Type Chromatographs

Thermo Fisher Scientific 338


Communications
Defining Communication Blocks

For Danalyzer C6+ type chromatographs, the chromatograph has the capability to provide
extended analysis up to C8 (Hexane) based on a split of the retrieved C6 (Hexane) value. This
split is based on the component code that is used to retrieve the C6+ value. By default the unit
will utilize the split ratios as documented by the chromatograph based on the component code
(108, 109, 110, or 111). However, the unit can be configured to provide a custom split ratio. If
this is desired, the C6 Plus Custom Split parameter must be set to Use Custom %. You will
then need to configure the percent split between the three components (Hexane, Heptane,
Octane) for each of the possible component codes (Component Code block).

Thermo Fisher Scientific 339


Communications
Defining Communication Blocks

Tank Gauge Configuration (Table #101)

Tank gauges may be connected to flow computers supported by this software. Each entry represents
one tank gauge, and each tank gauge can have three float sensors and one temperature sensor.

Below is a screen shot with float number 4 (temperature sensor) selected.

Calculation: Enable/disable the tank gauge function here.


Descriptor: Enter a description of the tank gauge.
ID: Enter the tank gauge table ID.
Type: This field is for future expansion.
Address: Enter the address of the tank gauge.
Status: The communication status between the tank gauge and the flow computer.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 340


Communications
Defining Communication Blocks

Offset: The level offset for all of the sensors of the tank gauge. This value compensates for the
sludge that builds up in the bottom of the tank, which can be many inches thick.
Table 43 Index: The table 43 (Historical Average Calculation) index, which is used to retrieve
tank gauge history.
Power Control: Link to discrete output for the tank gauge power control.
Level Engineering Units: Select the engineering units to be used for the level sensor.
Temperature Engineering Units: Select the engineering units to be used for the temperature
sensor.
Float Number: Select the float or temperature sensor number. Float numbers 1 through 3 are for
float sensors, and number 4 is for a temperature sensor only.
Descriptor: Enter a description of the sensor.
Shutin Command: Select the command used for the shut-in function.Options are: Idle, Clear,
and Shutin.

Shutin Status: The current shut-in status. The shutin status is determined by the shutin
command, low/high alarms, and low/high discrete inputs.
 When the shutin command is Clear: Always clear shutin. The shutin status will show No
Shutin, and the shutin discrete output is Open.
 When the shutin command is Shutin: Always set shutin. The shutin status will show
Shutin, and the shutin discrete output is Close.
 When the shutin command is Idle: Ashutin will be set by alarm or discrete inputs as
follows:
- If the low limit shutin is enabled and low limit alarm is active.
- If the high limit shutin is enabled and high limit alarm is active.
- If the low shutin on discrete input is enabled and low shutin discrete input is 1.
- If the high shutin on discrete input is enabled and high shutin discrete input is 1.

Shutin Discrete Output: Select how to control the state of the discrete output point used for the
shut-in function.Options are: Open (no shut-in) and Close (shut-in).
Status: Displays whether a sensor is present or not.
Level: Displays the current level reading from the sensor.
Low Alarm Limit: Enter the low alarm limit value.
Low Limit Alarm Status: The current sensor low limit alarm status.
Low Limit Shutin Enable: Select whether a low limit alarm will trigger a shutin.
High Alarm Limit: Enter the high alarm limit value.
High Limit Alarm Status: The current sensor high limit alarm status.
High Limit Shutin Enable: Select whether a high limit alarm will trigger a shut-in.
Low Shutin Discrete Input: Link to thediscrete input point (Table #19) to be used for the low
shut-in .
Low Shutin on Discrete Input Enable: Select whether the low shut-in discrete input can be
used to trigger a shut-in.
High Shutin Discrete Input: Link to the discrete input point (Table #19) to be used for the high
shut-in.
High Shutin On Discrete Input Enable: Select whether the high shut-in discrete input can be
used to trigger a shut-in.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 341


Chapter 6

Interface & Miscellaneous Items

Interface

Tables #160-166 are reserved for interfacing to the ISA Graph industrial PLC that conforms to the
IEC-1131-3 standard. The ISA Graph PLC suite is not required for regular operation of the instrument.
It is offered as an additional level of functionality for the AutoEXEC.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 342


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

Miscellaneous

Note that not all tables listed are available for AutoPILOT PRO.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 343


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

System Status (Table #30)

General

This page displays read-only information pertaining to various aspects of system status.

Last Startup Type: The last start-up type. Possible displays are: 0 (cold start) and 1 (warm
start).
Last System Start Date/Time: The date and time of the last system start-up.
Battery Voltage: The battery voltage that the RTU sees at the power input terminal.
RTU Device Type: Displays the type of device currently connected.
RTU Software Version: The software version of the currently connected device.
Low Voltage Alarm Status: Displays whether a low voltage alarm is currently active. Possible
displays are: 0 (alarm clear) and 1 (alarm active).
Entry Log to Event Log: This flag indicates that an entry has been logged to the system error
log and should be retrieved by the Host/user, etc. Reset the flag by issuing a "2468" numerical
command into the Configuration Load Control field in Table #31.
Configuration block
Execution Status: The status of the configuration. Possible displays are: 0 (configuration idle), 1
(configuration running), and 2 (configuration failure).
Execution Date/Time: The date and time the configuration file was executed.
File Load Status: The configuration file load status. Possible displays are: 0 (no configuration
loaded), 1 (configuration loaded), 2 (configuration executed), and 3 (configuration generated).
File Load Date/Time: The last date and time the configuration file was loaded.
File Load Size: The size of the configuration file.

IsaGraph Section
Execution Status: The status of the IsaGraph.Possible displays are: 0 (IsaGraph idle), 1
(IsaGraph running), and 2 (IsaGraph failure).

Thermo Fisher Scientific 344


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

Execution Date/Time: The date and time the IsaGraph file was executed.
File Load Status: The IsaGraph file load status. Possible displays are: 0 (no IsaGraph file
loaded), 1 (IsaGraph file loaded), and 2 (IsaGraph file executed).
File Load Date/Time: The last date and time the IsaGraph file was loaded.
File Load Size: The size of the IsaGraph file.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 345


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

System Status I/O Counts

As on the General page, most of the items on this page are read-only. The I/O Board Failure Alarm
field displays the status of the I/O board failure alarm, where 0 is alarm clear and 1 is alarm active.
This page also displays the following system information:
 Number of I/O boards installed
 Types of inputs and outputs
 Number of dynamic and static RAM pages, Flash, and EEPROM pages
 Number of communication ports
Additionally, you can view the size of historical and audit/alarm logs. Select the log you want, and the
file size is displayed.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 346


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

System Control (Table #31)

On the System Control page, you can set up basic system parameters.

System Date/Time: The current system date and time.


Display Scroll Time: Set how long the display will show each item in the display scroll list. Enter
the time in seconds.
Daylight Savings Time: Enable or disable the Daylight Savings Time (DST) adjustment, where 0
= disable and 1 = enable.
Saving Time Month: Set the month that the software should begin adjusting for DST.
Saving Time Sunday: Select which Sunday of the month the software should begin adjusting for
DST.
Exit Saving Time Month: Set the month that the software should stop adjusting for DST.
Exit Saving Time Sunday: Select which Sunday of the month the software should stop adjusting
for DST.
Configuration Execution Control: This field controls the creation and loading of configuration
files from the AutoCONFIG application. This field should not be written to by the user.
Configuration Load Control: This is the command used to load the current running configuration
into an internal data storage location that can be accessed by AutoCONFIG for retrieval and
storage on a PC. This command is automatically utilized when a user selects to Upload
Configuration from RTU from the Files menu or clicks the corresponding icon on the toolbar.
I/O Rescan: You can force the software to rescan the I/O boards to establish an I/O point count.
This is typically performed after you have installed a new I/O board.
Date Display Format: Select how you want the software to display the date (MM/DD/YY,
DD/MM/YY, YY/MM/DD).
LCD Display Contrast: You can adjust the contrast of the LCD from the front panel of the
instrument or from this field. Increase the number to increase the contrast.
Time Set Deadband: This deadband is used when synchronizing the unit's internal clock with a
host system's clock. If the time difference is within the deadband, the unit will not set its internal

Thermo Fisher Scientific 347


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

clock automatically. For instance, if the deadband is set to 60 seconds, the unit will not
automatically synchronize its internal clock with the host clock unless the time difference is more
than one minute.
Display Blanking: If enabled, the unit will not scroll data on the LCD unless a password is
entered through the keypad. If disabled, the unit will scroll data whenever a cable is plugged into
the local port or a key is pressed on the keypad.
Modify Activate: This field is for future development.
Modify Access: This field is for future development.
IsaGraph Execution Control: This field controls the creation and loading of configuration files
from the IsaGraph. This field should not be written to by the user.
IsaGraph Load Control: This field is for future development.
Host Comm Address: Enter the host address. This entry will override the entry made in the
address field of Table #96 (Communications Ports).
Host Comm Baud Rate/Data Bit/Parity/Stop Bit: Set the communications parameters for the
host port. These entries will override the entry made in the address field of Table #96
(Communications Ports).
Host Comm RTS Delay: Enter the time in milliseconds that the instrument should wait after
raising a Request to Send on the host port before transmitting a message. This entry will override
the entry made in the address field of Table #96 (Communications Ports).
Host Comm Handshake: Select the method by which data is transferred from the modem to the
communications port. This entry will override the entry made in the address field of Table #96
(Communications Ports). Options are: None (no handshaking) and RTS/CTS (Request To
Send/Clear To Send handshaking).
Host Comm Protocol: If necessary, select the slave mode protocol format (Modbus ASCII or
Modbus RTU).
Host Comm Option: This field is for future development.
Cold Start: This field provides another way to perform a cold start. Enter 12345.0 and click
Apply.
Validation Key and Group Key: These keys are used together to enable software features that
are purchased separately from the hardware. For example, if an AutoPILOT PRO is originally
purchased with the plunger lift function, these keys will be entered at the factory, and the unit will
arrive with plunger lift available. If the plunger lift function is purchased after the original order of
the unit, you will receive Validation and Group keys which must be entered here to enable the
function.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 348


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

Historical Data Log Allocation (Table #192)

Use Table #192 to enable history and configure historical records.

Calculation: Enable/disable the history function for this data log.


Descriptor: Enter a text string that identifies the device or function associated with the log.
ID: The historical data log allocation table ID.
Time Stamp: Choose whether the time stamp in the log should indicate the start or end of the
period.
Items Per Record: Enter how many items each historical record will contain.
Number of Records: Enter how many records this data log will contain.
Current Record Index: This index points to the next available record (usually the oldest record)
that will be placed in the circular historical record queue.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 349


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

Audit/Alarm Data Log Allocation (Table #193)

The only configurable items in Table #193 are listed below.


 Calculation: Enable/disable the calculation.
 Descriptor: Enter a description of this log.
 Include System Audit and Number of Records: If you choose to include system audit records in
the log, enter how many records to include.

 Legacy Year Enable: Enabling this function causes the RTU to generate an event record with a
year based on the original Enron specification. This specification states that the year will be
the number of years from 1980. The default method of date stamping is to use the last two
digits of the year in the same manner that the history records are stamped with. With this
function enabled, events that occur in the year 2009 the year indicated in the event will be 29,
and if left disabled, the year indicated will be 09.
The remaining fields allow you to view the number of records contained in the log and the record
index. For each channel, you can also view:

 Last audit index: This index points to the next available record (usually the oldest record) that
will be placed in the circular historical audit record queue.
 Start audit index: By default, once audit records have been pulled and acknowledged by the
Host system, they cannot be retrieved again. To work around this, you can write to this index
in order to reset the number of audit records that can be retrieved.

 Number of unacknowledged alarms

Thermo Fisher Scientific 350


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

LCD Scroll List (Table #208)

You can customize the items that are displayed by the RTU. Enter the point name by typing it in the
field, or use the copy and paste method to add the data.
You can also customize how long the RTU displays each item. Go to Set Display Scroll time on the
System Control page.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 351


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

Keypad Lists (Tables #209–#212)

The keypad menu lists (Tables #209 through #212) allow you to define which menu items are
accessible via the keypad of a unit. As an example, configure the first entry for Table #209 as
described below.

1. From the navigation bar, go to Miscellaneous > 209-Local Keypad Menu List_1.

2. Double-click on Entry #1. In the Selected Table drop-down, select 38-Differential Pressure
Flow. Tables are essentially the menu (functional) headings, and entries are the order in
which the tables (menu headings) appear in the menu list. You can set up the list in any order
desired, i.e. you do not have to use Table #1 for entry #1. In this example, Table #38 is
selected for entry #1. So the first menu heading accessible through the keypad will be Table
#38.

3. Add field indices to the list by clicking in the Field Index box and entering the field index. A
field index is an individual item or parameter in a table. To determine the field index, go to the
parameter and hold your mouse over it. A description will pop up. The data within the brackets
contains the table number (38), entry number (1) and field index (2). As shown below, the
field index for the meter name is 2, and it will be the first item in the keypad menu list.

4. When you have entered all the items for the selected table, click the Apply button.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 352


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

5. Configure additional entries for this keypad menu list as necessary.

6. Once you have a keypad menu list configured, go to the Password Table (#213) and define
which users can access the list.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 353


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

The Password Table (Table #213): Adding Users & Setting Security Access
Levels

Use the Password table to add users, passwords, and security access levels. You must be logged in as
a user with Supervisor access to open an entry in the Password table. Users without Supervisor access
will be denied access. (The current access level is displayed at the bottom of the AutoCONFIG screen.)

1. From the navigation bar, go to Miscellaneous > 213-Password Table. Select the entry.

2. Enter up to eight characters for the user ID and password.

3. Select the keypad menu list this user can access. According to the example below, when user
12345 logs in, the menus defined for Table #209 will be accessible. The only exception would
be if an entry or parameter requires a higher level of security access than what is set for this
user.

There are four levels of security access:


 Supervisor: The highest security access level. Allows for access to calibration data
and modification of all configuration parameters, including passwords.

 Technician: Second highest level of security access. Identical to Supervisor,


except cannot modify passwords.
 Control: Can access tables pertaining to control functions only, PID for example.
 Measurement: Can access tables pertaining to measurement functions only, DP
flow calculation for example.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 354


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

AutoCONFIG provides several ways to assign security access levels. You must be logged
in as a user with Supervisor access to change access levels.

 For Calculation, Communication, and Miscellaneous tables, right-click on an entry


and select the access level. The software will ask you to verify that you want to
change the access level. Click Yes. Note that this is not an option for Table #30
or #31.

 Right-click on a parameter. A check mark indicates the current setting. Select the
new security access level. Note that the security access of some parameters
cannot be changed. In these cases, Access Security will not be listed in the right-
click menu.

4. Select the level of security access this user should have (if any). Users without a level of
security access will only be able to view the menu items in the selected menu table.

5. Click the Apply button.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 355


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

Thermo Fisher Scientific 356


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

Default Security Access Level Settings

In the table below,


 S: Supervisor
 T: Technician
 C: Control
 M: Measurement
If the default security access is STCM (Supervisor/Technician/Control/Measurement), then the table is
configurable by users with any level of security access. If ST, then the table is configurable by users
with Supervisor or Technician access, etc. In some cases, a table may have a security access level of
STCM, but certain parameters within that table have a different setting. For example, Table 1 has a
default security access level of STCM, but the security access block is restricted to users with ST
(Supervisor or Technician) access.

Table Default Security Exceptions


Access

1–4 STCM Security Access field configurable only by ST.

15 ST

16–22 STCM Security Access field configurable only by ST.

31 STCM The following fields configurable only by ST:


Date
Time
Configuration Exec Cntrl
ISaGraph Load Cntrl
ISaGraph Exe Cntrl
Restart To Bootloader
Cold Start
Validation Key
Group Key

32 ST

33–35 STC

36–37 STCM

38–41 STM

42 STC

43–50 STMC

51 STM

53 STM

Thermo Fisher Scientific 357


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

Table Default Security Exceptions


Access

56 STM

57 STC

59 STCM

60 STM

61 STCM

62–63 STC

64–66 STCM

96–98 STCM Security Access field on Table 96 configurable only by ST.

100–101 STM

128–129 STM

160–166 STCM

192–193 ST

208–212 ST

213 S

225–236 ST

Thermo Fisher Scientific 358


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

Differential Pressure Audit/Alarm Base Register Assignments (Table #225)

Table #225 displays the audit/alarm items to be logged for each differential pressure meter run.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 359


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

Differential Pressure Flow Calculation History Log Assignments (Table #226)

Table #226 defines which historical items are logged for DP flow calculations. You can use the default
log assignments or customize them. To change the history log, click on the row you want to change. A
drop down arrow appears. Click it, and scroll through the list. Select the item you want to add. See an
example below.

When you finish editing the history log, click Apply. Below is a list of the default log assignments.

 Accumulated Volume (Current Log Period)


 Accumulated Energy (Current Log Period)
 Average Differential Pressure

 Average Static Pressure


 Average Gas Temperature
 Average Square Root Extension
 Flow Time (Minutes, Current Log Period)
 Average Gravity
 Average BTU
 Average Carbon Dioxide Content
 Average Nitrogen Content

Thermo Fisher Scientific 360


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

AGA 7 Flow Calculation History Log Assignments (Table #227)

Table #227 defines which historical items are logged for AGA 7 flow calculations. You can use the
default log assignments or customize them. To change the history log, click on the row you want to
change. A drop down arrow appears. Click it, and scroll through the list. Select the item you want to
add. See an example below.

When you finish editing the history log, click Apply. Below is a list of the default log assignments.

 Accumulated Volume (Current Log Period)


 Accumulated Energy (Current Log Period)
 Accumulated Pulses
 Average Static Pressure
 Average Gas Temperature
 Actual Accumulated Volume (Current Log Period)
 Flow Time (Minutes, Current Log Period)
 Average Gravity
 Average BTU
 Average Carbon Dioxide Content
 Average Nitrogen Content

Thermo Fisher Scientific 361


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

AGA 7 Audit/Alarm Base Register Assignments (Table #233)

Table #233 displays the audit/alarm items to be logged for each AGA 7 meter run.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 362


Interface & Miscellaneous Items
Miscellaneous

GQ Audit/Alarm Base Register Assignments (Table #234)

Table #234 displays the gas quality audit/alarm items to be logged.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 363


Glossary

1
16-bit word scaling calculation table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO
to scale word data before sending it to another function.
16-bit word value table: Used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO as a generic word
value holding table for floating point data.

A
ACF (acf): Actual cubic feet.
ACFG: AutoCONFIG.
advanced mode: Allows for access to all the tables and menus available for use in AutoCONFIG for
the connected RTU.
AE: See AutoEXEC.
after flow: Any gas that continues to flow after the plunger has arrived at the top of the well and
before shut-in occurs.
AGA: American Gas Association.
AGA 10 SOS calculation table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to
calculate the speed of sound for a gas based on the latest AGA 10 standard.
AGA 7 audit/alarm base register assignment table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and
AutoPILOT PRO to define the audit/alarm items to be logged for each AGA 7 meter run.
AGA 7 flow calculation history log assignment table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC
and AutoPILOT PRO to define which historical items are logged for AGA 7 flow calculations.
AGA 7 flow calculation table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to
configure turbine and ultrasonic installations for linear meter runs.
AI: analog input
alarm status calculation table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to turn
a base type point alarm status into a discrete value.
analog history function: Gathers historical data on up to four field analog input and pulse input
points.
analog input board: An optional I/O board for the AutoEXEC that has 16 single-ended analog input
channels.
analog output board: An optional I/O board for the AutoEXEC that provides four 12-bit resolution
channels of 4-20 mA current output.
API: American Petroleum Institute.
APP: See AutoPILOT PRO.
audit/alarm data log allocation table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT
PRO to enable the recording of audit data.
auto-adjust turbine meter: Uses two flow computer pulse inputs to measure the flow based on
pulses from turbine blades.
AutoEXEC: The Thermo Scientific hybrid, multi-run flow computer and remote telemetry unit for
natural gas and / or petroleum liquids.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 364


Glossary

AutoPILOT PRO: The Thermo Scientific six-run gas flow computer and remote telemetry unit.

B
backplane board: A board provided in the standard AutoEXEC that provides interface for the power
supply, CPU board, and DIN connectors for six optional I/O boards.
baud: The speed measurement for communication that indicates the number of bit transfers per
second.
BBL (bbl): Barrels. The use of BBL in AutoCONFIG and this help system is for barrels (each), NOT for
one billion barrels.
blow-off phase: The A valve is closed and the B valve is open. Gas and liquid flows into the pit tank
at atmospheric pressure. Occurs when the plunger has not arrived in the UP position due to
the pressure of the gas and liquid in the tubing not being sufficiently higher than the product
line pressure.
blow-off valve: Typically Valve B. May also be called Pit valve.
BTU (Btu): British thermal unit. A unit of heat measurement defined as the amount of heat required
to raise one pound of water one degree Fahrenheit.
byte value table: Used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO as a generic byte value
holding table for floating point data.

C
calculation thread allocation table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO
for advanced station control operations.
callout table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to configure the
instrument to initiate a callout when the assigned process variable exceeds the low or high
alarm limit.
chromatograph function: Consists of a Modbus master that polls a Danalyzer gas chromatograph
for its molar percent components, BTU, and specific gravity.
chromatograph limits function: Used to configure the unit to generate an alarm when a
chromatograph parameter goes below or above set alarm limits.
cold restart: For the AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO, the cold restart resets the unit to factory
defaults. All setup data and historical and audit records are destroyed. It is recommended that
you upload setup configuration before cold starting the unit.
combo board: An optional I/O board for the AutoEXEC that provides four pulse/frequency inputs, four
analog inputs, 1 analog output, four digital inputs, and four relay outputs.
communication expansion board: An optional I/O board for the AutoEXEC that adds six RS232
compatible serial ports, two RS485 full duplex, half duplex ports, and two USB ports.
control security access level: Can access tables pertaining to control functions only, PID for
example.
CPL: Pressure dependency volume correction factor.
CPLM: Correction for pressure on the liquid at the meter.
CPLP: Correction for pressure on the liquid in the prover.
CPSP: Correction for pressure on the steel of the prover.
CTL: Temperature dependency volume correction factor.
CTLM: Correction for temperature of the liquid at the meter.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 365


Glossary

CTLP: Correction for temperature of the liquid in the prover.


CTS: Clear to send.
CTS wait: Amount of time in milliseconds the program should wait for the CTS signal to be returned
from the software's local communications device after raising Request to Send.
CTSP: Correction for temperature on the steel of the prover.

D
data bits: Measurement of the actual data bits in a transmission.
DE communication board: An optional I/O board for the AutoEXEC that supports up to eight
Honeywell transducers using DE protocol.
dead band: See error dead band.
density audit/alarm base register assignment table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC to
define the audit/alarm items to be logged for the liquid density calculation.
derivative: In PID loops, a suppression factor used to lessen the overshoot introduced by the
proportional and integral gain.
differential pressure audit/alarm base register assignment table: Table used in AutoCONFIG
for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to define the audit/alarm items to be logged for each
differential pressure meter run.
differential pressure flow history log assignment table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC
and AutoPILOT PRO to define which historical items are logged for differential pressure flow
calculations.
digital input board: An optional I/O board for the AutoEXEC that provides 16 digital input points.
digital output board: An optional I/O board for the AutoEXEC that provides 16 relay outputs.
discrete logical AND: Function in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO that returns as
TRUE if all inputs entered are TRUE and returns as FALSE if any input is FALSE.
discrete logical OR: Function in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO that returns as TRUE
if any of the inputs entered are TRUE and returns as FALSE if all inputs are FALSE.
discrete value table: Used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO as a generic discrete
value holding table for floating point data.
DP: Differential pressure.

E
error dead band: The optimum operating range for a PID loop.
ESD: Emergency shutdown.
EU: Engineering unit.
export file function: Function used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO that allows you
to export previously saved report files (.hst) to different formats.

F
fail mode: Determines what the end device will do in the event of a system failure.
fast arrival time: Time used for the fast arrival window of the plunger. Should be set to the nearest
tenth of a minute. Divide tubing depth by the fast plunger speed.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 366


Glossary

floating point copy table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to copy
floating point values to multiple destinations.
floating point scaling calculation table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT
PRO to scale an input before sending it to another function.
floating point summing table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to add
data from multiple floating points.
floating point value table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO that holds
floating point data that will be used with other functions or calculations.
flow phase: The A valve is open and the B valve is closed. Gas flows to the sales line.
Fpv: Super compressibility factor calculated by using AGA 8.
Fpwl: Factor used to correct for the effect of local gravity on the weights of a deadweight calibrator.
FWA: Flow weighted averaged.
Fwl: Local gravitational correction factor.
Fwv: See Water Vapor Factor.

G
gain: In PID loops, the factor used to set how rapidly it seeks the set point.
gas components table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to enter gas
quality data if a chromatograph is not being used.
gas lift plunger method: A plunger method that cycles between four states: (1) "A" Valve Close and
"B" Valve Open; (2) "A" Valve Open and "B" Valve Open; (3) "A" Valve Open and "B" Valve
Close; (4) "A" Valve Close and "B" Valve Close.
gas sampler function: Enables a SuperFLOW style flow computer to control the sampling/injection
process based on the volume of flowing product.
generate PCCHIT file function: Function used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO
that allows you to retrieve meter historical data and save in the new AutoEXEC/AutoPILOT
PRO (.hst) file format or in the PCCHIT (MBS##) file format for the DOS version of
AutoCONFIG.
GJ: Gigajoule.
GQ: Gas quality.
GQ audit/alarm base register assignment table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and
AutoPILOT PRO to define the audit/alarm items to be logged for a chromatograph.

H
high select PID: Used in a cascade PID loop where the higher value is the prevailing one.
historical average calculation table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO
to collect historical data on up to 36 inputs.
historical data log allocation table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to
enable history and configure historical records.

I
I/O config wizard: A tool that enables you to quickly link analog or smart transducer inputs to a
meter run's differential pressure, static pressure, and temperature.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 367


Glossary

in/in-F: Inches per inch per degree F.


inH2O: Inches of Water Column.
integral: In PID loops, used to eliminate any offset introduced by Gain, thus reducing error.
intermittent plunger method: A radical variation of the timer method in that it basically becomes a
clock for the sales valve. It shuts in for a user-defined time and then opens the sales valve at
a user-defined time.

K
K-Factor: The number of pulses per unit volume.
keypad list tables: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to configure up to
four local keypad menu lists.
kPa: Kilo Pascal.

L
LCD: Liquid crystal display.
LCD scroll list table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to customize the
items that are displayed by the RTU.
liquid audit/alarm base register assignment table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC to
define which historical items are logged for liquid flow calculations.
liquid density calculation table: Table used in AutoCONFIG to configure an AutoEXEC to accept
input from a density meter and perform real-time conversion calculations.
liquid flow batch history log assignment table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC to define
which historical items are logged for batches.
liquid flow board: An optional I/O board for the AutoEXEC that provides termination for six field
input signals, providing accumulator, density, and proving functions.
liquid flow calculation history log assignment table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC to
define which historical items are logged for liquid flow calculations.
liquid flow calculation table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC to configure liquid flow meter
runs.
liquid flow prover results history log assignment table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC
to define which items are included in the prover results history log.
liquid flow prover run history log assignment table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC to
define which historical items are logged for prover runs.
liquid product table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC to define up to 16 products.
liquid prover calculation table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC to configure a liquid
proving run.
load factor: Used to compare again the load ratio after minimum off time expires.
load factor plunger method: A variation of the original method that does not allow for the
adjustment of the load factor value.
load ratio: (Current casing pressure - current line pressure) divided by (current casing pressure -
sales line pressure). Load ratios less than 0.5 should be sufficient to lift the plunger to the
surface.
low flow cutoff: Used to force the flow rate to zero when the differential pressure (for DP flow meter
runs) or the input pulse frequency (for turbine meter runs) drops below a set value.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 368


Glossary

low select PID: Used in a cascade PID loop where the lower value is the prevailing one.

M
MACF (Macf): One thousand actual cubic feet.
manual plunger: Plunger functions which depends solely on whether to open valve A (sales) or valve
B (pit).
manual plunger method: A plunger lift method that uses one or a combination of the following to
determine when to open the sales valve: analog pressures, the difference of pressures, and/or
a minimum off timer.
MBTU (MBtu): One thousand Btus. A standard unit of measurement for natural gas.
MCF (Mcf): One thousand cubic feet.
measurement config wizard: A tool that enables you to configure meter runs quickly by condensing
the configuration process.
measurement security access level: Can access tables pertaining to measurement functions only,
DP flow calculation for example.
meter station calculation table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to
associate multiple meter runs and totalize the volume and energy values of the runs.
minimum TRM: Boundary where TRM cannot fall below. Essentially maximum after flow.
MIPS: Million instructions per second.
MJ: Megajoule.
MMBTU (MMBtu): One million Btus.
MMCF (MMcf): One million cubic feet.
mmHg: Millimeters of mercury.
mPa:
multiplexer function: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO that allows you
to connect two inputs (A and B) to a function and view one of those inputs at a time.

N
navigation bar: For the AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO, provides access to the following menu
headings in AutoCONFIG: Physical Data Points, Calculations, Communications, ISA Graph, and
Miscellaneous. For a SuperFLOW style flow computer, provides access to the following menu
headings in AutoCONFIG: Unit Configurations, System Configurations, Run/Function
Configuration, Tools, and Help.
no pit plunger method: A variation of the original method that removes the pit operation.
nomination control table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to schedule
a PID setpoint change or accumulation monitoring to control the amount of gas or product
supplied during the period specified.

O
off time: Time it takes for the plunger to get to the bottom.
off-time: Time it takes for the plunger to get to the bottom.
on time: Controls all of the plunger arrival windows. Calculate: slow arrival time + pit delay time +
amount of time desired to vent well to get plunger up.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 369


Glossary

on-time: Controls all of the plunger arrival windows. Calculate: slow arrival time + pit delay time +
amount of time desired to vent well to get plunger up.
orifice meter: Uses a differential pressure transducer to calculate flow rate based on pressure drop
across an orifice (restriction) plate.
original plunger method: A plunger lift method that uses a calculated load factor ompared to the
preset load factor to determine when to open the sales valve and a calculated Turner rate
compared to the AGA flow rate to determine when to close the sales valve.

P
Pa: Pascal.
parity: Method of error checking in serial communications.
password table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to configure keypad
user IDs and passwords.
PCCHIT (MBS##): The file format for the DOS version of AutoCONFIG.
physical accumulator table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to
configure each pulse input point.
physical analog input table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to
configure each analog input.
physical analog output table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to
configure each analog output.
physical discrete input table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to
configure each discrete input point.
physical discrete output table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO used
to configure each relay output.
physical Honeywell DE input table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to
configure each Honeywell DE transducer input.
physical smart transducer input table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT
PRO to configure a smart transducer input.
PID loop: Proportional, Integral, Derivative loop.
pit delay: Time used to allow the plunger to arrive after the slow arrival time has passed but before
the pit valve has opened.
Pit valve: Typically Valve B. May also be called blow-off valve.
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller.
plunger lift table: Used with the AutoPILOT PRO to configure a flow control plunger function.
point type conversion table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to
convert a point type into a different point type output.
process variable: The live value of the Process Output.
proportional PID: Used when an output proportional to the process selected is desired.
proportional term: Element of the PID loop that is proportional to the difference between the current
and desired process output. The difference between these two signals is called the error
signal.
prover audit/alarm base register assignment table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC to
define the audit/alarm items to be logged for a configured proving run.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 370


Glossary

prover board: An optional I/O board for the AutoEXEC that provides termination of two field input
signals (start/stop switches for prover).
psi: Pounds per square inch.
pulse input board: An optional I/O board for the AutoEXEC that provides termination of four pulse
(accumulator) field input signals.

R
radio scheduling table: Used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to increase the
autonomy of the power system by turning on the radio during scheduled polling intervals and
turning it off for the rest of the time.
RCV: Remote control valve.
remote control valve table: This function is under development.
RTC: Real-time clock.
RTS: Request to send.
RTS fall: Amount of time in milliseconds the program should hold the RTS signal as high after sending
the last data byte to the RTU.
RTS rise: Also referred to as "Radio Key Delay". Amount of time in milliseconds the RTS signal should
be raised before the program sends the first data byte to the RTU.
RTS wait: Amount of time in milliseconds the program should delay raising an RTS after receiving the
last data byte from the RTU.
RTU: Remote telemetry unit.
run switching function: Typical application involves two meter runs. The first meter run (Run 1)
constantly measures flow rate, and second meter run (Run 2) is switched inline to share the
measurement when flow rates exceed a certain limit. System usually has a control valve
mounted inline on Run 2. When the flow rate of Run 1 exceeds specified limit, the flow
computer opens the control valve using one of the unit's discrete outputs, placing Run 2 in
operation.

S
sampler accumulator table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to
configure a discrete output to activate when a set volume or value has been reached.
scanner function: Enables a SuperFLOW style flow computer to acquire data and control Modbus
type devices.
scheduled copy table: Table used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO to copy floating
point data to a specific location.
sequencing and direction table: This function is under development.
SF: SuperFLOW.
SG: Specific Gravity.
shut-in phase: Both the A (Sales) and the B (Blow-Off or pit) valves are closed and the plunger
drops.
slow arrival time: Time used for the slow arrival window of the plunger. Should be set to the nearest
tenth of a minute. Divide tubing depth by the slow plunger speed.
SOS: Speed of sound.
SP: Static pressure.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 371


Glossary

stacked orifice meter: Uses two differential pressure transducers, thereby increasing accuracy.
standard mode: Allows for limited access to tables and menus.
standard run switching for SF: Based strictly on flow rate. For runs that are more than a single
turbine or orifice, if open limit flow rate crosses dead band time that has been exceeded, next
run opens to share high flow capacity. However, if last opened run flow rate falls below closed
run limit, current run will be closed.
station control table: This function is under development.
stop bits: Used to signal the end of communication for a single packet.
supervisor security access level: The highest security access level. Allows for access to calibration
data and modification of all configuration parameters, including passwords.

T
technician security access level: Second highest level of security access. Identical to Supervisor,
except cannot modify passwords.
timer no pit plunger method: A variation of the timer method that removes the pit operation. It
cycles differently because no pit valve is present to assist the plunger in arriving to the
surface.
timer plunger method: A plunger lift method that uses timers to determine how long the shut-in
and after flow periods should be.
TRM: See Turner Rate Multiplier.
TRM decrement: When a fast or early arrival occurs, the software will decrease the TRM by this
value, essentially increasing afterflow time.
TRM increment: When a slow, late, or no arrival occurs, the software will increase the TRM by this
value, essentially decreasing afterflow time.
turbine meter: Uses a flow computer pulse input to measure the flow based on pulses from a turbine
blade.
Turner Rate Multiplier: Rate multiplier applied to the unloading rate of the well. TRM is multiplied by
the unloading rate to determine shut-in rate

U
ultrasonic BVC run switching: Ultrasonic block control valve (BVC) run switching. Algorithm is
identical to the one used for ultrasonic run switching except that the RTU monitors the BVC
signal. If signal is on, the RTU freezes the status of each run's valve status until the BVC
signal goes off.
ultrasonic monitor function: Each flow computer must be assigned a unique communications
address. The value may be from 1 to 4095.
ultrasonic run switching: Utilizes the same rule as standard run switching except that run 2 opens
when flow limit of run 1 crosses with exceeded dead band time and run 1 closes after flow
time elapses. If the run 2 crosses its open limit, run 3 then opens. Run 2 closes when flow
time elapses.

V
VCF: Volume correction factor.
view PCCHIT file function: Function used in AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO that
allows you to display meter historical data previously saved to a PCCHIT (MBS##) file.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 372


Glossary

W
warm restart: For the AutoEXEC and AutoPILOT PRO, a warm restart cycles power to the unit. No
data is destroyed.
Water Vapor Factor: A direct multiplier into the flow equation that compensates for any water vapor
in the system.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 373


Index

1 using with AutoPILOT PRO .................... 107


16-bit word value table (AE)...................... 94 B
16-bit word value table (APP) .................... 94 byte value table (AE) ................................93
A byte value table (APP)...............................93
AGA 10 calculation (AE) .......................... 181 C
AGA 10 calculation (APP) ........................ 181 calculations (AE) .............. 150, 152, 181, 192
AGA 7 audit/alarm base register assignment calculations (APP).....................152, 181, 192
table (AE) .......................................... 362
calibration (AE)
AGA 7 audit/alarm base register assignment
of analog inputs.....................................75
table (APP)......................................... 362
viewing calibration data ..........102, 113, 122
AGA 7 calculation (AE)............................ 361
calibration (APP) ......................................75
AGA 7 calculation (APP) .......................... 361
viewing calibration data .................102, 113
AGA 7 flow calculation history log assignment
table (AE) .......................................... 361 calibration wizard (AE) ..............................75
AGA 7 flow calculation history log assignment calibration wizard (APP).............................75
table (APP)......................................... 361
chromatograph (AE) ........................320, 332
alarm limits (AE) .......... 90, 99, 110, 119, 132
chromatograph (APP) .......................320, 332
alarm limits (APP) ................ 90, 99, 110, 132
cold restart (AE).......................................28
alarm status calculation table (AE) ........... 150
cold restart (APP) .....................................28
alarm status calculation table (APP).......... 150
Colors menu (AE) .....................................44
analog inputs (AE) ..............................49, 75
Colors menu (APP) ...................................44
analog inputs (APP).................................. 75
communication ports (AE) .........320, 321, 324
As Found / As Left data (AE) 75, 103, 114, 123
communication ports (APP) ........320, 321, 324
As Found / As Left data (APP) ...... 75, 103, 114
communications (AE) ........ 320, 327, 328, 340
audit/alarm logs (AE) ........ 350, 359, 362, 363
communications (APP) ...... 320, 327, 328, 340
audit/alarm logs (APP)....... 350, 359, 362, 363
configuration (AE) .............................. 57, 72
AutoCONFIG for AutoEXEC .... 7, 46, 47, 48, 49
configuration (APP) ............................. 57, 72
AutoCONFIG for AutoPILOT PRO..7, 46, 47, 48,
49 configuring (AE) ................................. 57, 72

AutoEXEC configuring (APP) ............................... 57, 72

using AutoCONFIG ............ 7, 46, 47, 48, 49 connecting inputs to data points (AE) .... 49, 72

AutoMITTER connecting inputs to data points (APP)... 49, 72

using with AutoEXEC ........................... 105 copying data (AE).....................................49

AutoMITTER PRO copying data (APP) ...................................49

using with AutoEXEC ........................... 105

Thermo Fisher Scientific 374


Index

D GQ audit/alarm base register assignments


table (AE)........................................... 363
date setup (AE) ....................................... 28
GQ audit/alarm base register assignments
date setup (APP)...................................... 28
table (APP) ......................................... 363
daylight savings time (AE) ...................... 347
H
daylight savings time (APP) ..................... 347
Help menu (AE)........................................45
differential pressure audit/alarm base register
Help menu (APP) ......................................45
assignments table ............................... 359
historical average calculation (AE) ............ 192
differential pressure audit/alarm base register
assignments table (APP) ...................... 359 historical average calculation (APP) ........... 192
differential pressure flow calculation (AE) . 152, historical data for flow control plunger (APP)
360 ......................................................... 312
differential pressure flow calculation (APP) 152, historical data log allocation table (AE) ...... 349
360
historical data log allocation table (APP)..... 349
differential pressure flow calculation history log
history (AE) .............. 175, 215, 349, 360, 361
assignments table ............................... 360
history (APP) ................... 175, 349, 360, 361
differential pressure flow calculation history log
assignments table (APP) ...................... 360 I
discrete inputs (AE)........................... 49, 125 I/O config wizard (AE)...............................72
discrete inputs (APP) ......................... 49, 125 I/O config wizard (APP) .............................72
discrete outputs (AE).............................. 135 I/O status display for proving function (AE) 227
discrete outputs (APP) ............................ 135 instantaneous data display (AE).........156, 171
discrete value table (AE) ........................... 92 instantaneous data display (APP) 156, 171, 307
discrete value table (APP) ......................... 92 interface (AE) ................................ 7, 48, 49
display (AE) .......................................... 351 interface (APP)............................... 7, 48, 49
display (APP)......................................... 351 intermittent plunger method (APP).....297, 300
E K
engineering units (setup in AutoCONFIG) (AE) keypad (AE) .......................................... 352
................................... 160, 173, 183, 211
keypad (APP) ......................................... 352
engineering units (setup in AutoCONFIG) (APP)
.......................................... 160, 173, 183 K-Factor setup (AE) ................................ 177

exporting .hst files (AE) ............................ 24 K-Factor setup (APP)............................... 177

F L

Files menu (AE) ....................................... 16 last batch data for liquid flow calculation (AE)
......................................................... 221
Files menu (APP) ..................................... 16
last periodic data display for liquid flow
flow rate history for flow control plunger (APP) calculation (AE) ................................... 217
........................................................ 309
LCD scroll list table (AE) .......................... 351
flow/volume data display for liquid flow
calculation (AE) .................................. 213 LCD scroll list table (APP) ........................ 351

Fwv (AE) ....................................... 166, 180 linear factor setup (AE) ........................... 218

Fwv (APP)...................................... 166, 180 liquid flow board (AE).............................. 127

G load factor plunger method (APP)254, 260, 262

gas lift plunger method (APP) ........... 302, 305 location factor setup (AE) .................162, 178

Thermo Fisher Scientific 375


Index

location factor setup (APP) ............... 162, 178 physical smart xducer input table (APP) ..... 107
M PID control (SF) ..................................... 142
manual plunger method (APP) .......... 289, 294 PID table (AE)........................................ 142
MBS## .................................................. 16 PID table (APP) ...................................... 142
measurement config wizard (AE)................ 57 plunger summary (APP)........................... 313
measurement config wizard (APP) .............. 57 prover results (AE) ................................. 228
meter run audit/alarm base registers pulse inputs (AE).................................... 127
assignments table (AE) ........................ 359
R
meter run audit/alarm base registers
raw value limits (AE).................104, 115, 124
assignments table (APP) ...................... 359
raw value limits (APP) ......................104, 115
min/max data display (AE) ............... 161, 174
reports (AE).............................................56
min/max data display (APP) ............. 161, 174
reports (APP) ...........................................56
miscellaneous data display (AE) 101, 112, 121,
134 S
miscellaneous data display (APP) 101, 112, 134 saving data (AE) ......................................48
Modbus communications (AE) .... 320, 327, 328 saving data (APP) .....................................48
Modbus communications (APP) .. 320, 327, 328 serial ports (AE) ..................................... 320
monthly volume display for liquid flow serial ports (APP) ................................... 320
calculation (AE) .................................. 210
single prover data (AE) ........................... 230
N
smart transducer (AE)............................. 105
navigation bar (AE) ......................37, 46, 343
communications block setup.................. 320
navigation bar (APP) ....................37, 46, 343
smart transducer (APP) ........................... 107
no pit plunger method (APP)...... 272, 277, 279
communications block setup.................. 320
O
Speed of Sound calculation (AE) ............... 181
off time history for flow control plunger (APP)
........................................................ 310 Speed of Sound calculation (APP).............. 181

Options menu (AE)................................... 37 static data (setup in AutoCONFIG) (AE) .... 153,
168
Options menu (APP) ................................. 37
static data (setup in AutoCONFIG) (APP)... 153,
orifice setup for liquid flow calculation (AE) 208 168
original plunger method (APP) ................. 251 status bar (AE) ........................................37
P status bar (APP) .......................................37
password table (AE) ............................... 354 System Control table (AE) ....................... 347
password table (APP) ............................. 354 System Control table (APP) ...................... 347
physical accumulator table (AE) ............... 127 System menu (AE) .................................... 8
physical accumulator table (APP).............. 127 System menu (APP) ................................... 8
physical discrete input table (AE) ............. 125 T
physical discrete input table (APP)............ 125 tank gauge (AE) ..............................320, 340
physical discrete output table (AE) ........... 135 tank gauge (APP) ............................320, 340
physical discrete output table (APP).......... 135 Text table (AE).........................................95
physical smart xducer input table (AE) ...... 105 Text table (APP) .......................................95

Thermo Fisher Scientific 376


Index

time setup (AE) ....................................... 28 value limits (APP) ..........89, 98, 109, 131, 346
time setup (APP) ..................................... 28 verification (AE) .......................................75
timer no pit plunger method (APP) ... 285, 286, verification (APP)......................................75
287
W
timer plunger method (APP) ...... 264, 268, 270
warm restart (AE).....................................28
toolbar (AE) .......................................37, 47
warm restart (APP) ...................................28
toolbar (APP) .....................................37, 47
water vapor factor (AE) ....................166, 180
Tools menu (AE) ...................................... 28
water vapor factor (APP) ..................166, 180
Tools menu (APP) .................................... 28
well stream factor (AE).....................165, 179
tubing and casing data for flow control plunger
well stream factor (APP) ...................165, 179
(APP) ................................................ 311
wizard (AE) ..................................57, 72, 75
V
wizard (APP) .................................57, 72, 75
value limits (AE) .... 89, 98, 109, 118, 131, 346

Thermo Fisher Scientific 377

You might also like